E55796 PDF

Oracle
[1] Big Data Appliance

Owner's Guide
Release 4 (4.0)
E55796-04
February 2015
Describes data center site planning, network configuration,
hardware and software installation, and maintenance of
Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide, Release 4 (4.0)
E55796-04
Copyright 2011, 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,
transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse
engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it
on behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software,
any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users
are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and
agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and
adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on
the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to
the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management
applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including
applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous
applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other
measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages
caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of
their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks
are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD,
Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced
Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content,
products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and
expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services
unless otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its
affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of
third-party content, products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and
Oracle.
Cloudera, Cloudera CDH, and Cloudera Manager are registered and unregistered trademarks of Cloudera,
Inc.
Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................................................................. xvii

Audience.................................................................................................................................................... xvii
Documentation Accessibility .................................................................................................................. xvii
Related Documentation ........................................................................................................................... xvii
Conventions ............................................................................................................................................. xviii
Backus-Naur Form Syntax ..................................................................................................................... xviii
Changes in This Release for Oracle Big Data Appliance ................................................... xix
Changes in Oracle Big Data Appliance Release 4 (4.0) ........................................................................ xix
Part I Preinstallation
1 Introduction to Oracle Big Data Appliance

About Oracle Big Data Appliance......................................................................................................... 1-1
Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components................................................................................... 1-1
Server Components.................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Spare Parts Kit Components .................................................................................................................. 1-3
Oracle Big Data Appliance Management Software........................................................................... 1-4
Oracle Big Data Appliance Restrictions on Use................................................................................. 1-4
2 Site Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance

General Environmental Requirements ................................................................................................ 2-1
Space Requirements ................................................................................................................................ 2-3
Receiving and Unpacking Requirements ....................................................................................... 2-3
Maintenance Access Requirements ................................................................................................. 2-4
Flooring Requirements............................................................................................................................ 2-4
Electrical Power Requirements.............................................................................................................. 2-5
PDUs for Oracle Big Data Appliance .............................................................................................. 2-5
Facility Power Requirements............................................................................................................ 2-8
Circuit Breaker Requirements .......................................................................................................... 2-9
Grounding Guidelines....................................................................................................................... 2-9
Temperature and Humidity Requirements......................................................................................... 2-9
Ventilation and Cooling Requirements............................................................................................ 2-10
Network Connection Requirements.................................................................................................. 2-12
iii
Ensuring That the Site Is Ready ......................................................................................................... 2-12
3 Understanding the Network Requirements

Overview of Network Requirements ................................................................................................... 3-1
Default Network Connections.......................................................................................................... 3-1
Minimum Requirements for the Networks .................................................................................... 3-2
Network Diagram .............................................................................................................................. 3-3
Cabling the Client Network ................................................................................................................... 3-4
How the Servers Connect to the Gateway Switches ..................................................................... 3-4
Using Splitter Cables for Connecting to the 40 Gbps Physical Ports.......................................... 3-5
What About Data Centers Without a 10 GbE Infrastructure? ..................................................... 3-5
Guidelines for Connecting to the Gateway Switches ................................................................... 3-6
Configuring Multiple Racks into a Single Hadoop Cluster......................................................... 3-6
Factory Network Settings ....................................................................................................................... 3-6
Port Assignments for Oracle Big Data Appliance Software ............................................................ 3-7
Preparing the Network for Oracle Big Data Appliance ................................................................... 3-9
4 Using Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility

Overview of Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility................................ 4-1
Generating the Configuration Files...................................................................................................... 4-3
About the Configuration Files............................................................................................................... 4-3
Validating the Network Settings .......................................................................................................... 4-4
Customer Details Page ............................................................................................................................ 4-5
Using Standardized Host Names .................................................................................................... 4-6
Using Customized Host Names....................................................................................................... 4-6
Naming Multirack Clusters .............................................................................................................. 4-6
Connecting to Oracle Big Data Appliance Over the Networks................................................... 4-6
Hardware Selection Page ........................................................................................................................ 4-7
Rack Details............................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Networking Page ...................................................................................................................................... 4-8
Client Ethernet Network Page ............................................................................................................... 4-8
Administration Network Page............................................................................................................... 4-9
InfiniBand Network Page.................................................................................................................... 4-10
General Network Properties Page...................................................................................................... 4-10
Review and Edit Details Page............................................................................................................. 4-11
Define Clusters Page ............................................................................................................................ 4-12
Cluster Page ............................................................................................................................................ 4-12
Adding to an Existing Cluster....................................................................................................... 4-12
A New Oracle NoSQL Database Cluster ..................................................................................... 4-13
A New CDH Cluster....................................................................................................................... 4-13
Complete Page ....................................................................................................................................... 4-18
5 Setting Up Auto Service Request

Understanding Auto Service Request .................................................................................................. 5-1
Getting Ready to Install ASR................................................................................................................. 5-2
Installing ASR Manager ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
iv
Verifying the ASR Manager Installation............................................................................................. 5-3
Configuring the Trap Destinations on Oracle Big Data Appliance ............................................... 5-4
Verifying ASR Assets.............................................................................................................................. 5-4
Validating Auto Service Request on Oracle Big Data Appliance................................................... 5-5
Troubleshooting ASR.............................................................................................................................. 5-6
Part II Hardware Installation and Configuration
6 Installing Oracle Big Data Appliance at the Site

Reviewing Safety Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 6-1
Unpacking Oracle Big Data Appliance................................................................................................ 6-2
Contents of the Shipping Kit ............................................................................................................ 6-3
Removing Oracle Big Data Appliance from the Shipping Crate ................................................ 6-4
Placing Oracle Big Data Appliance in Its Allocated Space .............................................................. 6-5
Moving Oracle Big Data Appliance................................................................................................. 6-5
Stabilizing Oracle Big Data Appliance............................................................................................ 6-6
Attaching a Ground Cable (Optional)............................................................................................. 6-9
Powering On the System for the First Time..................................................................................... 6-10
Inspecting the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack After It Is in Place ........................................ 6-10
Connecting Power Cords ............................................................................................................... 6-10
Powering On Oracle Big Data Appliance ................................................................................... 6-13
7 Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance Full Rack or Starter Rack

Configuring the KVM Switch................................................................................................................ 7-1
Starting the KVM Switch................................................................................................................... 7-2
Connecting the KVM Switch to the Management Network ........................................................ 7-2
Checking the KVM Firmware Version............................................................................................ 7-3
Configuring the KVM Switch to Access the Servers..................................................................... 7-3
Accessing a Server by Using the KVM Switch............................................................................... 7-4
Configuring the Cisco Ethernet Switch ............................................................................................... 7-4
Scope of the Configuration ............................................................................................................... 7-4
Prerequisites for Configuring the Ethernet Switch ....................................................................... 7-4
Configuring the Ethernet Switch on the Customer Network...................................................... 7-5
Setting Up Telnet Access on the Ethernet Switch.......................................................................... 7-8
Configuring SSH on the Ethernet Switch ....................................................................................... 7-9
Setting the Clock and Time Zone on the Ethernet Switch ........................................................... 7-9
Configuring the NTP Servers for the Ethernet Switch .............................................................. 7-10
Disabling the Spanning Tree ......................................................................................................... 7-11
Verifying the Ethernet Configuration .......................................................................................... 7-11
Configuring the InfiniBand Leaf and Spine Switches .................................................................. 7-12
Configuring an InfiniBand Switch................................................................................................ 7-13
Setting the Time Zone and Clock on an InfiniBand Switch ...................................................... 7-14
Checking the Health of an InfiniBand Switch............................................................................. 7-15
Checking the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switches ............................................ 7-17
Configuring the Power Distribution Units ...................................................................................... 7-18
Connecting the PDUs to the Network.......................................................................................... 7-18
v
Updating the PDU Firmware Version ......................................................................................... 7-19
Configuring the Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers ..................................................................... 7-19
Configuring the Network .................................................................................................................... 7-23
Copying the Configuration Files to Oracle Big Data Appliance .............................................. 7-23
Starting the Network Configuration ............................................................................................ 7-24
Connecting to the Administrative Network ............................................................................... 7-26
Connecting to the Client Network................................................................................................ 7-26
Completing the Network Configuration ..................................................................................... 7-27
Checking the Virtual Interface Cards (VNICs) ........................................................................... 7-29
Verifying Access to the Network Services................................................................................... 7-29
Configuring Multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance Racks ............................................................. 7-30
Configuring and Cabling Multiple Racks.................................................................................... 7-30
Validating a Multirack InfiniBand Network............................................................................... 7-32
8 Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance In-Rack Expansion Kit

About Expanding an Oracle Big Data Appliance Starter Rack ....................................................... 8-1
Checking the Contents of the In-Rack Expansion Kit................................................................... 8-1
Checking the Status of the Starter Rack .......................................................................................... 8-2
Installing the Servers in the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack ....................................................... 8-2
Configuring the Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers ........................................................................ 8-3
Setting Up the Network .......................................................................................................................... 8-4
Copying the Configuration Files...................................................................................................... 8-4
Configuring the Network ................................................................................................................. 8-5
Verifying the Network Configuration ............................................................................................ 8-6
Installing Oracle Big Data Appliance Software on the New Servers ............................................ 8-6
9 Connecting Multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance Racks

Extending a Rack by Adding Another Rack ....................................................................................... 9-1
Prerequisites for Multirack Cabling..................................................................................................... 9-2
Cabling Two Racks Together................................................................................................................. 9-2
Cabling Several Racks Together ........................................................................................................... 9-3
Part III Software Installation and Configuration
10 Installing the Oracle Big Data Appliance Software

About the Mammoth Utility ............................................................................................................... 10-1
Installation Prerequisites..................................................................................................................... 10-2
Downloading the Mammoth Software Deployment Bundle ....................................................... 10-3
Installing the Software on a New Rack ............................................................................................ 10-5
Installing the Software.................................................................................................................... 10-6
Adding Servers to a Cluster ................................................................................................................ 10-7
What If an Error Occurs During the Installation?........................................................................... 10-8
Upgrading the Software on Oracle Big Data Appliance ............................................................... 10-9
About the Operating System Versions......................................................................................... 10-9
Upgrading the Software................................................................................................................. 10-9
Changing the Configuration of Optional Software ..................................................................... 10-10
vi
Changing Support for Oracle Big Data Connectors................................................................. 10-11
Adding Support for Auto Service Request................................................................................ 10-13
Adding Support for Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control ........................................... 10-14
Adding Support for Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall ........................................... 10-14
Adding Disk Encryption .............................................................................................................. 10-15
Adding Kerberos Authentication ............................................................................................... 10-17
Reinstalling the Base Image.............................................................................................................. 10-18
Reimaging a Single Oracle Big Data Appliance Server ........................................................... 10-18
Reimaging an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack ....................................................................... 10-19
Reimaging an Oracle Big Data Appliance Cluster ................................................................... 10-21
Installing a One-Off Patch................................................................................................................. 10-23
Mammoth Software Installation and Configuration Utility ...................................................... 10-24
Mammoth Options........................................................................................................................ 10-24
Mammoth Installation Steps........................................................................................................ 10-25
Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility Syntax..................................................................................... 10-28
Oracle Big Data Appliance Base Imaging Utilities ...................................................................... 10-30
makebdaimage............................................................................................................................... 10-30
reimagecluster ............................................................................................................................... 10-31
reimagerack.................................................................................................................................... 10-31
Part IV Maintenance
11 Maintaining Oracle Big Data Appliance

Monitoring the Ambient Temperature of Servers.......................................................................... 11-1
Powering On and Off Oracle Big Data Appliance ......................................................................... 11-2
Nonemergency Power Procedures ............................................................................................... 11-2
Emergency Power-Off Considerations ........................................................................................ 11-3
Cautions and Warnings.................................................................................................................. 11-3
Adding Memory to the Servers .......................................................................................................... 11-4
Adding Memory to a Sun Server X4-2L or Sun Server X3-2L .................................................. 11-4
Adding Memory to Sun Fire X4270 M2 Servers ......................................................................... 11-4
Maintaining the Physical Disks of Servers ...................................................................................... 11-5
Verifying the Server Configuration .............................................................................................. 11-5
Maintaining the InfiniBand Network............................................................................................... 11-6
Backing Up and Restoring Oracle ILOM Settings...................................................................... 11-6
Replacing a Failed InfiniBand Switch .......................................................................................... 11-8
Verifying InfiniBand Network Operation ................................................................................... 11-9
Understanding the Network Subnet Manager Master ............................................................ 11-11
Changing the Number of Connections to a Gateway Switch..................................................... 11-12
Changing the NTP Servers ................................................................................................................ 11-13
Monitoring the PDU Current ............................................................................................................ 11-13
12 Replacing a Server Disk

Overview of the Disk Replacement Process .................................................................................... 12-1
About Disk Drive Identifiers.............................................................................................................. 12-2
Standard Disk Drive Mappings .................................................................................................... 12-2
vii
Standard Mount Points .................................................................................................................. 12-3
Obtaining the Physical Slot Number of a Disk Drive ................................................................ 12-3
Prerequisites for Replacing a Failing Disk ...................................................................................... 12-3
What If a Server Fails to Restart? ....................................................................................................... 12-5
Replacing a Disk Drive ........................................................................................................................ 12-6
Correcting a Mounted Partitions Error.............................................................................................. 12-8
Identifying the Function of a Disk Drive ......................................................................................... 12-9
Configuring an Operating System Disk ........................................................................................... 12-9
Partitioning the Operating System Disk .................................................................................... 12-10
Repairing the RAID Arrays ......................................................................................................... 12-13
Formatting the HDFS Partition of an Operating System Disk ............................................... 12-14
Restoring the Swap Partition....................................................................................................... 12-15
Restoring the GRUB Master Boot Records and HBA Boot Order.......................................... 12-16
Configuring an HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database Disk ............................................................ 12-17
Verifying the Disk Configuration ................................................................................................... 12-19
13 Oracle Big Data Appliance Utilities
14 Executing Commands Across a Cluster Using the dcli Utility

Overview of the dcli Utility ................................................................................................................ 14-1
Setting Up Passwordless SSH ....................................................................................................... 14-1
Basic Use of dcli............................................................................................................................... 14-2
dcli Syntax............................................................................................................................................... 14-3
dcli Return Values................................................................................................................................. 14-5
dcli Examples ......................................................................................................................................... 14-5
15 Using Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager

Oracle ILOM Overview........................................................................................................................ 15-1
Oracle ILOM Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 15-2
Oracle ILOM Users ......................................................................................................................... 15-2
Administrative Network Diagram ..................................................................................................... 15-2
Oracle ILOM IP Addresses for Oracle Big Data Appliance Components ................................. 15-3
Connecting to Oracle ILOM Using the Network ............................................................................ 15-3
Connecting to the Command-Line Interface............................................................................... 15-3
Connecting to the Web GUI........................................................................................................... 15-4
Connecting to Oracle ILOM Using a Serial Connection ............................................................... 15-5
Connecting to the Oracle ILOM of a Server ................................................................................ 15-5
Connecting to the Oracle ILOM of an InfiniBand Switch ......................................................... 15-5
Part V Appendixes
A Error Messages for Oracle Big Data Appliance

Auto Service Request Alerts: DISKALRT-02001 to DISKALRT-02006 ........................................ A-1
viii
B Replacement Units
Understanding Repair Categories........................................................................................................ B-1
Disk Controller Batteries ....................................................................................................................... B-2
LED Status Descriptions ........................................................................................................................ B-2
Sun Server LEDs................................................................................................................................ B-3
Sun InfiniBand Switch LEDs ........................................................................................................... B-4
Parts for Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers ..................................................................................... B-5
Parts for Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 .............................................................................. B-14
Parts for Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch ........................................................... B-15
Parts for the Cisco Ethernet Switch ................................................................................................... B-16
Parts for Power Distribution Units .................................................................................................... B-16
Cables and Cable Accessories for an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack ..................................... B-17
C In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 and X3-2
Cable Color Coding ................................................................................................................................ C-1
Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Layout ............................................................................................ C-1
Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cable Connections ...................................................................... C-4
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager Cable Connections............................................................ C-5
Single-Phase Power Distribution Unit Cable Connections ............................................................ C-6
Three-Phase Power Distribution Unit Cable Connections ............................................................. C-7
In-Rack InfiniBand Switch-to-Switch Cable Connections ............................................................. C-8
In-Rack InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cable Connections .............................................................. C-9
D In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data Appliance

Cable Color Coding ................................................................................................................................ D-1
Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Layout ............................................................................................ D-1
KVM Network Cable Connections...................................................................................................... D-2
Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cable Connections ...................................................................... D-3
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager Cable Connections............................................................ D-4
Single-Phase Power Distribution Unit Cable Connections ............................................................ D-5
Three-Phase Power Distribution Unit Cable Connections ............................................................. D-6
In-Rack InfiniBand Switch-to-Switch Cable Connections ............................................................. D-6
In-Rack InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cable Connections .............................................................. D-7
E Multirack Cabling Tables

Understanding Multirack Cabling ...................................................................................................... E-1
Cabling Together Oracle Exadata Database Machine and Oracle Big Data Appliance.......... E-2
Cabling the Switches in One Rack .................................................................................................. E-2
Cabling the Switches in Two Racks................................................................................................ E-3
Cabling the Switches in Up to Eight Racks ................................................................................... E-4
Key to Cabling Table Abbreviations................................................................................................... E-4
Two-Rack Cabling................................................................................................................................... E-4
Three-Rack Cabling ................................................................................................................................ E-6
Four-Rack Cabling .................................................................................................................................. E-7
Five-Rack Cabling ................................................................................................................................. E-10
ix
Six-Rack Cabling ................................................................................................................................... E-12
Seven-Rack Cabling.............................................................................................................................. E-16
Eight-Rack Cabling ............................................................................................................................... E-20
Index
x
xi
List of Examples
31 Output from bda-preinstall-checkip.sh ................................................................................ 3-10
71 Sample Output from networksetup-one .............................................................................. 7-25
72 Sample Output from networksetup-two .............................................................................. 7-27
73 Multirack Configuration File sample-multi-rack.json........................................................ 7-33
101 Mammoth Syntax Examples................................................................................................. 10-24
xii
List of Figures
21 Low-Voltage, Single-Phase Power Connector ........................................................................ 2-6
22 Low-Voltage Three-Phase Power Connector.......................................................................... 2-7
23 High-voltage Single Phase Power Connector ......................................................................... 2-7
24 High-Voltage Three-Phase Power Connector......................................................................... 2-8
25 Typical Data Center Configuration for Perforated Floor Tiles ......................................... 2-12
31 Network Diagram for Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2........................................................ 3-3
32 Network Diagram for Oracle Big Data Appliance................................................................. 3-4
41 Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility ............................................. 4-2
51 Auto Service Request Network Connections.......................................................................... 5-3
61 Oracle Big Data Appliance in the Shipping Crate.................................................................. 6-3
62 Carefully Push Oracle Big Data Appliance from Behind...................................................... 6-5
63 Stabilizing the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Using Leveling Feet ................................ 6-6
64 Location of Mounting Brackets on the Rack ........................................................................... 6-7
65 Bottom View of the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack ........................................................... 6-7
66 Base Position of the Rack to Measure (in mm) ....................................................................... 6-8
67 Securing the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Using Mounting Brackets ......................... 6-9
68 Earth Ground Attachment Bolt Location ............................................................................. 6-10
69 Location of Power Cord Cable Ties....................................................................................... 6-11
610 Power Cord Routing Out the Bottom ................................................................................... 6-12
611 Power Cord Routing Out the Top ......................................................................................... 6-12
612 PDU Switch Locations............................................................................................................. 6-13
111 Oracle ILOM 3.1 Configuration Backup............................................................................... 11-8
151 Administrative Network in Oracle Big Data Appliance .................................................... 15-3
152 Oracle ILOM 3.1 Web Interface.............................................................................................. 15-4
C1 Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 Full Rack Layout ............................................................... C-2
C2 Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 Starter Rack Layout .......................................................... C-3
C3 Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 Starter Rack With In-Rack Expansion............................ C-4
C4 Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Ports ...................................................................... C-9
D1 Rack Layout of Oracle Big Data Appliance............................................................................ D-2
D2 Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch Ports ......................................................... D-7
E1 Connections Between Spine Switch and Leaf Switches ....................................................... E-2
E2 Connections Between the Servers and the Leaf Switches .................................................... E-3
E3 Connecting Switches Across Two Racks ................................................................................ E-3
E4 Connecting Switches Across Multiple Racks......................................................................... E-4
xiii
List of Tables
11 Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components ...................................................................... 1-1
12 Sun Server X4-2L Server Components.................................................................................... 1-2
13 Sun Server X3-2L Server Components.................................................................................... 1-2
14 Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Components ................................................................................. 1-3
15 Bundled Components and Accessories .................................................................................. 1-3
16 Bundled Cables .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
17 In-Rack Spare Cables ................................................................................................................. 1-4
21 Environmental Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance Full Rack .......................... 2-1
22 Environmental Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance Starter Rack...................... 2-2
23 Shipping Measurements ........................................................................................................... 2-3
24 Access Route Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance ............................................... 2-4
25 Maintenance Access Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance................................... 2-4
26 Floor Load Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance ................................................... 2-4
27 Low-Voltage 15 kVA Single-Phase PDUs .............................................................................. 2-5
28 Low-Voltage 15 kVA Three-Phase PDUs ............................................................................... 2-6
29 High-voltage 15 kVA Single Phase PDUs .............................................................................. 2-7
210 High-Voltage 15 kVA Three-Phase PDUs .............................................................................. 2-8
211 Temperature, Humidity, and Altitude Requirements....................................................... 2-10
31 Default IP Addresses for Oracle Big Data Appliance........................................................... 3-6
32 Oracle Big Data Appliance Port Numbers ............................................................................. 3-7
33 CDH Port Numbers ................................................................................................................... 3-8
41 Customer Details Page .............................................................................................................. 4-5
42 Hardware Selection Page.......................................................................................................... 4-7
43 Rack Details Page....................................................................................................................... 4-7
44 Client Ethernet Page .................................................................................................................. 4-8
45 Administration Network Page................................................................................................. 4-9
46 InfiniBand Network Page ...................................................................................................... 4-10
47 General Network Properties Page ........................................................................................ 4-11
48 Advanced Network Properties ............................................................................................. 4-11
49 Define Clusters Page............................................................................................................... 4-12
410 Installed Components ............................................................................................................ 4-13
411 Oracle NoSQL Configuration................................................................................................ 4-13
412 User /Groups for a New CDH Cluster................................................................................ 4-14
413 Big Data SQL............................................................................................................................ 4-14
414 Installed Components ............................................................................................................ 4-15
415 Kerberos ................................................................................................................................... 4-15
416 On-Disk Encryption................................................................................................................ 4-16
417 Audit Vault .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
418 Auto Service Request.............................................................................................................. 4-17
419 Enterprise Manager Cloud Control...................................................................................... 4-17
420 Email Alerting Page................................................................................................................ 4-18
81 In-Rack Expansion Kit Components and Accessories.......................................................... 8-2
82 In-Rack Expansion Kit Cables .................................................................................................. 8-2
101 Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility ADD and REMOVE Keywords ............................. 10-29
102 Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility UPDATE Keywords................................................ 10-30
111 Threshold Values for Single-Phase, Low-Voltage PDU .................................................. 11-14
112 Threshold Values for Three-Phase, Low-Voltage PDU................................................... 11-14
113 Threshold Values for Single-Phase, High-Voltage PDU ................................................. 11-14
114 Threshold Values for Three-Phase, High-Voltage PDU.................................................. 11-14
121 Disk Drive Identifiers ............................................................................................................. 12-2
122 Mount Points ........................................................................................................................... 12-3
131 bdacli admin_cluster parameters ....................................................................................... 13-11
132 bdacli enable or disable Service Parameters ..................................................................... 13-12
xiv
133 BDACLI start, stop, and restart Parameters...................................................................... 13-12
134 InfiniBand Parameters.......................................................................................................... 13-13
135 Rack Parameters.................................................................................................................... 13-13
136 General Cluster Parameters................................................................................................. 13-14
137 Oracle Big Data Connectors Status Parameters................................................................ 13-15
138 Cluster Network Parameters............................................................................................... 13-15
139 Cluster Security Parameters ................................................................................................ 13-16
1310 Server Parameters ................................................................................................................. 13-16
1311 One-Off Patch Parameters ................................................................................................... 13-17
141 dcli Options.............................................................................................................................. 14-4
B1 Oracle Big Data Appliance Repair Categories...................................................................... B-1
B2 Sun Server LED Status Descriptions ...................................................................................... B-3
B3 Sun InfiniBand Switch LED Status Descriptions.................................................................. B-4
B4 Replacement Parts for a Sun Server X4-2L Server ............................................................... B-6
B5 Replacement Parts for a Sun Server X3-2L Server ............................................................... B-9
B6 Replacement Parts for Sun Fire X4270 M2 Servers ............................................................ B-11
B7 Replacement Parts for the Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 .................................... B-15
B8 Replacement Parts for the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch.................. B-15
B9 Replacement Parts for Cisco Catalyst Ethernet .................................................................. B-16
B10 Replacement Parts for Power Distribution Units............................................................... B-17
B11 Replacement Cables for an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack........................................... B-18
C1 Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cabling ............................................................................. C-4
C2 Oracle ILOM Cabling ............................................................................................................... C-5
C3 Single-Phase PDU Cabling ...................................................................................................... C-6
C4 Three-Phase PDU Cabling ....................................................................................................... C-7
C5 InfiniBand Switch-to-Switch Cabling .................................................................................... C-8
C6 InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cabling ..................................................................................... C-9
D1 KVM Cabling ............................................................................................................................. D-2
D2 Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cabling ............................................................................. D-3
D3 Oracle ILOM Cabling ............................................................................................................... D-4
D4 Single-Phase PDU Cabling ...................................................................................................... D-5
D5 Three-Phase PDU Cabling ....................................................................................................... D-6
D6 InfiniBand Switch-to-Switch Cabling .................................................................................... D-7
D7 InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cabling ..................................................................................... D-7
E1 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Two-Rack System .................................. E-5
E2 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Two-Rack System ............................. E-5
E3 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Three-Rack System ................................ E-6
E4 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Three-Rack System ........................... E-6
E5 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Three-Rack System .............................. E-7
E6 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Four-Rack System.................................. E-8
E7 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Four-Rack System ............................. E-8
E8 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Four-Rack System................................ E-9
E9 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Four-Rack System.............................. E-9
E10 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Five-Rack System................................. E-10
E11 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Five-Rack System............................ E-10
E12 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Five-Rack System............................... E-11
E13 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Five-Rack System............................. E-11
E14 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in a Five-Rack System ................................ E-12
E15 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Six-Rack System................................... E-13
E16 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Six-Rack System .............................. E-13
E17 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Six-Rack System................................. E-14
E18 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Six-Rack System............................... E-14
E19 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in a Six-Rack System .................................. E-15
E20 Leaf Switch Connections for the Sixth Rack in a Six-Rack System.................................. E-15
E21 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Seven-Rack System.............................. E-16
xv
E22 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Seven-Rack System......................... E-17
E23 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Seven-Rack System............................ E-17
E24 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Seven-Rack System.......................... E-18
E25 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in a Seven-Rack System ............................. E-18
E26 Leaf Switch Connections for the Sixth Rack in a Seven-Rack System............................. E-19
E27 Leaf Switch Connections for the Seventh Rack in a Seven-Rack System ....................... E-20
E28 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in an Eight-Rack System ............................ E-20
E29 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in an Eight-Rack System........................ E-21
E30 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in an Eight-Rack System .......................... E-21
E31 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in an Eight-Rack System ........................ E-22
E32 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in an Eight-Rack System ............................ E-23
E33 Leaf Switch Connections for the Sixth Rack in an Eight-Rack System ........................... E-23
E34 Leaf Switch Connections for the Seventh Rack in an Eight-Rack System ...................... E-24
E35 Leaf Switch Connections for the Eighth Rack in an Eight-Rack System......................... E-24
xvi
Preface
This guide describes Oracle Big Data Appliance, which is used for acquiring,
organizing, and analyzing very large data sets. It includes information about hardware
operations, site planning and configuration, and physical, electrical, and
environmental specifications.
This preface contains the following topics:
Audience
Documentation Accessibility
Related Documentation
Conventions
Backus-Naur Form Syntax
Audience
This guide is intended for Oracle Big Data Appliance customers and those responsible
for data center site planning, installation, configuration, and maintenance of Oracle
Big Data Appliance.
Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle
Accessibility Program website at
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support

Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support
through My Oracle Support. For information, visit
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing
impaired.
Related Documentation
The following Oracle libraries contain hardware information for Oracle Big Data
Appliance. Links to these libraries are available through the Big Data library at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E55659_01/index.htm
Sun Server X4-2L library:
xvii
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E36975_01/
Sun Rack II 1042 and 1242 library:
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19844-01/
Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch library:
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26699_01/index.html
Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 library:
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.1 library:
Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this document:
Convention Meaning
boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated
with an action, or terms defined in text or the glossary.
italic Italic type indicates book titles, emphasis, or placeholder variables for
which you supply particular values.
monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph, URLs, code
in examples, text that appears on the screen, or text that you enter.
# prompt The pound (#) prompt indicates a command that is run as the Linux
root user.
Backus-Naur Form Syntax

The syntax in this reference is presented in a simple variation of Backus-Naur Form
(BNF) that uses the following symbols and conventions:
Symbol or Convention Description

[] Brackets enclose optional items.
{} Braces enclose a choice of items, only one of which is required.
| A vertical bar separates alternatives within brackets or braces.
... Ellipses indicate that the preceding syntactic element can be
repeated.
delimiters Delimiters other than brackets, braces, and vertical bars must be
entered as shown.
boldface Words appearing in boldface are keywords. They must be typed as
shown. (Keywords are case-sensitive in some, but not all,
operating systems.) Words that are not in boldface are
placeholders for which you must substitute a name or value.
xviii
Changes in This Release for Oracle Big Data
Appliance
This preface describes the changes in Oracle Big Data Appliance 4.0.
Changes in Oracle Big Data Appliance Release 4 (4.0)

The following are changes in Oracle Big Data Appliance release 4 (4.0):
New Features
Oracle Big Data SQL 1.0.0
Oracle Big Data SQL supports queries against vast amounts of big data stored in
multiple data sources, including HDFS and Hive. You can view and analyze data
from various data stores together, as if it were all stored in an Oracle database.
Support for Oracle Big Data SQL includes the following new features in Oracle
Database:
DBMS_HADOOP PL/SQL package
Hive static data dictionary views
Access drivers for Hadoop and Hive
Oracle Big Data SQL is an installation option, which you can specify using the
Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility.
You can monitor and manage Oracle Big Data SQL using the bdacli command
and Cloudera Manager.
See "bdacli" on page 13-11 and Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide.
Service Migration
The bdacli utility can migrate services from a failing critical node to a healthy
noncritical node. It can also remove failing critical and noncritical nodes from a
cluster, and restore them to the cluster after repairs. See "bdacli" on page 13-11 and
Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide.
Software Upgrades
Cloudera's Distribution including Apache Hadoop 5.1.0
Cloudera Manager 5.1.1
Perfect Balance 2.2.0
Oracle Data Integrator Agent 12.1.3.0 (for Oracle Data Integrator Application
Adapter for Hadoop)
xix
See Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide.
Oracle NoSQL Database Zone Support
The Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility and the
mammoth -e command support multiple zones on Oracle NoSQL Database
clusters. You can add nodes to an existing zone, or create a new primary or
secondary zones.
See "Oracle NoSQL Configuration" on page 4-13 and "Mammoth Software
Installation and Configuration Utility" on page 10-24.
Multiple Rack Clusters
You can now install a cluster on multiple racks using one cluster_name-config.json
file.
xx
Part I
Part I Preinstallation
You must complete the preinstallation procedures before receiving shipment of Oracle
Big Data Appliance, to avoid delays with the installation.
Part I contains the following chapters:
Chapter 1, "Introduction to Oracle Big Data Appliance"
Chapter 2, "Site Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance"
Chapter 3, "Understanding the Network Requirements"
Chapter 4, "Using Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility"
Chapter 5, "Setting Up Auto Service Request"
1
Introduction to Oracle Big Data Appliance
1
This chapter describes the features and hardware components of Oracle Big Data
Appliance. It also includes usage information.
This chapter contains these sections:
About Oracle Big Data Appliance
Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components
Server Components
Spare Parts Kit Components
Oracle Big Data Appliance Management Software
Oracle Big Data Appliance Restrictions on Use
About Oracle Big Data Appliance

Oracle Big Data Appliance is an engineered system of hardware and software
optimized to capture and analyze the massive volumes of unstructured data generated
by social media feeds, email, web logs, photographs, smart meters, sensors, and
similar devices.
Oracle Big Data Appliance is engineered to work with Oracle Exadata Database
Machine and Oracle Exalytics In-Memory Machine to provide the most advanced
analysis of all data types, with enterprise-class performance, availability,
supportability, and security.
The Oracle Linux operating system and Cloudera's Distribution including Apache
Hadoop (CDH) underlie all other software components installed on Oracle Big Data
Appliance.
See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide
Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components

Oracle Big Data Appliance consists of a rack and the components to connect to your
network. Table 11 lists the components in an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack.
Table 11 Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components

Full Rack Starter Rack Description
18 6 Sun Server X4-2L, Sun Server X3-2L, or Sun Fire X4270 M2 (full
rack only)
1 1 Sun Rack II 1242 base
Introduction to Oracle Big Data Appliance 1-1

Server Components
Table 11 (Cont.) Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components

Full Rack Starter Rack Description
2 2 Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway NM2-GW switches
1 1 Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 NM2-36P switches
1 1 Cisco Catalyst 4948-E-F Ethernet switch (4948 in a Sun Fire X4270
M2-based rack)
2 2 Power distribution units
0 or 1 0 KVM (only in Sun Fire X4270 M2-based racks)
Server Components
Table 12 lists the components of a Sun Server X4-2L.
Table 12 Sun Server X4-2L Server Components

Quantity Description
1 Sun Server X4-2L server base
2 Eight-core Intel Xeon E5-2650 v2 processors (2.6 GHz)
8 8 GB DDR3 2RX4 1600 MHz DIMMs (64 GB RAM expandable up to 512 GB)
12 4 TB 3.5-inch 7200 RPM drives high capacity SAS (hot swappable)
1 Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager v3.1 with an Ethernet port for remote
management
2 InfiniBand 4 x QDR (4 Gbps) ports (One dual-port PCIe 3.0 Host Channel Adapter
network interface card)
4 Embedded 10 gigabit Ethernet port
1 Host bus adapter (disk controller) with 8 internal ports and 512 MB
battery-backed write cache. SAS III 6 GBPS
2 Redundant hot-swappable power supplies and fans
1 USB-2 4 GB flash drive
Table 13 lists the components of a Sun Server X3-2L.
Table 13 Sun Server X3-2L Server Components

1 Sun Server X3-2L server base
2 Eight-core Intel Xeon E5-2660 processors (2.2 GHz)
8 8 GB DDR3 2RX4 1600 MHz DIMMs (64 GB RAM expandable up to 512 GB)
12 3 TB 3.5-inch 7200 RPM drives high capacity SAS (hot swap)
1 Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager v3.1 with an Ethernet port for remote
management
2 InfiniBand 4 x QDR (4 Gbps) ports (One dual-port PCIe 2.0 Host Channel Adapter
network interface card)
battery-backed write cache. SAS III 6 GBPS
1-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

Table 13 (Cont.) Sun Server X3-2L Server Components

2 Redundant hot-swappable power supplies and fans
Table 14 lists the components of a Sun Fire X4270 M2.
Table 14 Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Components

1 Sun Fire X4270 M2 server base
2 Six-core Intel Xeon X5675 processors (3.06 GHz)
6 8 GB DDR3 2RX4 1333 MHz DIMMs (48 GB RAM)
12 3 TB 3.5-inch 7200 RPM drives
1 Ethernet port for Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager v3.0 for remote
management
1 Dual-port 4X QDR (40 Gbps) InfiniBand Host Channel Adapter Network Interface
Card
battery-backed write cache
2 Redundant power supplies and fans

The Oracle Big Data Appliance spare parts kit includes disk drives, accessory kits,
cables, and documentation. Table 15 and Table 16 identify the bundled spares.
Table 15 Bundled Components and Accessories

Part Number Quantity Description
7066826 2 4 TB 3.5-inch 7200 RPM drives
590-896-501B 1 LCD Accessory Kit (Sun Fire X4270 M2-based racks only)
1 Sun Server X4-2L Documentation Kit
1 Sun Rack II Accessory Kit
53-2332-xx 1 Cisco Switch Documents and Accessory Kit
Table 16 Bundled Cables

Part Number Length Quantity Description
530-4446-01 5 meters 10 QSFP passive copper cable for multiracking
530-4445-01 3 meters 6 QSFP passive copper cable for multiracking
350-1519-01 -- 3 ASSY, NM2 serial cable sets for the
InfiniBand switches

Table 17 lists the spare cables that are secured to the center section of an Oracle Big
Data Appliance rack.
Table 17 In-Rack Spare Cables

530-4445-01 3 meters 2 QSFP passive copper replacement cables
530-4437-01 10 feet 1 Orange Cat 5
530-4435-01 10 feet 1 Black Cat 5
530-4433-01 10 feet 1 Red Cat 5
530-4432-01 7 feet 1 Blue Cat 5

The software components are installed on all servers in an Oracle Big Data Appliance
rack. Oracle Linux, required drivers, firmware, and hardware verification utilities are
factory installed. Among them are the following tools:
Note: See Chapter 13 except where directed otherwise.
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (Oracle ILOM) consists of preinstalled,

dedicated hardware and software that you can use to manage and monitor the
servers and switches in an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack. See Chapter 15.
The setup-root-ssh utility sets up passwordless SSH for the root user among all
the servers in an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack. See "Setting Up Passwordless
SSH" on page 14-1.
The dcli utility executes commands across a group of servers on Oracle Big Data
Appliance and returns the output. See Chapter 14.
Various utilities check the health of the cluster and the networks. See Chapter 13.
All end-user software is installed on site using the Mammoth utility. See Chapter 10.
See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide for
information about using Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control
and Cloudera Manager to monitor Oracle Big Data Appliance.

The following restrictions apply to hardware and software modifications to Oracle Big
Data Appliance. Violating these restrictions can result in the loss of warranty and
support.
Oracle Big Data Appliance hardware cannot be modified or customized, with two
exceptions:
1. Replace the administrative 48-port Cisco 4948 Ethernet switch. Customers can
do the following:
Replace the Gigabit Ethernet switch with an equivalent 1U 48-port Gigabit
Ethernet switch that conforms to their internal data center network
standards. This replacement must be performed by customers at their own
expense and labor, after delivery of Oracle Big Data Appliance. If
customers choose to make this change, then Oracle cannot make or assist

with this change given the numerous possible scenarios involved, and it is
not included as part of the standard installation. Customers must supply
the replacement hardware, and make or arrange for this change through
other means.
Remove the Cat 5 cables connected to the Ethernet switch and connect
them to the customer network through an external switch or patch panel.
Customers must perform these changes at their expense and labor. In this
case, the Cisco 4948 Ethernet switch in the rack can be turned off and
disconnected from the data center network.
2. In a rack without a KVM, install a top-of-rack (TOR) switch that supports both
10 GbE (or 40 GbE) and 1 GbE, such as the Sun Network 10 GbE Switch 72p, in
rack slots 41 and 42. These slots are empty in the factory configuration.
Customers must perform this installation at their expense and labor. It is not
included as part of the standard installation.
This modification is not permitted in Sun Fire X4270 M2-based racks, which
have no empty slots.
Customers cannot update the firmware directly on Oracle Big Data Appliance
servers. Oracle Big Data Appliance patches update the firmware of the server
ILOM/BIOS, InfiniBand host channel adapters (HCA), disk controller host bus
adapters (HBA), and hard drives (HDD).
The only exception is if the customer replaces a faulty server component (such as a
disk drive) with a unit installed with firmware at a lower version than the faulty
component. The upgrade must be performed using the bdaupdatefw utility.
Customers can update the firmware of the other components of Oracle Big Data
Appliance:
Customers can update the IOS and firmware versions on the Cisco 4948
Ethernet switch to meet their data center requirements.
Customers can update the firmware of the InfiniBand switches if the updates
comply with the validated versions documented in My Oracle Support ID
1528190.1.
Customers can update the firmware of the power distribution units (PDUs) if
the updates comply with the validated versions documented in My Oracle
Support ID 1528190.1.
Customers can update the firmware of the KVM switch and the KMM
(keyboard, monitor, mouse) as needed (Sun Fire X4270 M2-based rack only).
Customers can install additional software on Oracle Big Data Appliance servers.
Oracle does not support questions or issues with the nonstandard modules. If a
server fails, and Oracle suspects that the failure may have been caused by a
nonstandard module, then Oracle Support may refer the customer to the vendor of
the nonstandard module or ask that the issue be reproduced without the
nonstandard module.
Modifying the server operating system other than by applying official patches and
upgrades is not supported.
InfiniBand-related packages must always be maintained at the officially supported
release.
You can install third-party software that complies with the following restrictions:
The software must support the version of 64-bit Oracle Linux running on

The software must be related to the use of Cloudera's Distribution including

Apache Hadoop (CDH) or Oracle NoSQL Database installed on the cluster, or
to Information Technologies (IT) or data center requirements, such as
monitoring software.
The software must not overwrite, update, replace, or invalidate the software
components already installed on Oracle Big Data Appliance. Run bdachecksw
on each server where new software is installed, to ensure that the original
software components are still valid. See bdachecksw on page 13-9.
The software must not consume CPU, disk, or memory resources to the extent
that it adversely affects the operating system, the CDH cluster, or Oracle
NoSQL Database.
Customers are responsible for supporting all software on Oracle Big Data
Appliance that they install in addition to the software installed by the Mammoth
utility.
Customers can use Cloudera Manager to stop and start services, but cannot use it
to move services from one server to another. The Hadoop services such as
NameNode and JobTracker must remain on the servers where they were installed
by the Mammoth utility.
See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide for service
locations
Customers cannot connect USB devices to Oracle Big Data Appliance servers
except as documented in this guide. In those documented situations, the USB
device should not draw more than 100 mA of power.
The network ports on the servers can connect to external non-Sun servers using
Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) or network file system (NFS)
protocols. However, the Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) protocol is not
supported.
Only switches specified for use in Oracle Big Data Appliance, Oracle Exadata
Database Machine, and Oracle Exalogic Elastic Cloud Machine can be connected to
the InfiniBand network. Connecting third-party switches and other switches not
used in these engineered systems is not supported.

2
Site Requirements for Oracle Big Data
2
Appliance
This chapter describes the site requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance. Use this
chapter while you complete the Oracle Big Data Appliance Site Checklists.
This chapter contains these sections:
General Environmental Requirements
Space Requirements
Flooring Requirements
Electrical Power Requirements
Temperature and Humidity Requirements
Ventilation and Cooling Requirements
Network Connection Requirements
Ensuring That the Site Is Ready
See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Site Checklists

Table 21 shows the general environmental requirements for Oracle Big Data
Appliance. The other sections in this chapter provide detailed information.
Table 21 Environmental Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance Full Rack
Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2
Environmental Component and X3-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance1
Net Weight 829 kg (1828 lb) 816.5 kg (1800 lb)
See Also: "Flooring Requirements"
on page 2-4
Acoustic levels 8.3 Bel 8.3 Bel
Power Maximum: 10 kW (10.2 kVA) Maximum: 12.0 kW (12.25 kVA)
See Also: "Electrical Power Typical: 7 kW (7.15 kVA) Typical: 8.4 kW (8.6 kVA)2
Requirements" on page 2-5
Site Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance 2-1

Table 21 (Cont.) Environmental Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance Full Rack
Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2
Environmental Component and X3-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance1
Cooling Maximum: 34,142 BTU/hour (34,838 Maximum: 40,971 BTU/hour (41,807
kJ/hour kJ/hour)
See Also: "Temperature and
Humidity Requirements" on Typical: 23,940 BTU/hour (24,420 Typical: 28,680 BTU/hour (29,265
page 2-9 and "Ventilation and kJ/hour) kJ/hour)
Cooling Requirements" on page 2-10
Air flow front-to-back (subject to Maximum: 1,573 CFM Maximum: Approximately 1,886
actual data center environment) CFM
Typical: 1,103 CFM
See Also: "Temperature and Typical: Approximately 1,340 CFM
Humidity Requirements" on
page 2-9, and "Ventilation and
IP addresses 24 for Ethernet network 24 for Ethernet network
See Also: Chapter 3, 18 for InfiniBand network 18 for InfiniBand network
"Understanding the Network
Requirements."
Network drops One network connection Minimum of two network
connections
See Also: Chapter 3,
Requirements."
External connectivity 1 x 1 Gbps Ethernet ports 2 x 1 Gbps Ethernet ports
See Also: Chapter 3, 18 x 10 Gbps Ethernet ports 18 x 10 Gbps Ethernet ports
Requirements."
1
Sun Fire X4270 M2-based rack
2
Varies based on application load.
Table 22 shows the general environmental requirements for the starter rack and
in-rack expansion kit.
Table 22 Environmental Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance Starter Rack
Starter Rack with One In-Rack
Environmental Component Starter Rack Expansion Kit
Net Weight 418 kg (922 lb) 635 kg (1400 lb)
See Also: "Flooring Requirements"
on page 2-4
Acoustic levels 76 Bel 79 Bel
Power Maximum: 4.2 kW Maximum: 7.7 kW)
See Also: "Electrical Power Typical: 3 kW Typical: 5.4 kW1
Requirements" on page 2-5
Cooling Maximum: 14,052 BTU/hour Maximum: 26,411 BTU/hour
(14,825.6 kJ/hour (27,865.1 kJ/hour)
Humidity Requirements" on Typical: 9,836 BTU/hour (10,377.5 Typical: 18,487 BTU/hour (19,504.8
page 2-9 and "Ventilation and kJ/hour) kJ/hour)

Space Requirements
Table 22 (Cont.) Environmental Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance Starter Rack
Starter Rack with One In-Rack
Environmental Component Starter Rack Expansion Kit
Air flow front-to-back (subject to Maximum: 676 CFM Maximum: 1223 CFM
actual data center environment)
Typical: 473 CFM Typical: 856 CFM
Humidity Requirements" on
page 2-9, and "Ventilation and
IP addresses 12 for Ethernet network 18 for Ethernet network
See Also: Chapter 3, 6 for InfiniBand network 12 for InfiniBand network
Requirements."
Network drops One network connection One network connection
See Also: Chapter 3,
Requirements."
External connectivity 1 x 1 Gbps Ethernet port 1 x 1 Gbps Ethernet port
See Also: Chapter 3, 6 x 10 Gbps Ethernet ports 12 x 10 Gbps Ethernet ports
Requirements."
1
Varies based on application load.
Space Requirements
The space requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance are as follows:
Height: 200 cm (79 inches)
Width: 60 cm with side panels (24 inches)
Depth: 120 cm (47.5 inches)
The minimum ceiling height for the cabinet is 230 cm (90 inches), measured from the
true floor or raised floor, whichever is higher. An additional 92 cm (36 inches) is
required above the rack height in the front and rear aisle space for maintenance access.
The space surrounding the cabinet must not restrict the movement of cool air between
the air conditioner and the front of the systems within the cabinet, or the movement of
hot air coming out of the rear of the cabinet.
Receiving and Unpacking Requirements

Before Oracle Big Data Appliance arrives, ensure that the receiving area is large
enough for the package. Table 23 lists the dimensions and weight of the shipped
items.
Table 23 Shipping Measurements

Measurement Full Rack Starter Rack Expansion Kit
Height 216 cm (85 inches) 216 cm (85 inches) 132.1 cm (52 inches)
Width 122 cm (48 inches) 122 cm (48 inches) 123.2 cm (48.5 inches)
Depth 157.5 cm (62 inches) 157.5 cm (62 inches) 101.6 cm (40 inches)
Weight 908 kg (2002 lb) 497 kg (1096 lb) 275 kg (606 lb)

If your loading dock meets the height and ramp requirements for a standard freight
carrier truck, then you can use a pallet jack to unload the rack. If not, you must
provide a standard forklift or other means to unload the rack. You can also request that
the rack be shipped in a truck with a lift gate.
Leave Oracle Big Data Appliance in its shipping container until it arrives at the
installation site. Ensure sufficient clearance and clear pathways for moving it from the
unpacking location to the installation location. The entire access route to the
installation site should be free of raised-pattern flooring that can cause vibration.
Use a conditioned space when removing the packaging material to reduce particles
before entering the data center. Allow enough space for unpacking Oracle Big Data
Appliance from its shipping cartons. Table 24 lists the access route requirements.
Table 24 Access Route Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance

Access Route Item With Shipping Pallet Without Shipping Pallet
Minimum door height 218.4 cm (86 inches) 204 cm (80.5 inches)
Minimum door width 127 cm (50 inches) 64 cm (25.5 inches)
Minimum elevator depth 162.6 cm (64 inches) 124 cm (49 inches)
Maximum incline 6 degrees 6 degrees
Minimum elevator, pallet jack, 1134 kg (2500 lb) 1134 kg (2500 lb)
and floor loading capacity
Maintenance Access Requirements

The maintenance area must be large enough for Oracle Big Data Appliance and have
the required access space. For example, the required space to remove the side panels is
67.6 cm (26.6 inches). Table 25 lists the maintenance access requirements.
Open tiles are required for electrical access.
Table 25 Maintenance Access Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance

Location Maintenance Access Requirement
Rear maintenance 91.4 cm (36 inches)
Front maintenance 91.4 cm (36 inches)
Top maintenance 91.4 cm (36 inches)
Oracle recommends that Oracle Big Data Appliance be installed on raised flooring.
The site floor and the raised flooring must be able to support the total weight.
Table 26 lists the floor load requirements.
Table 26 Floor Load Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance

Description Requirement
Maximum allowable weight of installed rack equipment 952.5 kg (2100 lb)
Maximum allowable weight of installed power distribution 52 kg (115 lb)
units
Maximum dynamic load (maximum allowable weight of 1050 kg (2315 lb)
installed equipment including PDUs)


Oracle Big Data Appliance can operate effectively over a wide range of voltages and
frequencies. However, it must have a reliable power source. Damage may occur if the
ranges are exceeded. Electrical disturbances such as the following may damage Oracle
Big Data Appliance:
Fluctuations caused by brownouts
Wide and rapid variations in input voltage levels or in input power frequency
Electrical storms
Faults in the distribution system, such as defective wiring
To protect Oracle Big Data Appliance from such disturbances, you should have a
dedicated power distribution system, power-conditioning equipment, and lightning
arresters or power cables to protect from electrical storms.
Each rack has two preinstalled power distribution units (PDUs). The PDUs accept
different power sources. You must specify the type of PDU that is correct for your
Oracle Big Data Appliance and data center.
PDUs for Oracle Big Data Appliance

The type of PDU depends on the location where Oracle Big Data Appliance is
installed. Refer to the appropriate sections for your location:
Single-Phase PDUs for North America, South America, Japan, and Taiwan
Three-Phase PDUs for North America, South America, Japan, and Taiwan
Single-Phase PDUs for Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia Pacific
Three-Phase PDUs for Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia Pacific
Single-Phase PDUs for North America, South America, Japan, and Taiwan
Table 27 lists the requirements for low-voltage single-phase PDUs for North America,
South America, Japan, and Taiwan. There are two PDUs per rack.
Table 27 Low-Voltage 15 kVA Single-Phase PDUs

Option Requirement per PDU
Number of inputs 3 x 30A single phase
Voltage 200 to 240 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Current 24A maximum per input
Power rating 15 kVA
Output current 72A (3 x 24A)
Outlets 42 x C13; 6 x C19
Outlet groups 6
Group protection 1 20A
Data center receptacle 15 kVA, with three 30A/250V 2-pole/3-wire NEMA L6-30P
plugs
1
UL489 2-pole circuit breaker

The following are needed to connect Oracle Big Data Appliance to a low-voltage
single-phase power source:
6 power cords for two PDUs, 30A at 200 to 240 VAC
6 receptacles to connect the PDUs to 6 NEMA L6-30 data center receptacles
Figure 21 shows the low-voltage, single-phase PDU power connector for North
America, South America, Japan, and Taiwan.
Figure 21 Low-Voltage, Single-Phase Power Connector
Three-Phase PDUs for North America, South America, Japan, and Taiwan
Table 28 lists the requirements for low-voltage three-phase PDUs for North America,
South America, Japan, and Taiwan. There are two PDUs per rack.
Table 28 Low-Voltage 15 kVA Three-Phase PDUs

Number of inputs 1 x 60A three-phase 4-wire
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Current 40A maximum per phase
Power rating 14.4 kVA
Outlet groups 6
Group protection1 20A
Data center receptacle 15 kVA IEC 60309 60A 4-pin 250 VAC three-phase IP67
1
The following are needed to connect Oracle Big Data Appliance to a low-voltage
three-phase power source:
2 power cords for two PDUs, 60A at 190 to 220 VAC three-phase
2 receptacles to connect the PDUs to 2 IEC 60309 60A 4-pin 250 VAC three-phase
IP67 data center receptacles
Figure 22 shows the low-voltage three-phase PDU power connector for North
America, South America, Japan, and Taiwan.

Figure 22 Low-Voltage Three-Phase Power Connector
Single-Phase PDUs for Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia Pacific
Table 29 lists the requirements for a 15 kVA high-voltage single-phase PDU for
Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia Pacific, except Japan and Taiwan. There are
two PDUs per rack.
Table 29 High-voltage 15 kVA Single Phase PDUs

Frequency 50/60 Hz
Current 25A maximum per input
Power rating 15 kVA
Outlet groups 6
Group protection1 20A
Data center receptacle 15 kVA, with three blue 32A/240V splash-proof 2-pole/3-wire
IEC 60309 plugs
1
The following are needed to connect Oracle DBLRA to a high-voltage single-phase

power source:
6 power cords for two PDUs, 25A at 220/380 to 240/415 VAC 1-phase voltage
6 receptacles to connect the PDUs to 2 IEC 60309 32A 3-pin 250 VAC IP44 data
center receptacles, and that require 22 kVA, 1-phase
Figure 23 shows the high-voltage single-phase PDU power connector for EMEA, and
APAC, except for Japan and Taiwan.
Figure 23 High-voltage Single Phase Power Connector

Three-Phase PDUs for Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia Pacific
Table 210 lists the requirements for high-voltage three-phase PDUs for Europe, the
Middle East, Africa, and Asia Pacific, except Japan and Taiwan. There are two PDUs
per rack. The following specifications are per PDU.
Table 210 High-Voltage 15 kVA Three-Phase PDUs

Number of inputs 1 x 25A three-phase 5 wire
Voltage 220/380 to 240/415 VAC three-phase
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Current 25A maximum per phase
Power rating 14.4 kVA
Output current 62.7A (3 x 20.9A)
Outlet groups 6
Group protection 1 20A
Data center receptacle 15 kVA, three-phase, 5-pin, IEC 60309 32A, 5-pin 230/400V,
three-phase IP44
1
The following are needed to connect Oracle Big Data Appliance to a high-voltage
three-phase power source:
2 power cords for two PDUs, 25A at 220/380 to 240/415 VAC three-phase
2 receptacles to connect the PDUs to 2 IEC 60309 32A 5-pin 230/400 VAC
three-phase IP44 data center receptacles
Figure 24 shows the high-voltage three-phase PDU power connector for EMEA and
APAC, except for Japan and Taiwan.
Figure 24 High-Voltage Three-Phase Power Connector
Facility Power Requirements

Electrical work and installations must obey applicable local, state, or national electrical
codes. Contact your facilities manager or a qualified electrician to determine what type
of power is supplied to the building.

To prevent catastrophic failures, design the input power sources to ensure adequate
power is provided to the PDUs. Use dedicated AC breaker panels for all power circuits
that supply power to the PDU. When planning for power distribution requirements,
balance the power load between available AC supply branch circuits. In the United
States and Canada, ensure that the overall system AC input current load does not
exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit AC current rating.
PDU power cords are 4 meters (13.12 feet) long, and 1 to 1.5 meters (3.3 to 4.9 feet) of
the cord is routed within the rack cabinet. The installation site AC power receptacle
must be within 2 meters (6.6 feet) of the rack.
Circuit Breaker Requirements

To prevent catastrophic failures, the design of your power system must ensure that
adequate power is provided to the servers. Use dedicated AC breaker panels for all
power circuits that supply power to the server. Electrical work and installations must
obey applicable local, state, and national electrical codes. Servers require that electrical
circuits be grounded to the earth.
In addition to circuit breakers, provide a stable power source, such as an
uninterruptible power supply (UPS), to reduce the possibility of component failures. If
computer equipment is subjected to repeated power interruptions and fluctuations,
then it is susceptible to a higher rate of component failure.
Note: The owner supplies the circuit breakers. Each power cord
requires one circuit breaker.
Grounding Guidelines
The cabinets for Oracle Big Data Appliance are shipped with grounding-type power
cords. Always connect the cords to grounded power outlets. Because different
grounding methods are used depending on location, check the grounding type and
refer to documentation, such as International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
documents, for the correct grounding method. Ensure that the facility administrator or
qualified electrical engineer verifies the grounding method for the building and
performs the grounding work.

Airflow through Oracle Big Data Appliance is from front to back. See Table 21 for
information about cooling and airflow.
Note: Studies show that temperature increases of 10 degrees Celsius

(15 degrees Fahrenheit) above 20 degrees Celsius (70 degrees
Fahrenheit) reduce long-term electronics reliability by 50 percent.
Excessive internal temperatures may result in full or partial shutdown
of Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Table 211 lists the temperature, humidity, and altitude requirements for operating and
nonoperating systems.

Table 211 Temperature, Humidity, and Altitude Requirements

Nonoperating
Condition Operating Requirement Requirement Optimum
Temperature 5 to 35 degrees Celsius (40 -40 to 70 degrees Celsius For optimal rack cooling, data
to 95 degrees Fahrenheit) (-40 to 158 degrees center temperatures from 21
Fahrenheit) to 23 degrees Celsius (70 to 74
degrees Fahrenheit)
Relative humidity 10 to 90 percent relative Up to 93 percent relative For optimal data center rack
humidity, noncondensing humidity cooling, 45 to 50 percent,
noncondensing
Altitude 3,000 meters (9,840 feet) 12,000 meters (39,400 feet) Ambient temperature is
maximum maximum reduced by 1 degree Celsius
for each 300 meters above 900
meters altitude above sea
level
Set conditions to the optimal temperature and humidity ranges to minimize the chance
of downtime due to component failure. Operating Oracle Big Data Appliance for
extended periods at or near the operating range limits, or installing it in an
environment where it remains at or near nonoperating range limits, could significantly
increase hardware component failure.
The ambient temperature range of 21 to 23 degrees Celsius (70 to 74 degrees
Fahrenheit) is optimal for server reliability and operator comfort. Most computer
equipment can operate in a wide temperature range, but near 22 degrees Celsius (72
degrees Fahrenheit) is desirable because it is easier to maintain safe humidity levels.
Operating in this temperature range provides a safety buffer if the air conditioning
system fails.
The ambient relative humidity range of 45 to 50 percent is suitable for safe data
processing operations. Most computer equipment can operate in a wide range (20 to 80
percent), but the range of 45 to 50 percent is recommended for the following reasons:
Helps protect computer systems from corrosion problems associated with high
humidity levels.
Provides the greatest operating time buffer if the air conditioner control fails.
Helps avoid failures or temporary malfunctions caused by intermittent
interference from static discharges that may occur when relative humidity is too
low.
Note: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) is easily generated and hard to

dissipate in areas of low relative humidity, such as below 35 percent.
ESD becomes critical when humidity drops below 30 percent.
Maintaining humidity in a data center is not difficult, because a
high-efficiency vapor barrier and a low rate of air changes are
normally present.

Always provide adequate space in front and behind the rack to allow for proper
ventilation. Do not obstruct the front or rear of the rack with equipment or objects that
might prevent air from flowing through the rack. Rack-mountable servers and
equipment typically draw cool air in through the front of the rack and let out warm air

through the rear of the rack. There is no air flow requirement for the left and right
sides due to front-to-back cooling.
If the rack is not completely filled with components, then cover the empty sections
with filler panels. Gaps between components can adversely affect air flow and cooling
within the rack.
Relative humidity is the percentage of the total water vapor that can exist in the air
without condensing, and it is inversely proportional to air temperature. Humidity
goes down when the temperature rises, and goes up when the temperature drops. For
example, air with a relative humidity of 45 percent at a temperature of 24 degrees
Celsius (75 degrees Fahrenheit) has a relative humidity of 65 percent at a temperature
of 18 degrees Celsius (64 degrees Fahrenheit). As the temperature drops, the relative
humidity rises to more than 65 percent, and water droplets form.
Air conditioning facilities usually do not precisely monitor or control temperature and
humidity throughout an entire computer room. Generally, you should monitor
individual points corresponding to multiple exhaust vents in the main unit and other
units in the room, because the distribution of temperature and humidity is uneven
across the room. Pay special consideration to humidity when using underfloor
ventilation.
Oracle Big Data Appliance is designed to function while mounted in a natural
convection air flow. Follow these requirements to meet the environmental
specification:
Ensure that the rack has adequate air flow.
Ensure that the rack has front-to-back cooling. The air inlet is at the front of the
server, and the air outlet is at the rear.
Allow a minimum clearance of 91.4 cm (36 inches) at the front of the rack and 91.4
cm (36 inches) at the rear of the rack for ventilation.
Use perforated tiles, rated for 400 cubic feet per minute (CFM) per tile air flow, in front
of the rack for cold air intake. The tiles can be arranged in any order in front of the
rack, if cold air from the tiles can flow into the rack. Inadequate cold air flow could
result in a higher inlet temperature in the servers due to exhaust air recirculation.
Oracle recommends four floor tiles for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Figure 25 shows a typical installation of the floor tiles for Oracle Big Data Appliance
in a typical data center.

Figure 25 Typical Data Center Configuration for Perforated Floor Tiles

Before installation, network cables must run from your existing network infrastructure
to the installation site. The requirements to connect Oracle Big Data Appliance to your
existing network infrastructure are as follows:
Management network connection requirements
One 1 Gbps Ethernet connection for the management switch in the rack
One 1 Gbps Ethernet connection for the KVM switch in the rack (Sun Fire
X4270 M2-based racks only)
Client access network connection requirements
2 (minimum) to 16 (maximum) 10 Gbps Ethernet connections split between
the two Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switches in the rack. The
exact number of connections depends on your bandwidth requirements.
See Also: Chapter 3, "Understanding the Network Requirements"

Before Oracle Big Data Appliance is delivered to the site, perform these tasks to ensure
that the site is ready:
Task 1, "Review Site Requirements"
Task 2, "Generate the Configuration Files"
Task 3, "Configure the Network"
Task 4, "Prepare the Site Based on Requirements"

Task 1 Review Site Requirements

Review the site requirements in this chapter and in the Oracle Big Data Appliance Site
Checklists to understand the requirements of Oracle Big Data Appliance and ensure
you are ready for delivery.
Task 2 Generate the Configuration Files

Run the Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility. Enter the
network configuration settings, software installation choices, and credentials in the
fields provided by this utility. When you are done, generate the configuration files.
See Also:
Chapter 4, "Using Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration
Generation Utility"
Task 3 Configure the Network

Configure the existing network. This includes registering the networks in the Domain
Name System (DNS), assigning IP addresses, and configuring data center switches and
firewalls. Run the bda-preinstall-checkip.sh script and fix any errors.
See Also: "Validating the Network Settings" on page 4-4
Task 4 Prepare the Site Based on Requirements

Prepare the site based on the requirements described earlier in this chapter, such as
installing the network cables and power supplies, before the arrival of Oracle Big Data
Appliance:
1. Review the safety guidelines.
See Also: "Reviewing Safety Guidelines" on page 6-1
2. Note problems or peculiarities at the site. For example, ensure that the doors are
tall enough and wide enough for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
See Also: "Space Requirements" on page 2-3
3. Verify that the installation site flooring has a strength rating to withstand the
combined weight of Oracle Big Data Appliance and any other installed equipment.
See Also: "Flooring Requirements" on page 2-4
4. Install all necessary electrical equipment, and ensure that sufficient power is
provided for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
See Also:
"Electrical Power Requirements" on page 2-5
Sun Rack II Power Distribution Units User's Guide for the power
distribution unit (PDU) power requirements at
5. Ensure that the installation site provides adequate air conditioning.

See Also: "Ventilation and Cooling Requirements" on page 2-10
6. Operate the air conditioning system for 48 hours to bring the room temperature to
the appropriate level.
See Also: "Temperature and Humidity Requirements" on page 2-9
7. Install the network cables for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
See Also: "Network Connection Requirements" on page 2-12
8. Clean and vacuum the area thoroughly in preparation for installation.

3
Understanding the Network Requirements
3
This chapter describes the network requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance. This
chapter contains these sections:
Overview of Network Requirements
Cabling the Client Network
Factory Network Settings
Port Assignments for Oracle Big Data Appliance Software
Preparing the Network for Oracle Big Data Appliance

Oracle Big Data Appliance includes 6, 12, or 18 servers and the equipment to connect
the servers to your network. The network connections enable the servers to be
administered remotely and enable clients to connect to them. Use the information in
this chapter to configure the environment for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Each server has the following network components and interfaces:
1 Dual-port 4X QDR (40 Gbps) InfiniBand Host Channel Adapter network
interface card
1 Ethernet port for Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager v3.1 for remote
management (v3.0 for Sun Fire X4270 M2 servers)
4 10-Gigabit Ethernet ports (1-Gigabit Ethernet ports for Sun Fire X4270 M2)
Default Network Connections

The installation process automatically discovers whether each Sun Network QDR
InfiniBand Gateway switch has at least one 10 GbE connection. If they all do, then two
virtual network interface cards (VNICs) are configured for each server: one for each
switch bonded as bondeth0 in active/passive failover mode. The VNICs are assigned
automatically to the available 10 GbE connections in round-robin fashion. For
example, if each switch has three available 10 GbE connections, then the VNIC on
server 1 is assigned to 10 GbE port 1, server 2 to port 2, server 3 to port 3, server 4 to
port 1, and so on.
All VNICs are assigned to the same default virtual local area network (VLAN). To
assign different VLANs to different VNICs, you must delete the initial VNICs and
manually create your own.
Understanding the Network Requirements 3-1

Minimum Requirements for the Networks

Additional configuration, such as defining multiple VLANs or enabling routing, may
be required for the switch to operate properly in your environment. If additional
configuration is needed, then your network administrator must perform the necessary
configuration steps during installation of Oracle Big Data Appliance.
To deploy Oracle Big Data Appliance, ensure that your network meets the minimum
requirements. Oracle Big Data Appliance uses three networks.
Note: Each network must be on a distinct and separate subnet from

the other networks.
These are the network descriptions:

Administrative network: This 1 gigabit Ethernet (GbE) network connects to your
existing administrative network and is used to administer all components of
Oracle Big Data Appliance. It connects the servers, Oracle ILOM, and InfiniBand
switches connected to the Ethernet switch in the rack. This network is also called
the management network.
There are two uplinks to the administrative network:
From the Ethernet switch in the rack
From the KVM switch in the rack (Sun Fire X4270 M2-based racks only)
Each server has two network interfaces for administration. One provides
administrative access to the operating system through the eth0 Ethernet interface,
and the other provides access to the Integrated Lights Out Manager through the
Oracle ILOM Ethernet interface. Oracle Big Data Appliance is delivered with the
eth0 and ILOM interfaces connected to the Ethernet switch on the rack. Do not use
the eth0 interface on the servers for client network traffic. Cabling or configuration
changes to these interfaces are not permitted.
Domain Name System (DNS) servers are not required on the administrative
network, although Oracle Big Data Appliance uses them if they are available. At
least one Network Time Protocol (NTP) server must also be available. The NTP
server for the administrative network can be different from the NTP server for the
client network.
All Oracle Big Data Appliance components on the administrative network must be
on the same subnet; that is, the eth0 IP addresses for all servers, ILOMs, PDUs,
InfiniBand switches, and the Cisco Ethernet switch must be on the same subnet.
Client access network: This 10 GbE network connects the servers though the
gateway switches to your existing client network and is used for client access to
the servers. Client applications access the software through this network by using
the client network host names of the servers.
There are two Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switches in the rack. Each
switch supports 1 to 8 connections for client access for a total of up to 16 client
network connections. For failover, you must have at least one connection from
each switch and scale up according to your requirements for loading data and
providing client access.
At least one DNS server must be accessible on the client network. At least one NTP
server must also be available. The NTP server for the client network can be
different from the NTP server for the administrative network.

InfiniBand private network: This network connects the servers by using the
InfiniBand switches on the rack and the bondib0 interface. This nonroutable
network is fully contained within Oracle Big Data Appliance and any other Oracle
engineered systems that are connected to it with InfiniBand cables. This network
does not connect to your existing network. It is automatically configured during
installation.
Network Diagram
The servers are configured on the network as follows:
eth0: Provides access to the operating system using the administrative network.
bondeth0: Provides access to the server using the client access network.
ILOM: Provides access to Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) using the
administrative network.
Use the bda-preinstall-checkip.sh script to verify the readiness of the network
environment before cabling Oracle Big Data Appliance to the existing network. See
"Preparing the Network for Oracle Big Data Appliance" on page 3-9.
Figure 31 shows the network diagram for Sun Server X4-2L and Sun Server
X3-2L-based racks.
Figure 31 Network Diagram for Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2
Ethernet
Switch PDU A PDU B
eth0 ILOM
Oracle Big Data

Appliance Server
bondib0 bondeth0
InfiniBand
Gateway Switch
10 GbE
InfiniBand
Gateway Switch
10 GbE
Administrative
Client Access
Ethernet Over InfiniBand (EolB)
Private InfiniBand

Figure 32 shows the network diagram for a Sun Fire X4270 M2 -based rack, which
includes a KVM.
Figure 32 Network Diagram for Oracle Big Data Appliance
Ethernet
KVM Switch PDU A PDU B
eth0 ILOM
Oracle Big Data

Appliance Server
bondib0 bondeth0
InfiniBand
Gateway Switch
10 GbE
InfiniBand
Gateway Switch
10 GbE
Administrative
Client Access
Ethernet Over InfiniBand (EolB)
Private InfiniBand

Each of the two Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switches in Oracle Big Data
Appliance has eight 10 GbE ports. The two switches enable you to create up to 16 10
GbE connections for each rack. You can determine how many connections to create
based on the bandwidth needed for the client network. For proper functioning, at least
one of the eight ports of each gateway switch must have an active connection to the
site's 10 GbE network. Oracle recommends that the two switches have the same
number of active 10 GbE connections, so that failover does not result in a loss of
available client network bandwidth.
How the Servers Connect to the Gateway Switches

Physical Ethernet connections are created only between the site network and the
gateway switches. The Oracle Big Data Appliance servers are connected only by
InfiniBand to those switches. Each server has two InfiniBand connections, one to each
gateway switch, in an active-passive backup mode; only the active InfiniBand
connection is used for all InfiniBand traffic to that server. If that connection fails, it
immediately fails over to the other connection.

Half of the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers have active connections to one gateway
switch, and the other half have active connections to the other gateway switch. Inside
Oracle Big Data Appliance, the client network traffic is transported over those
InfiniBand connections using the Ethernet over InfiniBand (EoIB) protocol. As a result,
each Oracle Big Data Appliance server has two virtual NICs (VNICs) that are bonded
in the same active-passive backup mode. Each VNIC is assigned a specific port on the
gateway switch. If a switch has only one 10 GbE connection, then all VNICs for that
switch point to the same port. If a switch has multiple connections, then the VNICs are
spread across those ports in round-robin fashion.
For example, if you create three 10 GbE uplinks from each gateway switch, then the
client network traffic from the servers is handled by the switches as shown in the
following table:
Server Number Active Link Backup Link

1 GW1 Switch 1 Link 1 GW Switch 2 Link 1
2 GW Switch 1 Link 2 GW Switch 2 Link 2

... ... ...
1
Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch
Depending on the number of 10 GbE connections, the client network traffic for
multiple servers can be sent across the same physical 10 GbE connection. The
maximum number of connections provides 160 gigabits per second (Gbps) of client
network bandwidth to Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Using Splitter Cables for Connecting to the 40 Gbps Physical Ports

Although you can create up to eight 10 GbE connections for each gateway switch, its
physical ports are 40 Gbps quad small form-factor pluggable (QSFP) ports. Each
gateway switch has two of these physical ports reserved for 10 GbE connectivity. The
ports are equipped with QSFP transceivers that take an optical cable with an
MTP/MPO connector. On the site network side are typically 10 Gbps ports with SFP+
transceivers that take LC connectors. For these connections, you can use splitter cables
that have a single male MTP/MPO connector on one end and four pairs of LC
connectors on the other end. Each 10 Gbps SFP+ transceiver takes a duplex LC
connector for a total of four pairs. Thus, you can use a single splitter cable to create up
to four 10 GbE connections. However, all four duplex LC connectors do not require a
connection to the site network.
The splitter cables are not provided with Oracle Big Data Appliance and must be
ordered separately from Oracle. They are available in lengths of 10, 20, and 50 meters.
Oracle recommends that you order the SFP+ transceivers used at the site end of the 10
GbE network from the same manufacturer as the 10 GbE switch.
What About Data Centers Without a 10 GbE Infrastructure?

If your data center does not have a 10 GbE infrastructure, you can still connect Oracle
Big Data Appliance to it by using an external switch that supports both 10 GbE (or 40

GbE) and 1 GbE. The Sun Network 10 GbE Switch 72p and numerous third-party
switches provide this capability. You can connect the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand
Gateway switches to a 10 GbE or 40 GbE port and connect the data center to a 1 GbE
port in the external switch.
Guidelines for Connecting to the Gateway Switches

Oracle recommends that you follow these guidelines for making 10 GbE connections
to the two gateway switches in Oracle Big Data Appliance:
Make the same number of 10 GbE connections to both gateway switches.
To make 1 to 4 10-GbE connections to each switch, use a single QSFP splitter cable
to the 0A-ETH port of both switches.
To make 5 to 8 10-GbE connections to each switch, use two QSFP splitter cables to
both 0A-ETH and 1A-ETH ports of both switches. Divide the connections as
evenly as possible between the 2 splitter cables.
To make multiple 10 GbE connections to a single QSFP splitter cable, start with the
lowest number port and work upward. For example, for two connections, use
0A-ETH1 and 0A-ETH2.
Make the10 GbE connections to the same ports on both NM2-GW switches. If you
make connections to 0A-ETH1 and 0A-ETH2 on one switch, then make
connections only to 0A-ETH1 and 0A-ETH2 on the other switch.
Configuring Multiple Racks into a Single Hadoop Cluster

When multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance racks are connected to form a single
Hadoop cluster, Oracle strongly recommends that you spread the 10 GbE connections
across the switches in different racks. Every gateway switch in every rack must have at
least one 10 GbE connection. Oracle does not support a configuration in which the 10
GbE connections to the switches in a single rack are used for all servers in all Oracle
Big Data Appliance racks.

This initial network configuration is set at the factory for Oracle Big Data Appliance:
Gateway: 192.168.1.254 in all devices as required
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 in all devices as required
IP Address Range: 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.211
Table 31 lists the default IP addresses for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Table 31 Default IP Addresses for Oracle Big Data Appliance

Administrative IP Oracle ILOM IP InfiniBand Bonded IP
Host Addresses Addresses Addresses
bda181 192.168.1.18 192.168.1.118 192.168.10.18
bda171 192.168.1.17 192.168.1.117 192.168.10.17
bda161 192.168.1.16 192.168.1.116 192.168.10.16
bda151 192.168.1.15 192.168.1.115 192.168.10.15

Table 31 (Cont.) Default IP Addresses for Oracle Big Data Appliance

Administrative IP Oracle ILOM IP InfiniBand Bonded IP
Host Addresses Addresses Addresses
bda141 192.168.1.14 192.168.1.114 192.168.10.14
bda131 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.113 192.168.10.13
bda122 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.112 192.168.10.12
bda112 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.111 192.168.10.11
bda102 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.110 192.168.10.10
bdasw-ib3 192.168.1.203
Cisco Switch 192.168.1.200
bdasw-ib2 192.168.1.202
2 192.168.1.9 192.168.1.109 192.168.10.9
bda9
bda82 192.168.1.8 192.168.1.108 192.168.10.8
bda72 192.168.1.7 192.168.1.107 192.168.10.7
bda6 192.168.1.6 192.168.1.106 192.168.10.6

bda5 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.105 192.168.10.5
bda4 192.168.1.4 192.168.1.104 192.168.10.4
bda3 192.168.1.3 192.168.1.103 192.168.10.3
bda2 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.102 192.168.10.2
bda1 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.101 192.168.10.1
bdasw-ib1 196.168.1.201
PDU A 192.168.1.210
PDU B 192.168.1.211
1
Full racks only
2
Full racks or starter racks with in-rack expansions only

Table 32 identifies the port numbers used by Oracle Big Data Appliance software.
Table 32 Oracle Big Data Appliance Port Numbers

Port Used by
22 ssh
80 yumrepos (only during installation)
111 portmap
162 Auto Service Request Manager (optional)
443 Auto Service Request Manager (optional)
668 rpc.statd
3306 MySQL Database
5000 Oracle NoSQL Database registration
5001 Oracle NoSQL Database administration

Table 32 (Cont.) Oracle Big Data Appliance Port Numbers

Port Used by
5010 to 5020 Oracle NoSQL Database processes
6481 Auto Service Request Manager service tags listener (optional)
8139 Puppet nodes
8140 Puppet parent
20910 Oracle Data Integrator agent
30920 Automated Service Monitor (ASM)
Table 33 lists the ports used by Cloudera's Distribution including Apache Hadoop
version 5 (CDH5). For additional details about these port assignments, go to the
Cloudera website at
http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CM5/latest/
Cloudera-Manager-Installation-Guide/cm5ig_ports_cdh5.html
Table 33 CDH Port Numbers

Port Component Service Access
0 MapReduce 1 TaskTracker Localhost
1004 HDFS Secure DataNode External
1006 HDFS Secure DataNode External
12000 Sqoop 2 Sqoop 2 Server External
12001 Sqoop 2 Sqoop 2 External
2181 HBase HQuorumPeer/ZooKeeper
2181 ZooKeeper Server External
2888 ZooKeeper Server Internal
8002 Hue Beeswax Server Internal
8003 Hue Beeswax Metastore Internal
8019 ZooKeeper ZooKeeper Failover Controller Internal
8020 HDFS NameNode External
8021 MapReduce 1 JobTracker External
8030 YARN ResourceManager
8040 YARN NodeManager

Table 33 (Cont.) CDH Port Numbers

Port Component Service Access
8080 HBase REST Service External
8085 HBase REST UI External
8088 YARN ResourceManager External
8480 HDFS JournalNode Internal
8485 HDFS JournalNode Internal
8888 Hue Server External
9010 ZooKeeper ZooKeeper JMX Internal
9083 Hive Metastore External
9090 HBase Thrift Server External
9090 HBase Avro Server External
9095 HBase Thrift Server External
9290 MapReduce 1 JobTracker Thrift Plug-in Internal
10000 Hive HiveServer External
10020 YARN Job History Server
11000 Oozie Server External
11001 Oozie Server Localhost
16000 Hive Sqoop Metastore External
19888 YARN MapReduce JobHistory Server
50010 HDFS DataNode External
50030 MapReduce 1 JobTracker External
50060 MapReduce 1 TaskTracker External
50070 HDFS NameNode External
50090 HDFS Secondary NameNode Internal
50470 HDFS Secure NameNode External
50495 HDFS Secure Secondary NameNode Internal
60000 HBase Master External
60010 HBase Master External
60020 HBase RegionServer External
60030 HBase RegionServer External

Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility generates these files for
you to use before installation:
bda-install-review.html: Lists the host names and custom IP addresses for Oracle
Big Data Appliance. Verify that the information is correct, and add the host names

and IP addresses to a name server on the network. You can view this file in a
browser.
bda-preinstall-checkip.sh: Performs validation checks on network configuration
values, including host names and IP addresses.
See "Generating the Configuration Files" on page 4-3.
Run the bda-preinstall-checkip.sh script at these points in the installation process:
Before Oracle Big Data Appliance arrives at the site but after the network
administrator has added the new names and IP addresses to the name server. This
step ensures that the network configuration parameters are valid and the network
is ready to accept Oracle Big Data Appliance connections.
After Oracle Big Data Appliance arrives but before it is connected to the network.
This step ensures that the network has not changed and is still ready to accept
Oracle Big Data Appliance connections.
Note: Running bda-preinstall-checkip.sh is a critical

pre-installation step. Network errors can cause extensive delays in the
installation procedure.
To check the network for conflicts:

1. Copy the bda-preinstall-checkip.sh script to any Linux system with a 10 GB
Ethernet connection to the subnet on which Oracle Big Data Appliance will be
deployed.
2. Ensure that the script is executable:
chmod +x bda-preinstall-checkip.sh
3. Execute the script:

./bda-preinstall-checkip.sh
4. If the script identifies errors, open the bda-checkip.out file for details. It contains
information about every test the script performed. The output file is created in the
same directory as the script.
5. Resolve all reported errors before rerunning the script.
Example 31 shows success and error messages from the bda-preinstall-checkip.sh
script.
Example 31 Output from bda-preinstall-checkip.sh

Big Data Appliance pre-installation network verification starting ...
Using name server 198.51.100.21 for all DNS lookups
Domain is example.com
Processing DNS name servers : SUCCESS

Processing NTP time servers : SUCCESS
Processing gateways : SUCCESS
Processing factory IP addresses : SUCCESS
Processing public node names (bondeth0) : SUCCESS
Processing private IP addresses (bondib0) : ERROR - see bda-checkip.out for
details

Processing admin node names (eth0) : SUCCESS

Processing ILOM names : SUCCESS
Processing switch and PDU IP addresses : SUCCESS
Processing ASR hostname : SUCCESS
One or more checks report ERROR. Review bda-checkip.out for details


4
Using Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration
4
Generation Utility
This chapter describes how to use Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration
Generation Utility.
This chapter contains the following topics:
Overview of Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility
Generating the Configuration Files
About the Configuration Files
Validating the Network Settings
Customer Details Page
Hardware Selection Page
Rack Details
Networking Page
Client Ethernet Network Page
Administration Network Page
InfiniBand Network Page
General Network Properties Page
Review and Edit Details Page
Define Clusters Page
Cluster Page
Complete Page

Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility acquires information
from you, such as IP addresses and software preferences, that are required for
deploying Oracle Big Data Appliance. After guiding you through a series of pages, the
utility generates a set of configuration files. These files help automate the deployment
process and ensure that Oracle Big Data Appliance is configured to your specifications.
Choose the option that describes the type of hardware installation you are configuring:
One or more new Big Data Appliance racks being installed: You enter all new
data for this choice.
Using Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility 4-1

One or more Big Data Appliance racks being added to an existing group of Big
Data Appliances: This choice activates the Import button, so that you can select
the BdaDeploy.json file that was used to configure the last rack in the group.
One or two in-rack expansion kits being added to a Big Data Appliance starter
rack: This choice activates the Import button, so that you can select the
BdaDeploy.json file that was last used to configure the rack (either the starter rack
or one in-rack expansion kit).
An in-process configuration using a saved master.xml configuration file: This
choice activates the Import button, so that you can select the master.xml file and
continue the configuration.
Figure 41 shows the Customer Details page of the Oracle Big Data Appliance
Configuration Generation Utility.
Figure 41 Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility
Note:
Oracle Big Data Appliance uses Cloudera's Distribution including
Apache Hadoop (CDH). A Hadoop cluster on Oracle Big Data
Appliance is called a CDH cluster.
The terms appliance and rack refer to Oracle Big Data Appliance,
Oracle Big Data Appliance X3-2, and Oracle Big Data Appliance
X4-2.

Generating the Configuration Files

The following procedures explain how to install Oracle Big Data Appliance
Configuration Generation Utility and generate the configuration files.
To configure Oracle Big Data Appliance:
1. Download Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility from
Oracle Technology Network at
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/bigdata-appliance/downloads/
index.html
The file is named BDAConfigurator-version.zip. The system must run Oracle JRE
1.6 or later.
2. Extract the files in BDAConfigurator-version.zip. This example extracts the files
on a Linux system for version 2.0:
$ unzip BDAConfigurator-2.0.zip
Archive: BDAConfigurator-2.0.zip
creating: BDAConfigurator-2.0/
inflating: BDAConfigurator-2.0/exagen.jar
inflating: BDAConfigurator-2.0/oracle_ice.jar
inflating: BDAConfigurator-2.0/passwd.jar
inflating: BDAConfigurator-2.0/orai18n-utility.jar
.
.
.
3. Change to the BDAConfigurator-version directory.

4. Run Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility.
On Linux:
$ sh bdaconf.sh
On Microsoft Windows, double-click bdaconf.cmd in Windows Explorer, or

run the file from the command line:
C:\ bdaconf.cmd
5. On the Welcome page, select a configuration type.

6. Click Import if the button is activated, and select a previously saved configuration
file (either BdaDeploy.json or master.xml, depending on the configuration type).
7. Follow the steps of the wizard. On the Complete page, click Create Files.
8. Validate the network configuration.
See "Validating the Network Settings" on page 4-4.
9. Send the generated bda.zip file to your Oracle representative.

Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility generates the following
files to use when you configure the system. You can select the directory where they are
saved.
This is the basic structure of the directory:
company_name /

bda-timestamp.zip
bda-install-preview.html
bda-preinstall-checkip.sh
rack_name /
rack_name-BdaDeploy.json
cluster_name /
cluster_name-config.json
master.xml
bda-timestamp.zip
Contains a copy of the configuration files. If an Oracle customer service representative
will perform the installation, then send this file to Oracle before the installation date.
Otherwise, transfer the file to a USB drive for copying to Oracle Big Data Appliance.
bda-install-preview.html
Provides a report that lists all the details of the configuration. You can view the this
report in a browser. Check it carefully to ensure that all of the settings are correct.
bda-preinstall-checkip.sh
Runs a series of tests to ensure the specified names and IP addresses for Oracle Big
Data Appliance were added correctly to the name server, and they do not conflict with
the existing network configuration.
rack_name-BdaDeploy.json
Contains the network configuration for a full rack, a starter rack, or a starter rack with
one in-rack expansion kit. It contains information about all the servers, switches, and
PDUs.
cluster_name-config.json
Contains all the information for a cluster, including the network configuration, port
numbers, user names, and passwords. The configuration utility creates a separate
parameter file for each cluster. If several clusters are being configured, then each
parameter file is located in a separate subdirectory.
If an in-rack expansion kit is being configured as an addition to an existing cluster,
then the configuration utility does not generate a parameter file; the Mammoth utility
generates it.
master.xml
Contains all the configuration settings in XML format so that Oracle Big Data
Appliance Configuration Generation Utility can read it. To alter the configuration of an
Oracle Big Data Appliance deployment, you can load this file, enter the changes, and
regenerate the configuration files.
This file is used only by Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility.
It is not used for the actual configuration of Oracle Big Data Appliance.
rack_name-BdaExpansion.json
Contains the network configuration for one or two in-rack expansion kits. It contains
information about all the servers, but no information about the switches and PDUs.
This file is generated only when an expansion kit is being installed and configured.

Validating the network settings before the Oracle Big Data Appliance hardware arrives
at your site is a critical step. Network problems can cause extended delays in the
installation.

To validate the network configuration settings:

1. Copy the bda-preinstall-checkip.sh file generated by Oracle Big Data
Appliance Configuration Generation Utility to a Linux host on the same network
that Oracle Big Data Appliance will use.
2. Log in to the Linux host and run bda-preinstall-checkip.sh:
$ sh bda-preinstall-checkip.sh
This script checks your existing network for conflicts with the Oracle Big Data
Appliance IP address pool.
3. Correct any network problems discovered by the script before installation begins.
Network problems during the installation can cause extensive delays.
4. Run the network connections to the planned location for Oracle Big Data
Appliance.
5. Inform your Oracle representative when you have completed these steps.

The following table describes the customer details fields. The Generated Names shows
the names created from the entered values.
Table 41 Customer Details Page

Customer Details Field Description
Customer Name The name of your enterprise. Required.
Region The geographic area where Oracle Big Data Appliance will be
installed.
Time Zone The time zone for your installation. You must select the
appropriate region before selecting the time zone.
Rack Base Name A maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters for the name of the
Oracle Big Data Appliance rack.
Rack Start Index A digit that uniquely identifies the rack. It is a suffix of the rack
base name.
Server Base Name Base name for all servers. A two-digit suffix uniquely identifies
each server.
The rack name and server base name are used to generate the host
names for all network interfaces: eth0, bondib0, bondeth0, and
Oracle ILOM. For example, a rack base name of bda, a rack start
index of 1, and a server base name of node results in host names of
bda1node01, bda1node02, and so forth.
Admin Name Suffix Suffix to the basic host name to form the eth0 host names
Private Name Suffix Suffix to the basic host name to form the bondib0 host name
ILOM Name Suffix Suffix to the basic host name to form the Oracle ILOM name
Switch Base Name Suffix to the rack name to form the base name for all switches. For
example, a rack name of bda and a switch base name of sw results
in switch names of bda1sw-ip, bda1sw-ib1, and so forth.
Important: Ensure that the fully constructed switch names (such
as bda1sw-ib1) do not exceed 20 characters.
Domain Name Name of the domain in which Oracle Big Data Appliance
operates. Required.

Using Standardized Host Names

The rack name is used in the assignment of standardized host names for all Oracle Big
Data Appliance servers. The host name for all servers on the client network is in this
format:
racknameNodeNN.domain
In this syntax:
NN is the position number of the server node in the rack (01 to 18).
domain is the domain name.
Host names must have fewer than 16 characters, which can be ASCII letters (a to z and
A to Z), numbers (0 to 9), and hyphens (-) only. Do not begin or end the name with a
hyphen.
Using Customized Host Names

You can change the suffixes used for the different network interfaces.
You can enter server host names that do not follow the naming conventions on the
Review and Edit Details Page.
Naming Multirack Clusters

Oracle recommends that for a cluster of multiple racks, you use the cluster name as the
rack name.
For example, in a three-rack cluster, if the cluster name is cluster1 and the domain
name is example.com, then the fully qualified host name of the server at the bottom of
the first rack is cluster101node01.example.com. For the top server in the third rack of
this cluster, the host name is cluster103node18.example.com.
Connecting to Oracle Big Data Appliance Over the Networks

The host names on the other networks have a short extension that follows the unit
number. If you retained the default extensions, then use these formats to connect to
Oracle Big Data Appliance after it is connected to the network:
For short host names over the administration network:
racknameNodeNN-adm
For the private InfiniBand network host names:
racknameNodeNN-priv
For the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) host names:
racknameNodeNN-ilom
For the switch host names:
racknamesw-ibM
In this syntax:
NN is the position number of the server in the rack (01 to 18).
M is 1, 2, or 3, depending on the switch location in the rack.

Rack Details
Hardware Selection Page

The hardware page identifies one or more racks that you want to deploy at the same
time. The racks must be cabled together.
For example, if you are deploying three full racks, then add Full Rack three times to
your deployment.
The following table describes the hardware selection choices.
Table 42 Hardware Selection Page

Hardware Selection Field Description
Select interconnected Lists the available hardware configurations. Choose one or more
hardware to deploy racks. You can choose the same type of rack multiple times.
Full rack: Contains 18 servers.
Starter rack: Contains six servers.
Starter rack with In-Rack Expansion: Contains 12 servers.
Single In-Rack Expansion Kit: Contains six servers.
Double In-Rack Expansion Kit: Contains 12 servers.
This is your deployment Lists the hardware selected for your site.
Will you use non-Oracle Oracle strongly recommends that the PDUs that are shipped
PDUs? with Oracle Big Data Appliance be used to supply power to its
servers and switches.
However, if your data center has specific requirements that the
Oracle-supplied PDUs do not meet, then you can use other
PDUs to supply power to the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers
and switches. Oracle does not support customer-supplied
PDUs, and Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control does not
monitor them.
Rack Details
The rack details page identifies the optional network connections for an Oracle Big
Data Appliance rack.
The following table describes the rack detail fields.
Table 43 Rack Details Page

Rack Detail Field Description
Rack Name Enter the name of the rack.

Networking Page
Table 43 (Cont.) Rack Details Page

Rack Detail Field Description
Number of 10 GbE The two Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switches in
Connections every Oracle Big Data Appliance must have an equal number of
10 GbE links to the client network. Each gateway switch
supports up to eight 10-GbE links, for a total of 16 links. Each
server is assigned to one 10-Gbe link on each gateway switch.
Therefore, an Oracle Big Data Appliance full rack or starter rack
with an extension kit can use up to 16 10-GbE links. A starter
rack can use up to 12 10-GbE links.
Oracle recommends using as many 10 GbE links to the Oracle
Big Data Appliance rack as the data center can support. The
additional links increase the network bandwidth available
between Oracle Big Data Appliance and the client network, and
reduces the impact if a link fails.
Oracle uses this information to ensure that the correct number
of cables is ordered or available at the installation site. It also
lets the Oracle field engineer plan how many 10 GbE links to
connect to the Oracle Big Data Appliance rack.
Networking Page
The networking page identifies the number of IP addresses required for each network.
The administration, client Ethernet, and InfiniBand networks are required. You must
allocate the specified number of IP addresses for them.
Each IP address pool initially contains a range of consecutive IP addresses. If some IP
addresses in the range are not available, then you can change individual addresses on
the Review and Edit Details Page.
Client Ethernet Network Page

The values that you enter on this page are used to add the Oracle Big Data Appliance
servers to your existing client Ethernet network. Client applications typically access
Oracle Big Data Appliance using this network.

the other networks.
The following table describes the client network fields.
Table 44 Client Ethernet Page

Client Ethernet Field Description
Starting IP Address for Pool The first IP address on the client network available for use by
the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers.
Pool Size The required number of IP addresses. All Oracle Big Data
Appliance servers require an IP address on the client network.
The pool size is calculated for the racks that you identified on
the Hardware Selection Page.

Table 44 (Cont.) Client Ethernet Page

Client Ethernet Field Description
Ending IP Address for Pool The last IP address on the client network assigned to Oracle Big
Data Appliance. This address is automatically calculated from
the starting IP address and the pool size.
Ensure that all of the IP addresses are available for use in the
pool defined by the starting and ending addresses. If they are
not available, then you can either assign a different range or
manually change individual IP addresses on the Review and
Edit Details Page.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the client network.
Gateway The IP address for the client network gateway.
The gateway IP address is generated automatically, so verify
that it is correct.

The values that you enter on this page are used to add the Oracle Big Data Appliance
servers, switches, and PDUs to your existing administration network. Each server has
two network interfaces for administration. One interface provides access to the
operating system, and the other provides access to Oracle Integrated Lights Out
Manager (ILOM).

the other networks.
The following table describes the administration network fields.
Table 45 Administration Network Page

Administration Network
Field Description
Starting IP Address for Pool The first IP address on the administration network available for
use by Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Pool Size The required number of IP addresses on the administration
network.
The IP addresses for a rack are assigned in this order: Oracle Big
Data Appliance servers (6, 12, or 18), Oracle ILOMs (6, 12, or
18), Ethernet switch, spine switch, leaf switches (2), and PDUs
(2).
Ending IP Address for Pool The last IP address on the administration network assigned to
Oracle Big Data Appliance. The value in this field is
automatically calculated from the starting IP address and the
pool size.
Edit Details Page.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the administration network.
Gateway The IP address for the gateway.
The gateway IP address is generated automatically, so verify
that it is correct.


The InfiniBand network connects the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers within a rack.
It can also connect multiple racks to form a multirack Hadoop cluster, or to provide
access to Oracle Big Data Appliance from Oracle Exadata Database Machine.
The following table describes the InfiniBand network fields.
Table 46 InfiniBand Network Page

InfiniBand Network Field Description
Starting IP Address for Pool The first IP address on the private InfiniBand network available
for use by the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers. The default is
192.168.10.1.
Pool Size The required number of IP addresses. All Oracle Big Data
Appliance servers require an IP address on the InfiniBand
network. The pool size is calculated for the deployment that you
identified on the Hardware Selection Page.
Ending IP Address for Pool The last IP address assigned to the InfiniBand network for this
deployment. This address is automatically calculated from the
starting IP address and the pool size.
Edit Details Page.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the InfiniBand network. The default is
255.255.252.0.
BDA will be connected via Select this option if you are connecting this rack to another rack
InfiniBand to any Oracle through the InfiniBand fabric.
engineered systems
When connecting multiple racks, ensure the following:
The InfiniBand IP addresses of all servers are unique,
including the servers in other Oracle engineered systems.
All InfiniBand IP addresses are on the same network.
For example, if you connect an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack
to Oracle Exadata Database Machine, then you must use the
same netmask on the InfiniBand networks for both systems.
Moreover, after you apply this netmask to the InfiniBand IP
addresses of the Exadata database servers, the Exadata storage
servers, and the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers, all IP
addresses are in the same subnet.
General Network Properties Page

The client and administration networks typically use the same Domain Name System
(DNS) and Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers. If they are different on your
networks, then enter the values for the client network first.
The following table describes the general network properties.

Table 47 General Network Properties Page

General Network
Properties Field Description
DNS Servers Up to six IP addresses for the DNS servers. At least one DNS server
must be accessible on the client network.
DNS servers are not required on the administration network,
although Oracle Big Data Appliance uses them if they are available.
NTP Servers Up to six IP addresses for the NTP servers. Both the client network
and the administration network must have access to at least one NTP
server.
The NTP servers for the administration network can be different
from the NTP servers for the client network. If they are, then identify
the NTP servers for the client network in this field.
Search Domains Up to six domain names in which Oracle Big Data Appliance
operates, such as example.com and us.example.com
Are administration Select Yes or No:
host name entries in
Yes: Administration host name DNS entries are validated
DNS?
during preinstall checks and network configuration.
No: Administration host name DNS entries are not validated
during preinstall checks and network configuration.
The next table describes the network properties for the administration network if they
are different from the client network. Typically, these properties are the same for both
networks. They default to the values you entered for the general network properties.
Table 48 Advanced Network Properties

Advanced Network
Properties Field Description
Advanced Network Select this option if the client and administration networks are
Configuration isolated on your system and use different DNS and NTP
servers, different domains, or both. You can then complete the
fields for the administration network.
Admin Domain Name The name of the administration domain.
Admin DNS Servers Up to six IP addresses for the administration Domain Name
System server, if they are different from the client network.
Admin NTP Servers Up to six IP addresses for the administration Network Time
Protocol server, if they are different from the client network.
Admin Search Domains Up to six domain names in which Oracle Big Data Appliance
administration network operates, if they are different from the
client network.

Use this page to review and modify the network configuration settings.
If you specified a range of IP addresses for any of the networks that includes addresses
already in use, then replace those IP addresses on this page. Otherwise, the network
configuration of Oracle Big Data Appliance will fail, causing unnecessary delays.
When you are done making changes, click Regenerate using changed base values.


Use the define clusters page to identify the number of clusters to create and the servers
that compose each cluster. You can configure clusters for either CDH or Oracle NoSQL
Database.
You can configure multiple clusters in a single rack, or a single cluster can span
multiple racks. Each CDH cluster must have at least six servers, and each Oracle
NoSQL Database cluster must have at least three servers. Thus, a starter rack supports
one CDH cluster, a starter rack with one in-rack expansion supports up to two CDH
clusters, and a full rack supports up to three CDH clusters.
The following table describes the cluster definition choices.
Table 49 Define Clusters Page

Define Clusters Field Description
Number of clusters to Select the number of clusters. For each cluster, a new tab
create appears on the page, and a new page appears in Oracle Big Data
Appliance Configuration Generation Utility. Be sure to
complete all tabs before continuing to the next page.
Cluster Name Enter a unique name for the cluster. The name must begin with
a letter and can consist of alphanumeric characters, underscores,
(_) and dashes (-).
Cluster Type Choose the type of cluster:
CDH cluster: Installs Cloudera's Distribution including
Apache Hadoop and optional software on cluster of new
servers
NoSQL DB cluster: Installs Oracle NoSQL Database on a
cluster of new servers
Adding to existing cluster: Installs the same software on
the new servers as the rest of the cluster.
Unassigned Servers From the list on the left, select the servers for the cluster and
move them to the list of assigned servers on the right.
Assigned Servers Lists the servers selected for the cluster. A CDH cluster must
have a minimum of six servers, and an Oracle NoSQL Database
cluster must have a minimum of three servers. All clusters must
be composed of multiples of three servers.
Cluster Page
Select the software to install on this cluster. The fields displayed on this field depend
on the type of cluster being configured:
Adding to an Existing Cluster
A New Oracle NoSQL Database Cluster
A New CDH Cluster
Adding to an Existing Cluster

You are done with the software configuration. The Mammoth utility configures the
software for the new servers the same as the other servers in the cluster.
See "Adding Servers to a Cluster" on page 10-7.

Cluster Page
A New Oracle NoSQL Database Cluster

The cluster page for new Oracle NoSQL Database clusters has the following sections:
User/Groups
Auto Service Request
Installed Components
Oracle NoSQL Configuration
You can install either Community Edition or Enterprise Edition of Oracle NoSQL
Database.
The following table describes these choices.
Table 410 Installed Components

Component Field Description
Oracle NoSQL Database Choose between Community Edition and Enterprise Edition:
Edition
Community Edition is included in the license for Oracle
Big Data Appliance.
Enterprise Edition requires a separate license. You must
have this license to install Enterprise Edition on Oracle Big
Data Appliance.
Oracle NoSQL Configuration

Oracle NoSQL Database 12c Release 1.3.0.5 and later versions support secondary
zones, which are composed of nodes that function only as replicas. You can use the
secondary zones on Oracle Big Data Appliance to maintain extra copies of the data for
increased redundancy and read capacity, or to provide low latency, read access to data
at a distant location.
The following table describes the modifiable configuration settings.
Table 411 Oracle NoSQL Configuration

Configuration Field Description
Oracle NoSQL store name A unique name for the KV store on Oracle Big Data Appliance.
The default value is BDAKV.
Oracle NoSQL primary zone The name of the primary zone for all nodes in the cluster. The
name default value is BDAKV_DC.
Oracle NoSQL primary zone A replication factor of 1 or more for the primary zone. The
replication factor default value is 3.
A New CDH Cluster

The cluster page for new CDH clusters has the following sections:
User/Groups
Big Data SQL
Kerberos
Disk Encryption

Cluster Page
Audit Vault
Enterprise Management Cloud Control
Email Alerting
User/Groups
The following table describes the user name, groups, and password fields for a new
CDH cluster. Passwords are optional, but you must enter them during the software
installation if you do not provide them here.
Table 412 User /Groups for a New CDH Cluster

User/Groups Field Description
OS password for root user The root password on all servers in the cluster.
OS password for oracle user The oracle password on all servers in the cluster. Oracle
applications run under this identity.
oracle user ID The ID number of the oracle user. It must match the oracle
UID of a connected Oracle Exadata Database Machine. The UID
ensures that the oracle user can log in from Oracle Big Data
Appliance to the correct account in Oracle Database. Required.
oinstall group ID The ID number of the Oracle Inventory Group (oinstall). It
must match the oinstall group ID of a connected Oracle
Exadata Database Machine.
dba group ID The ID number of the dba group. It must match the dba group
ID of a connected Oracle Exadata Database Machine.
Cloudera Manager admin The password for the admin user for Cloudera Manager.
password Available only for CDH clusters.
MySQL admin password The password for the MySQL Database administration user.
Available only for CDH clusters.
Big Data SQL

You can install Oracle Big Data SQL on a CDH cluster. You must have a separate
license for this product. The following table describes the Oracle Big Data SQL fields.
Table 413 Big Data SQL

Big Data SQL Field Description
Is Big Data SQL licensed? Oracle Big Data SQL supports queries from Oracle Database
against data stored in Hive and HDFS on Oracle Big Data
Appliance. This technology requires a separate license. If you
have a license, choose Yes.
Install Big Data SQL? Choose Yes to install Oracle Big Data SQL during the initial
software release. Oracle Big Data Appliance must be connected
over the InfiniBand network to Oracle Exadata Database
Machine. Choose No to defer this installation to a later date.
You can install Oracle Big Data Connectors on a CDH cluster. You must have a
separate license for this product. The following table describes the installed
components field.

Cluster Page
Table 414 Installed Components

Component Field Description
Are Big Data Connectors Oracle Big Data Connectors facilitate data access between data
licensed? stored in the CDH cluster and Oracle Database. The connectors
require a separate license. If you have a license, choose Yes. This
choice activates the other fields.
Install Oracle Data The agent supports Oracle Data Integrator Application Adapter
Integrator Agent? for Hadoop, which is one of the Oracle Big Data Connectors.To
configure Oracle Data Integrator for use immediately, choose
Yes.
You must have a license for Oracle Big Data Connectors.
MySQL password for The password for the Oracle Data Integrator user in MySQL
Oracle Data Integrator Database.
Agent?
Kerberos
Kerberos authentication is a security option for CDH clusters. It is included with your
Oracle Big Data Appliance license.
To use a key distribution center (KDC) elsewhere on the network (that is, not on Oracle
Big Data Appliance), you must complete several steps before installing the software.
See "Installation Prerequisites" on page 10-2.
The following table describes the Kerberos fields.
Table 415 Kerberos

Kerberos Field Description
Enable Kerberos-based Select this option to support Kerberos on Oracle Big Data
authentication? Appliance.
Set up key distribution Choose Yes to set up a key distribution center (KDC) on Oracle
center on BDA Big Data Appliance. Otherwise, a KDC must always be
available on the network to all clients.
Kerberos KDC database A password for the KDC database, if it is being created on
password Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Non-BDA key distribution List the fully qualified names or the IP addresses of the KDCs,
center hosts available on the same network, that can serve as either the
primary or backup KDC for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Kerberos realm Enter the name of the realm for Oracle Big Data Appliance, such
as EXAMPLE.COM.
Enable network encryption Select this option to protect your data as it travels over the
network.
Enable Sentry authorization Select this option to use Apache Sentry to provide fine-grained
authorization to data stored in Hadoop.
Disk Encryption
You can configure CDH clusters on Oracle Big Data Appliance to automatically
encrypt and decrypt data stored on disk. On-disk encryption does not affect user
access to Hadoop data, although it can have a minor impact on performance.
The following table describes the encryption fields.

Cluster Page
Table 416 On-Disk Encryption

Disk Encryption Field Description
Enable Disk Encryption Select this option to encrypt data on disk and at rest.
Password to Use for Disk The password used to encrypt the data. A valid password
Encryption consists of 1 to 64 printable ASCII characters. It cannot contain
whitespace characters (such as spaces, tabs, or carriage returns),
single or double quotation marks, or backslashes (\).
Audit Vault
You can configure CDH clusters on Oracle Big Data Appliance as secured targets for
Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall. The Audit Vault plug-in on Oracle Big Data
Appliance collects audit and logging data from MapReduce, HDFS, and Oozie
services. You can then use Audit Vault Server to monitor these services on Oracle Big
Data Appliance.
Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall Server Release 12.1.1 or later must be up
and running on a separate server on the same network as Oracle Big Data Appliance
before you perform the actual configuration.
The following table describes the Audit Vault fields.
Table 417 Audit Vault

Audit Vault Field Description
Enable Audit Vault Select this option to support Oracle Audit Vault and Database
Firewall on Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Audit Vault server The IP address of the Audit Vault server.
Audit Vault port The port number that Audit Vault Server listens on.
Audit Vault database The database service name for Audit Vault Server.
service name
Audit Vault admin user The name of the Audit Vault administration user.
Audit Vault admin user The password for the administration user.
password

ASR monitors the health of Oracle Big Data Appliance hardware and automatically
submits a service request when it detects a fault. Although you can opt out of this
program, Oracle recommends that you enable ASR.
ASR Manager must be installed and configured to run on a separate server outside of
Oracle Big Data Appliance before the software is installed and configured on Oracle
Big Data Appliance. The software installation fails with an error if Enable Auto Service
Request is selected, but ASR Manager is not accessible using the specified host address
and port number. The Mammoth utility does not install ASR Manager.
The software on Oracle Big Data Appliance must be able to connect to ASR Manager.
ASR Manager must be able to route to the Internet, either directly or through a proxy,
to send event information that automatically opens service requests.
The following table describes the Auto Service Request fields.

Cluster Page
Table 418 Auto Service Request

ASR Field Description
Enable Auto Service Select this option to support Auto Service Request.
Request
ASR Manager Host Name The fully qualified name or the IP address of a Linux server on
the network where ASR will be installed
ASR Manager Port The port number for ASR Manager. The default port is 162.
ASR Root Password Password for root on the ASR Manager host
Enterprise Management Cloud Control

The Mammoth utility deploys and validates agents on Oracle Big Data Appliance that
Enterprise Manager uses to monitor the appliance. Mammoth does not install Oracle
Enterprise Manager Cloud Control.
Before you can configure Oracle Big Data Appliance for the Enterprise Manager
system monitoring plugin, you must install and configure Enterprise Manager to run
on a separate server outside of Oracle Big Data Appliance. The Oracle Big Data
Appliance software installation fails with an error if you choose the Enterprise
Manager option, but Enterprise Manager is not installed and accessible using the
specified host address, port numbers, and so forth.
The following table describes the Enterprise Manager Cloud Control fields.
Table 419 Enterprise Manager Cloud Control

Cloud Control Field Description
Enable Oracle Enterprise Select this option to use the Oracle Enterprise Manager system
Manager Cloud Control monitoring plugin.
Agent
OMS Host Name The fully qualified name or the IP address of the server where
Oracle Management Server (OMS) is installed with the plugin
for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
OMS HTTPS Console Port The port number for the Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud
Control web interface.
To obtain the HTTPS port numbers, use an emctl status oms
-details command from the Enterprise Manager host.
OMS HTTPS Upload Port The HTTP upload port number for Oracle Enterprise Manager
Cloud Control web interface.
EM Super Admin User A Cloud Control user with super-administration privileges to
perform administration emcli commands. Typically, this user is
sysman.
EM Super Admin Password Password for the Cloud Control user name.
EM Agent Registration The password for validating the Oracle Management agents on
Password Oracle Big Data Appliance.
The Agent Registration password is part of the security setup of
Enterprise Manager. To obtain the password in Enterprise
Manager, click Setup at the top right of the window, Security,
and then Registration Passwords.
Cloud Control SYS The SYS password for the Cloud Control repository.
password
Inventory location The full path of the oraInventory directory for the system
where Oracle Enterprise Manager is installed.

Complete Page
Email Alerting
Cloudera Manager sends email alerts when it detects a problem in the CDH cluster.
The following table describes the email alert fields.
Table 420 Email Alerting Page

Email Alerting Field Description
SMTP Server The fully qualified name or the IP address of the existing SMTP
server that the company uses on its internal network. Required.
Uses SSL Select Yes if a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) connection is required.
SMTP Port The port number used by the email server
Requires Authentication Select this option if your SMTP server requires authentication.
You can then enter a user name and a password.
SMTP User Name User name for Cloudera Manager to log in to the SMTP server.
This field is hidden when authentication not selected.
SMTP Password Password for the user name.
This field is hidden when authentication is not selected.
Recipient Addresses The valid email addresses of users who need to get alerts from
Cloudera Manager. Enter each email address on a separate line.
Required.
The field to the right indicates the number of email addresses
entered in the dialog box.
Complete Page
You have now set all the installation and configuration options. Click Back to return to
a page and change its settings. The Back button does not clear the pages; your settings
remain unless you change them.
The text boxes on this page provide a place for you to identify the Hadoop
components and any third-party applications that you plan to use on the cluster, and
to record any notes that might be useful at a later date. This information is saved in a
file named master.xml, which you can use to reload these configuration settings into
Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility.
To generate the configuration files, click Create Files and click Yes in response to the
prompt. An operating system window automatically opens in the directory where the
files are saved.

5
Setting Up Auto Service Request
5
This chapter explains how to install and configure Auto Service Request for Oracle Big
Data Appliance. It contains these sections:
Understanding Auto Service Request
Getting Ready to Install ASR
Installing ASR Manager
Verifying the ASR Manager Installation
Configuring the Trap Destinations on Oracle Big Data Appliance
Verifying ASR Assets
Validating Auto Service Request on Oracle Big Data Appliance
Troubleshooting ASR
Understanding Auto Service Request

Auto Service Request (ASR) is designed to automatically open service requests when
specific Oracle Big Data Appliance hardware faults occur. ASR detects faults in the
most common server components, such as disks, fans, and power supplies, and
automatically opens a service request when a fault occurs. ASR monitors only server
components and does not detect all possible faults.
ASR is not a replacement for other monitoring mechanisms, such as SMTP and SNMP
alerts, within the customer data center. It is a complementary mechanism that
expedites and simplifies the delivery of replacement hardware. ASR should not be
used for downtime events in high-priority systems. For high-priority events, contact
Oracle Support Services directly.
When ASR detects a hardware problem, ASR Manager submits a service request to
Oracle Support Services. In many cases, Oracle Support Services can begin work on
resolving the issue before the administrator is even aware the problem exists.
An email message is sent to both the My Oracle Support email account and the
technical contact for Oracle Big Data Appliance to notify them of the creation of the
service request.
A service request may not be filed automatically on some occasions. This can happen
because of the unreliable nature of the SNMP protocol or a loss of connectivity to ASR
Manager. Oracle recommends that customers continue to monitor their systems for
faults and call Oracle Support Services if they do not receive notice that a service
request has been filed automatically.
Setting Up Auto Service Request 5-1

See Also:
Oracle Auto Service Request web page at
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/systems/asr/overview/in
dex.html
Oracle Auto Service Request user documentation at
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/systems/asr/documentati
on/index.html

Before installing ASR, complete these prerequisites:
1. Create a My Oracle Support account at http://support.oracle.com.
2. Ensure that the following are set up correctly:
Oracle Premier Support for Systems, Oracle Premier Support for Operating
Systems, or Oracle Limited Warranty
The technical contact person at the customer site who is responsible for Oracle
Big Data Appliance
A valid shipping address at the customer site for Oracle Big Data Appliance
parts
3. Identify and designate a system to host ASR Manager.
ASR Manager must be installed on a server that has connectivity to Oracle Big
Data Appliance and an outbound Internet connection using HTTPS or an HTTPS
proxy. To submit a service request (SR), the server must be able to access the
Internet.
4. ASR Manager uses the following ports for normal operations. Ensure that the
Oracle Big Data Appliance and ASR Manager server ports are open:
All Oracle Big Data Appliance servers must have port 6481 open for
HTTP-based asset activation requests that they receive from ASR Manager.
The server running ASR Manager must have port 162 open for SNMP-based
telemetry messages that the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers send to it.
The Oracle transport.oracle.com web server has port 443 open for
HTTPS-based telemetry messages that ASR Manager sends to it.
See Figure 51 for the port locations.
5. Ensure that the designated system conforms to the "Hardware and Network
Configuration Recommendations for ASR." See the Oracle ASR website:
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/systems/asr/overview/hardware-recomme
ndations-330108.html
6. Confirm that Java Development Kit 6 (JDK 1.6.0_04 or later) is running on the
designated ASR Manager system:
java -version
If necessary, download and install the latest version of JDK from the Java SE
Downloads website:
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/downloads/index.html

7. Obtain root access to the designated ASR Manager host.

8. Identify and verify connectivity to Oracle Big Data Appliance.
9. Verify connectivity to the Internet using HTTPS.
Figure 51 shows the network connections between ASR and Oracle Big Data
Appliance.
Figure 51 Auto Service Request Network Connections
Port 162 Port 443

Ethernet ASR Oracle ASR Infrastructure
Switch Manager https://transport.oracle.com
Port 6481
eth0 ILOM
Oracle Big Data
Appliance Server
(1 of 18)
ILOM ILOM
InfiniBand InfiniBand
Gateway Switch Gateway Switch
Administrative
Client Access
Internet
Installing ASR Manager

To install ASR Manager, download the current version from My Oracle Support ID
1185493.1. Then follow the instructions in the Oracle Auto Service Request Quick
Installation Guide at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E37710_01/index.htm
Do not set up the assets.

As root, perform these checks on ASR Manager to ensure that it is installed properly:
Verify that ASR Manager 3.5 or later is running:
asr show_rules_version
Check the registration status:

asr show_reg_status

Test the connection by sending a test message to the transport server.

asr test_connection

ASR is an optional software component of Oracle Big Data Appliance. When
configuring the software in Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation
Utility, you must complete the section about ASR. Then during the software
installation, the Mammoth utility configures the servers to trap the component fault
indicators. See "Mammoth Installation Steps" on page 10-25.
You can reconfigure your appliance at any time to add or drop support for ASR. See
"Changing the Configuration of Optional Software" on page 10-10.
Verifying ASR Assets

To verify the ASR assets:
1. In ASR Manager, verify that ASR is activated:
asr list_asset -i asset_ip
In the preceding command, asset_ip is the IP address of a server or an Oracle

ILOM. To list all assets, enter this command:
asr list_asset
The following is an example of the output. You should see a host name and an
Oracle ILOM name for each of the servers, for a total of 12, 24, or 36 activations. If
you see fewer, then identify the missing ones and activate them. An example of a
server name is bda1node15 and an Oracle ILOM name is bda1node15-c.
ADDRESS HOST_NAME SERIAL_NUMBER ASR PRODUCT_NAME
------------- -------------- ----------- -------- --------------------------
203.0.114.44 bda1node15 1143FMM023 Enabled SUN FIRE X4270 M2 SERVER
203.0.115.139 bda1node15-c 1143FMM073 Enabled SUN FIRE X4270 M2 SERVER
203.0.115.140 bda1node16-c 1143FMM063 Enabled SUN FIRE X4270 M2 SERVER
203.0.115.141 bda1node17-c 1143FMM46B Enabled SUN FIRE X4270 M2 SERVER
2. If no assets are listed, then verify that ASR is configured on Oracle Big Data
Appliance. Log in to the first server and enter this command:
# cat /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/cluster_name-config.json | grep ASR
The following output shows that ASR has not been configured.
ASR_ENABLED=false
SETUP_ASR_SERVER=false
ASR_HOST=
ASR_PORT=162
ASR_SERVER_PWD=
To configure ASR, see "Changing the Configuration of Optional Software" on

page 10-10.

Note: If an IP address or host name changes, then you must

deactivate and reactivate the asset.

To validate the ASR installation, you can generate test events.
To set up a test event on Oracle ILOM:
1. Log in to the Oracle ILOM of any server in Oracle Big Data Appliance.
2. Change to the following directory:
-> cd /SP/alertmgmt/rules/3
3. Enter this command:

-> show
The following information is displayed:

/SP/alertmgmt/rules/3
Targets:
Properties:
type = snmptrap
level = disable
destination = 0.0.0.0
destination_port = 0
community_or_username = public
snmp_version = 1
testrule = (Cannot show property)
Commands:
cd
set
show
4. Ensure that the properties have valid values, not blank or set to zeros as shown in
Step 3. Use the appropriate IP address and port for your site.
5. Set the test trap:
-> set testrule=true
6. You should receive an email about the event. Verify that an email was also sent to
the address listed in your customer support identifier (CSI) for Oracle Big Data
Appliance.
To set up a test in the operating system environment:
1. Log in to any server on Oracle Big Data Appliance.
2. Enter this command to validate the operating system.
# ./opt/oracle/bda/compmon/bda_mon_hw_asr.pl -validate_snmp_subscriber -type
asr
The sample output shows 10.10.10.123:162 as the ASR Manager address:

Sending test trap to destination - 10.10.10.123:162

Troubleshooting ASR
3. Verify that an email about the event was sent to you and to the address listed in
your customer support identifier (CSI) for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
This test event does not open a case, but it makes a verifiable entry in the ASR
back end.
If you received the emails from both of the previous tests (Oracle ILOM and operating
system environment), then your validation is complete. If not, then proceed to
"Troubleshooting ASR" on page 5-6.
If the emails state that there are contract issues, contact your installation coordinator
for further assistance.
Troubleshooting ASR
For troubleshooting procedures for the ASR software, see Chapter 5 of the Oracle ASR
Installation and Operations Guide at:
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/systems/asr/documentation/index.html
If you continue to have issues, contact ASR support. See My Oracle Support Note
1352349.1.

Part II
Part II Hardware Installation and Configuration
An Oracle field engineer typically installs and configures the hardware components of
Oracle Big Data Appliance. You must follow these instructions only if you plan to
install and configure Oracle Big Data Appliance yourself.
Part II contains the following chapters:
Chapter 6, "Installing Oracle Big Data Appliance at the Site"
Chapter 7, "Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance Full Rack or Starter Rack"
Chapter 8, "Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance In-Rack Expansion Kit"
Chapter 9, "Connecting Multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance Racks"
6
Installing Oracle Big Data Appliance at the Site
6
This chapter describes how to move, install, and configure the hardwarefrom
unpacking Oracle Big Data Appliance to powering on the system. This chapter
contains these sections:
Reviewing Safety Guidelines
Unpacking Oracle Big Data Appliance
Placing Oracle Big Data Appliance in Its Allocated Space
Powering On the System for the First Time
Reviewing Safety Guidelines

Before Oracle Big Data Appliance arrives, review the following safety precautions to
ensure that the site is safe and ready for delivery. Failing to observe these precautions
can result in injury, equipment damage, or malfunction.
Do not block ventilation openings.
Do not install Oracle Big Data Appliance in a location that is exposed to direct
sunlight or near a device that may become hot.
Do not install Oracle Big Data Appliance in a location that is exposed to excessive
dust, corrosive gases, or air with high salt concentrations.
Do not install Oracle Big Data Appliance in a location that is exposed to frequent
vibrations. Install it on a flat, level surface.
Use a power outlet that provides proper grounding. For shared grounding, the
grounding resistance must not be greater than 10 ohms. Ensure that your facility
administrator or a qualified electrical engineer verifies the grounding method for
the building and performs the grounding work.
Be sure that each grounding wire used for Oracle Big Data Appliance is used
exclusively for Oracle Big Data Appliance. Observe the precautions, warnings, and
notes about handling that appear on labels on the equipment.
Do not place cables under the equipment or stretch the cables tightly.
Do not disconnect power cords from the equipment while its power is on.
If you cannot reach the connector lock when disconnecting LAN cables, then press
the connector lock with a flathead screwdriver to disconnect the cable. You could
damage the system board if you force your fingers into the gap rather than using a
flathead screwdriver.
Installing Oracle Big Data Appliance at the Site 6-1

Do not place anything on top of Oracle Big Data Appliance or perform any work
directly above it.
Do not let the room temperature rise sharply, especially in winter. Sudden
temperature changes can cause condensation to form inside Oracle Big Data
Appliance. Allow for a sufficient warm-up period before operation.
Do not install Oracle Big Data Appliance near a photocopier, air conditioner,
welding machine, or any other equipment that generates loud, electronic noises.
Avoid static electricity at the installation location. Static electricity transferred to
Oracle Big Data Appliance can cause malfunctions. Static electricity is often
generated on carpets.
Confirm that the supply voltage and frequency match the electrical ratings
indicated for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Do not insert anything into any Oracle Big Data Appliance opening, unless doing
so is part of a documented procedure.
WARNING: Oracle Big Data Appliance contains high-voltage parts.

If a metal object or other electrically conductive object enters an
opening in Oracle Big Data Appliance, then it could cause a short
circuit. This could result in personal injury, fire, electric shock, and
equipment damage.
When using single-phase power distribution units (PDUs), note the following:
PDU A input 0 and PDU B input 2 must be on the same phase.
The inputs are labeled where they come out of the PDU. Connecting cables as
described ensures that the phases are balanced on both sides, A and B, in a
failover.
See Also:
Important Safety Information for Sun Hardware Systems (816-7190)
included with the rack and available online at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19115-01/mod.dc.d20/816-7190-1
2/816-7190-12.pdf
Oracle Big Data Appliance Safety and Compliance Guide and all safety
notices printed on the packaging
Sun Rack II Power Distribution Units User's Guide at

You should determine the unpacking location during the site planning process. See
Chapter 2.
Figure 61 shows the Oracle Big Data Appliance shipping crate.

Figure 61 Oracle Big Data Appliance in the Shipping Crate
See Also: Sun Rack II Unpacking Guide for additional information

about unpacking the rack. The guide is available at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19844-01/index.html
Contents of the Shipping Kit

The shipping kit contains the following tools and equipment to install and service
Oracle Big Data Appliance:
16 mm long No. 2 Phillips screw
T30 Torx cranked wrench key
T25 Torx cranked wrench key
6 mm hexagon Allen wrench key
SW 12 mm single-headed wrench
2 square jumper brackets with 4 M5 Torx screws
2 cable management hooks with 4 spring nuts
Side panel removal tool
Keys to the front door, rear door, and side panel locks
32 M6 cage nuts

32 M6 screws
Cage nut mounting tool
SW 17 mm single-headed wrench is included on the shipping pallet
Note: The following items are not included in the shipping kit:
No. 2 Phillips screwdriver
Antistatic wrist strap
Removing Oracle Big Data Appliance from the Shipping Crate
Note: Oracle strongly recommends that you use professional movers

to unpack and install Oracle Big Data Appliance.
See Also: Sun Rack II unpacking instructions included with the

packaging
To unpack Oracle Big Data Appliance:

1. Unpack Oracle Big Data Appliance carefully from the packaging and shipping
pallet:
a. Remove the shipping carton bands.
b. Remove the yellow fasteners and carton top.
c. Remove the carton sides and inner top.
WARNING: Rocking or tilting the rack can cause it to fall over and
cause serious injury or death.
2. Remove the shipping kit.

3. Attach the ramps to the shipping pallet as follows:
a. Remove the ramps from the pallet sides.
b. Obtain the parts bag from inside the cabinet.
c. Adjust the leveling bolts on the ramps and connect the ramps to the pallet
wheel track.
4. Carefully roll Oracle Big Data Appliance off the shipping pallet as follows:
a. Unfasten the exterior mounting brackets from the pallet.
b. Unfasten the interior mounting brackets from the pallet. Use care when
removing the mounting brackets from underneath Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Access to the inside mounting brackets might be limited.
c. Roll the cabinet down the ramps to the level floor. Oracle recommends having
three people available to move the rack down the ramp: one person on each
side to help guide the rack and one person in back.

5. Save the mounting brackets that secure the rack to the shipping pallet. You can use
these mounting brackets to permanently secure Oracle Big Data Appliance to the
installation site floor.
Note: Do not dispose of these brackets, because you cannot order

replacement brackets.
6. Recycle the packaging properly. Follow local laws and guidelines to dispose of the
material.

This section describes how to position, stabilize, and ground Oracle Big Data
Appliance. This section contains the following topics:
Moving Oracle Big Data Appliance
Stabilizing Oracle Big Data Appliance
Attaching a Ground Cable (Optional)
Moving Oracle Big Data Appliance

To move Oracle Big Data Appliance:
1. Ensure that the doors are closed and secured.
2. Ensure that the leveling and stabilizing feet on the rack are raised and out of the
way.
3. Push Oracle Big Data Appliance from behind to the installation site.
When moving Oracle Big Data Appliance to the installation site, the front casters do
not turn; you must steer the unit by moving the rear casters, as shown in Figure 62.
You can safely maneuver Oracle Big Data Appliance by carefully pushing it.
Figure 62 shows the correct way to maneuver Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Figure 62 Carefully Push Oracle Big Data Appliance from Behind

Use two people to move the rack: one person in front and one person in back to help
guide the rack. When transporting configured racks from one location to another,
move them slowly -- 0.65 meters (2 feet) per second or slower.
Carefully examine the transportation path. Avoid obstacles such as doorways or
elevator thresholds that can cause abrupt stops or shocks. Go around obstacles by
using ramps or lifts to enable smooth transport.
WARNINGS:
Never attempt to move Oracle Big Data Appliance by pushing
on the side panels. Pushing on the side panels can tip the rack
over. This can cause serious personal injury or death, and also
damage to the equipment.
Never tip or rock Oracle Big Data Appliance because the rack
can fall over.
Stabilizing Oracle Big Data Appliance

After moving Oracle Big Data Appliance to the installation site, stabilize the rack to
ensure that it does not move or tip over. You can stabilize the rack permanently by
extending the rack leveling feet, using mounting brackets, or both.
Stabilize the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack with Leveling Feet
The rack contains four leveling feet that you can lower to stabilize the rack, even when
it is permanently secured to the floor.
To adjust the leveling feet:
1. Locate the four leveling feet located at the bottom corners of the rack.
2. Lower the leveling feet to the floor as shown in Figure 63 using the SW 12 mm
wrench. When lowered correctly, the four leveling feet should support the full
weight of the rack.
Figure 63 Stabilizing the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Using Leveling Feet
Stabilize the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack with Mounting Brackets
You can permanently mount the rack to the installation site floor using the same four
mounting brackets that secured the rack to the shipping pallet.

To install the mounting brackets:

1. Drill the mounting holes in the installation floor. Figure 64 shows the location
and dimensions of the mounting brackets.
Figure 64 Location of Mounting Brackets on the Rack
2. Obtain four bolts and washers to mount the Oracle Big Data Appliance rack to the
floor. The bolt holes in the mounting brackets have a 10.0 mm diameter. Oracle
does not provide mounting bolts because different floors require different bolt
types and strengths. Select bolts that are appropriate for your location.
3. Position the rack over the predrilled holes. Figure 65 shows the bottom view of
the Oracle Big Data Appliance rack and the location for the mounting hole and
floor cut dimensions.
Figure 65 Bottom View of the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack

1: Distance from the center of the mounting bracket to the edge of the rack is
113 mm (4.45 inches).
2: Width between the centers of the mounting hole slots is 374 mm (14.72
inches).
3: Distance from the center of the mounting bracket to the edge of the rack is
113 mm (4.45 inches).
4: Distance between the centers of the front and rear mounting hole slots is
1120 mm (44.1 inches).
5: Depth of cable-routing floor cutout is 330 mm (13 inches).
6: Distance between the floor cutout and the edge of the rack is 160 mm (6.3
inches).
7: Width of cable-routing floor cutout is 280 mm (11 inches).
If you plan to route data or PDU power cords through the bottom of the rack, then
you must cut a hole in the installation floor site. Cut a rectangle below the rear
portion of the rack, between the two rear casters and behind the rear RETMA
(Radio Electronics Television Manufacturers Association) rails.
Caution: Do not create a hole where the rack casters or leveling feet
brackets will be placed.
Figure 66 shows the base positions of the rack from the bottom.
Figure 66 Base Position of the Rack to Measure (in mm)
4. Open the front and rear doors.

5. Attach the mounting brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 67 using a 6 mm
hexagon Allen wrench key.

Figure 67 Securing the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Using Mounting Brackets
6. Using bolts and washers obtained in Step 2, permanently mount your system to
the floor using the four mounting brackets shown in Figure 67.
7. Firmly tighten all of the bolts that secure the mounting brackets to the rack and to
the floor.
Attaching a Ground Cable (Optional)

The Oracle Big Data Appliance rack power distribution units (PDUs) achieve earth
ground through their power cords. Final chassis ground is achieved by way of the
ground prong when you connect the power cord to a socket. For additional grounding,
attach a chassis earth ground cable to the rack. The additional ground point enables
electrical current leakage to dissipate more efficiently.
WARNING: The PDU power input lead cords and the ground cable
must reference a common earth ground. If they do not, then a
difference in ground potential can be introduced. If you are unsure
of your facility's PDU receptacle grounding, then do not install a
ground cable until you confirm that there is a proper PDU
receptacle grounding. If a difference in ground potential is
apparent, then you must take corrective action.
To attach a ground cable:

1. Obtain a grounding cable. It is not shipped with the system.
2. Ensure that the installation site has properly grounded the power source in the
data center. The facility PDU must have earth ground.
3. Ensure that all grounding points, such as raised floors and power receptacles,
reference the facility ground.
4. Ensure that direct, metal-to-metal contact is made for this installation. During
manufacturing, the ground cable attachment area might have been painted or
coated.
5. Attach the ground cable to an attachment point located at the bottom rear of the
system frame, as shown in Figure 68. The attachment point is an adjustable bolt
that is inside the rear of the cabinet.

Figure 68 Earth Ground Attachment Bolt Location

Before powering on the system for the first time, you must inspect it and connect the
power cords. This section contains the following topics:
Inspecting the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack After It Is in Place
Connecting Power Cords
Powering On Oracle Big Data Appliance
Inspecting the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack After It Is in Place

This procedure describes how to visually examine the Oracle Big Data Appliance
physical system after it is in place, but before power is supplied.
To inspect the Oracle Big Data Appliance rack:
1. Check the rack for damage.
2. Check the rack for loose or missing screws.
3. Check the rack for the ordered configuration. Refer to the Customer Information
Sheet (CIS) on the side of the packaging.
4. Check that all cable connections are secure and firmly in place as follows:
a. Check the power cables. Ensure that the correct connectors have been supplied
for the data center facility power source.
b. Check the network data cables.
5. Check the site location tile arrangement for cable access and airflow.
6. Check the data center airflow that leads into the front of the rack.
See Also: "Ventilation and Cooling Requirements" on page 2-10 for

more information
Connecting Power Cords

This procedure describes how to connect power cords to the Oracle Big Data
Appliance rack.
To connect power cords to the rack:

1. Open the rear cabinet door.

2. Ensure that the correct power connectors have been supplied.
3. Unfasten the power cord cable ties. The ties are for shipping only and are no
longer needed. See Figure 69.
4. Route the power cords to the facility receptacles as shown in Figure 610 or
Figure 611. You can route the power cords through the top or the bottom of the
rack.
5. Secure the power cords in bundles.
6. Ensure that the breaker switches are OFF before connecting the power cables.
7. Plug the PDU power cord connectors into the facility receptacles.
Figure 69 shows the location of the power cord cable ties in a rack.
Figure 69 Location of Power Cord Cable Ties
Figure 610 shows the power cords routed out of the bottom of the rack.

Figure 610 Power Cord Routing Out the Bottom
Figure 611 shows the power cords routed out the top of the rack.
Figure 611 Power Cord Routing Out the Top

Note: Oracle Big Data Appliance nodes may take up to 15 minutes to

start through the normal BIOS POST tests.
To power up Oracle Big Data Appliance:

1. Switch on the PDU B circuit breakers, one at a time. PDU B is on the right side of
the rack when viewed from the rear. The circuit breakers are on the rear of the rack
as shown in Figure 612. Press the ON (|) side of the toggle switch. When the
breaker is ON, the switch is flush with the side of the PDU.
Figure 612 PDU Switch Locations
2. Verify that the expected power light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are on. The LEDs are
located as follows:
Servers: Top LED
Cisco switch: Left LED (viewed from front) is green, and the other LEDs are
red
InfiniBand switches: Right LED (viewed from front) labeled PS1
KVM switch: Lower LED B (Sun Fire X4270 M2-based rack only)
KMM switch: Only supplied by PDU B (Sun Fire X4270 M2-based rack only)
3. Connect power to PDU A. Ensure that the breaker switches are in the OFF position
before connecting the power cables.
See Also: "Reviewing Safety Guidelines" on page 6-1 for information

about single-phase PDUs and cabling
4. On single-phase systems, ensure that the following inputs are on the same phase:
PDU A Input 2 and PDU B Input 0


5. Switch on the PDU A circuit breakers one at a time.
6. Verify that the expected power LEDs are on throughout the rack.
7. Perform a visual check of all cable connections in the rack. Do not press every
connector to verify connection.
8. Verify that the OK LED is blinking standby for all systems. The OK LED blinks
every 3 seconds when in standby mode. It is dark for 2 to 3 minutes while Oracle
ILOM is booting before going to standby mode.
9. If a system does not go into standby mode:
a. Connect a laptop to the service processor SET MGT port with baud settings of
115200,8,N,1.
b. At the pre-boot prompt, type boot.
Each time the system restarts, a file is generated in the /root directory with the results
of the validation check. The file is named either BDA_REBOOT_SUCCEEDED or BDA_
REBOOT_FAILED, depending on the success or failure of the validation checks.
Note: After powering on Oracle Big Data Appliance, configure the

system as described in Chapter 7.

7
Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance Full
7
Rack or Starter Rack
This chapter describes how to configure the system, accounts, and software for an
Oracle Big Data Appliance full rack or starter rack.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Configuring the KVM Switch
Configuring the Cisco Ethernet Switch
Configuring the InfiniBand Leaf and Spine Switches
Configuring the Power Distribution Units
Configuring the Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers
Configuring the Network
Configuring Multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance Racks
See Also:
Chapter 8, "Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance In-Rack
Expansion Kit"
Chapter 14, "Executing Commands Across a Cluster Using the dcli
Utility"
Chapter 15, "Using Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager"
Note:
Oracle recommends that you have the
bda-install-preview.html file available while completing these
procedures. See "About the Configuration Files" on page 4-3.
Oracle recommends that an Oracle field engineer performs the
configuration steps described in this chapter.

A KVM switch is provided only in Oracle Big Data Appliance racks with Sun Fire
X4270 M2 servers. Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 and X3-2 do not have a KVM
switch.
The KVM configuration consists of these procedures:
Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance Full Rack or Starter Rack 7-1
Starting the KVM Switch

Connecting the KVM Switch to the Management Network
Checking the KVM Firmware Version
Configuring the KVM Switch to Access the Servers
Accessing a Server by Using the KVM Switch
Starting the KVM Switch

To start the KVM switch:
1. Ensure that all connected components are powered off.
2. Pull the KVM tray out from the front of the rack, and open it using the handle.
3. Touch the touch pad.
4. Toggle between the host and KVM interface by pressing the Ctrl key on the left
side twice, similar to double-clicking with a mouse. You see the main user
interface page.
5. In the navigator on the left, select Target Devices under Unit View. In the main
display area, verify that 18 target devices are listed with Action set to KVM
Session.
The sessions are numbered from the bottom of the rack to the top.
6. If 18 sessions are not shown:
a. In the navigator under Appliances, expand Ports, and then select IQ
Adaptors.
b. In the main display area, choose the Port table heading to sort the sessions by
port number.
c. Note any missing sessions, so that you can fix them later.
d. In the navigator, choose Target Devices to return to the Target Devices page.
Connecting the KVM Switch to the Management Network

To connect the KVM switch to the management network:
1. In the navigator under User Accounts, select Local.
2. Under Users, choose Admin.
3. Set the password for the Admin account to welcome1, and then choose Save. Do
not modify any other parameters.
4. Under Appliance Settings, expand Network, and then choose IPv4. The Network
Information page appears.
5. Enter values for Address, Subnet, and Gateway, and then choose Save.
6. Under Appliance Settings, choose DNS to display the DNS Information page.
7. Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers, and then choose Save.
8. Under Network, choose General to display the Appliance General Network
Settings page.
9. Connect the KVM LAN1 Ethernet port to the management network.

10. To verify that the port has been configured correctly, ensure that the Media Access
Control (MAC) address on the Network Settings page matches the label next to the
LAN1/LAN2 ports at the rear of the KVM switch.
11. Under Users, select Overview to display the Unit Maintenance page.
12. Enter a name for the KVM switch, and then choose Save.
13. To restart the KVM switch, choose Reboot under Overview and Yes to confirm.
Checking the KVM Firmware Version

You may need to upgrade the KVM firmware to the recommended version.
To check the KVM firmware version:
1. In the navigator under Appliance Settings, select Versions. There are two version
numbers, Application and Boot. Compare the displayed versions with these
recommended versions:
Application: 1.10.2.17762
Boot: 1.9.16473
If the application firmware version is earlier than 1.10.2, then you should upgrade
it. To upgrade the firmware, continue with this procedure. Otherwise, you are
done.
2. Download the firmware from this website to a USB flash drive:
http://www.avocent.com/Pages/GenericTwoColumn.aspx?id=12541
3. Plug the flash drive into the KVM USB port and open a browser session.
4. Log in to the KVM as Admin with password welcome1.
5. Under Appliance, select Overview.
6. From the Tools list, select Upgrade Firmware.
7. Select the connection method, such as FTP or HTTP.
8. Enter the file name of the downloaded firmware.
9. Click Upgrade.
The upgrade process takes 5 to10 minutes, including an automatic restart.
10. Confirm the firmware version by selecting Versions under Appliance Settings.
Configuring the KVM Switch to Access the Servers

To configure the KVM switch to access the servers:
1. Under Unit View, select Target Devices to display the Target Devices page.
2. Start up the server. The power button is on the front panel.
3. Click the server name in the Name column to display the Unit Overview page.
4. Click Overview and overwrite the name with the Oracle standard naming format
of customer prefix, node type, and number. For example, bda1node03 identifies the
third server from the bottom of the bda1 rack.
5. Click Save.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each server in the rack. Each server boots through
BIOS, and boots the operating system with the default factory IP configuration.
Accessing a Server by Using the KVM Switch

To access a server by using the KVM switch:
1. Under Unit View, select Target Devices to display the Target Devices page.
2. Click the system name in the Name column.
3. Click KVM Session to open a session with the server.

The Cisco Catalyst 4948 Ethernet switch supplied with Oracle Big Data Appliance has
IPBASEK9-MZ firmware. The switch is minimally configured during installation.
These procedures configure the Cisco Ethernet switch into one large virtual LAN.
The Cisco Ethernet switch configuration consists of these topics and procedures:
Scope of the Configuration
Prerequisites for Configuring the Ethernet Switch
Configuring the Ethernet Switch on the Customer Network
Setting Up Telnet Access on the Ethernet Switch
Configuring SSH on the Ethernet Switch
Setting the Clock and Time Zone on the Ethernet Switch
Configuring the NTP Servers for the Ethernet Switch
Disabling the Spanning Tree
Verifying the Ethernet Configuration
Scope of the Configuration

This configuration disables IP routing and sets the following:
Host name
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Domain name
Name server
NTP server
Time
Time zone
Prerequisites for Configuring the Ethernet Switch

To avoid disrupting the customer network, observe these prerequisites:
Do not connect the Cisco Ethernet switch until the network administrator has
verified the running configuration and made any necessary changes.
Do not connect the Cisco Ethernet switch to the customer network until the IP
addresses on all components have been configured in Oracle Big Data Appliance.

This sequence prevents any duplicate IP address conflicts, which are possible due
to the default addresses set in the components when shipped.
Configure the Cisco Ethernet switch with the network administrator.
See Also:
Oracle Big Data Appliance Site Checklists
Configuring the Ethernet Switch on the Customer Network

To configure the Ethernet switch on the customer network:
1. Connect a serial cable from the Cisco switch console to a laptop or similar device.
An RJ45 to DB9 serial cable is included with the Cisco documentation package.
The status lights turn on and this message is displayed:
Switch con0 is now available
Press RETURN to get started.
2. If the Ethernet switch displays status lights and a welcome message, then
continue. If it does not, then go to "Correcting the Autoboot Settings" on page 7-6.
3. Ensure that the terminal session is recorded on the laptop by logging the output.
You can use the output as a record that the switch has been configured correctly.
The default serial port speed is 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, and no
handshake.
4. Change to enable mode using the following command. The default password is
welcome1.
Switch> enable
Password:
5. Configure the network for a single VLAN. The following is an example of the
configuration:
Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface vlan 1
Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.7.7.34 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# *Jan 23 15:54:00.506: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I:Configured from console by
console
Switch# write memory
Building configuration...
Compressed configuration from 2474 bytes to 1066 bytes [OK ]
6. If the network does not require IP routing on the switch, then disable the default
IP routing setting and configure the default gateway. This method is preferred.
Consult the network administrator if in doubt.
Switch(config)# no ip routing
Switch(config)# ip default-gateway 10.17.7.1
Switch(config)# end
*Jan 23 15:54:00.506: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I:Configured from console by console
Compressed configuration from 3600 bytes to 1305 bytes[OK]]
7. If the network requires IP routing on the switch, and then keep the default IP
routing setting and configure the default gateway as follows:
Switch(config)# ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.7.7.1
Switch(config)# end
8. Set the host name of the switch to the name specified in the installation preview.
This example uses the name bda1sw-ip.
Switch(config)# hostname bda1sw-ip
bda1sw-ip(config)# end
*Jan 23 15:57:50.886: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
bda1sw-ip# write memory
Compressed configuration from 3604 bytes to 1308 bytes[OK]
bda1sw-ip#
The system host name appears in the prompt.

9. Configure up to three DNS servers, using the IP addresses specified in the
installation preview instead of the examples shown here. If no DNS service is
available, then set the domain name anyway, so that the SSH keys are
configurable.
bda1sw-ip# configure terminal
bda1sw-ip(config)# ip domain-name mydomain.com
bda1sw-ip(config)# ip name-server 10.7.7.3
*Sep 15 14:26:37.045: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
Correcting the Autoboot Settings

If the Cisco Ethernet switch does not display any link or status lights, then the
incorrect autoboot settings may prevent it from starting. If the serial console port
shows the rommon prompt, then complete the following procedure.
Correcting the autoboot settings of the Cisco switch:
1. Verify that the IPBASE and IPBASEK9 firmware reboot files are available:
rommon 1 >dir bootflash:
File Size (Bytes) File Name
------------------------------
25213107 cat4500e-ipbase-mz.150-2.SG2.bin
32288280 cat4500e-ipbasek9-mz.151-1.SG.bin
Total space = 128165888 bytes, Available = 60643328 bytes

2. Restart the switch manually using the default image:

rommon 2 >boot
Rommon reg: 0x00004780
Reset2Reg: 0x00009EFF
##
Fortooine controller 0x0B5A753B..0x0B70B6CD original
size:0x001C3EA5
##################
diagsk5 version 5.0.1
.
.
.
3. Press Enter to get the Switch prompt.

4. Enter enable mode. Enter welcome1 for the password or just press Enter:
Switch>enable
Password: welcome1
Switch#
5. Verify that the boot variable is not set:

Switch# show bootvar
BOOT variable =
CONFIG_FILE variable does not exist
BOOTLDR variable does not exist
Configuration register is 0x2102
6. Verify that IPBASEK9 is available in the boot file system:

Switch# dir bootflash:
Directory of bootflash:/
6 -rw- 25213107 Dec 3 2012 17:27:38 +00:00 cat4500eipbase-mz.150-2.SG2.bin
7 -rw- 32288280 Apr 1 2013 11:41:54 +00:00 cat4500eipbasek9-mz.151-1.SG.bin
128165888 bytes total (60643328 bytes free)
7. If IPBASEK9 is not listed in the bootflash directory, then you must install it before
continuing. See My Oracle Support Document ID 1415044.1.
8. Set the BOOT variable as shown in this example:
Switch# config term
Switch(config)# config-register 0x2102
Switch(config)# no boot system
Switch(config)# boot system bootflash:cat4500e-ipbasek9-mz.151-1.SG.bin
Switch(config)# end
9. Verify the new BOOT setting:

Switch# show running-config | include boot
boot-start-marker
boot system bootflash:cat4500e-ipbasek9-mz.151-1.SG.bin
boot-end-marker
10. Save the changes to the startup configuration:

Switch# copy running-config startup-config all
Destination filename [startup-config]? Enter
11. Reload the firmware.

Switch# reload
Proceed with reload? [confirm] y
*Apr 24 09:31:32.887: %SYS-5-RELOAD: Reload requested by console. Reload
reason: Reload command
The switch automatically restarts and then continues the reload process.
Setting Up Telnet Access on the Ethernet Switch

Oracle Big Data Appliance ships with a version of the Cisco Ethernet switch software
that supports both telnet and SSH. Telnet access is optional. The following procedure
describes how to enable and disable remote telnet access.
Note: Telnet access is not secure.
To set up telnet access to the Ethernet switch:

1. Set the password for telnet access if necessary; it should already be set when you
receive Oracle Big Data Appliance.
bda1sw-ip(config)# enable password welcome1
bda1sw-ip(config)# enable secret welcome1
The enable secret you have chosen is the same as your enable password.
This is not recommended. Re-enter the enable secret.
2. Set up telnet access. In this example, the first login output shows that the
password is not set and telnet access is disabled. If the login command returns
nothing, then the password is set and telnet access is available.
bda1sw-ip(config)# line vty 0 15
bda1sw-ip(config-line)# login
%Login disabled on line 1,until 'password' is set
...
bda1sw-ip(config-line)# password welcome1
bda1sw-ip(config-line)# end
3. To disable telnet access and prevent remote access, follow this example:


bda1sw-ip(config-line)# no password
%Login disabled on line 1, until 'password' is set
...
bda1sw-ip(config-line)# end
Configuring SSH on the Ethernet Switch

The current firmware supports remote connections using SSH. To set up SSH on the
Cisco Ethernet switch, follow this example:
bda1sw-ip(config)# crypto key generate rsa
% You already have RSA keys defined named bda1sw-ip.mydomain.com.
% Do you really want to replace them? [yes/no]: yes
Choose the size of the key modulus in the range of 360 to 2048 for
your General Purpose Keys. Choosing a key modulus greater than 512
may take a few minutes.
How many bits in the modulus [512]: 768
% Generating 768 bit RSA keys, keys will be non-exportable...[OK]
bda1sw-ip(config)# username admin password 0 welcome1
bda1sw-ip(config-line)# transport input ssh
bda1sw-ip(config-line)# exit
bda1sw-ip(config)# aaa new-model
bda1sw-ip(config)# ip ssh time-out 60
bda1sw-ip(config)# ip ssh authentication-retries 3
Oracle Internal and Approved Partners Only Page 11 of 47 V 1.0 Created: 21. Dec.
2012
Task Comment Check
bda1sw-ip(config)# ip ssh version 2
Setting the Clock and Time Zone on the Ethernet Switch

The Cisco Ethernet switch keeps internal time in coordinated universal time (UTC)
format.
To set the local time and time zone, ordering is important. The following is an example
of setting the local time to the U.S. Eastern time zone:
bda1sw-ip(config)# clock timezone EST -5
bda1sw-ip(config)# clock summer-time EDT recurring
bda1sw-ip# clock set 15:00:00 January 23 2012
bda1sw-ip# show clock
15:00:18.819 EST Mon Jan 23 2012
Clock Commands
The following are descriptions of the commands for setting the clock and time zone:
To use UTC, enter this command:
no clock timezone global configuration
To use a time zone:

clock timezone zone hours-offset [minutes-offset]
In this command, zone is the time zone to display when standard time is in effect,
hours-offset is the hours offset from UTC, and minutes-offset is the minutes offset
from UTC.
To set summer time hours:
clock summer-time zone recurring [week day month hh:mm week day month \
hh:mm [offset]]
In this command, zone is the time zone to be displayed when summer time
(daylight savings time) is in effect, week is the week of the month (1 to 5 or last),
day is the day of the week, month is the month, hh:mm is the time in 24-hour
format, and offset is the number of minutes to add during summer time. The
default offset is 60 minutes. Summer time is disabled by default.
To manually set the clock to any time:
clock set hh:mm:ss month day year
In this command, hh:mm:ss is the hour, month, and second in 24-hour format, day
is the day of the month, month is the month, and year is the year. The time specified
is relative to the configured time zone.
See Also: Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference at

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_
2/configfun/command/reference/frf012.html
Configuring the NTP Servers for the Ethernet Switch

Configure up to two NTP servers. Use IP addresses instead of names, which fail when
the switch is not connected to the network. If you must use names, then configure the
NTP servers after the switch is connected to the network and DNS is resolving names
correctly.
The following example shows the NTP server synchronized to local time when the
Cisco switch is connected to the network and has access to NTP.
bda1sw-ip(config)# ntp server 10.196.23.254 prefer
bda1sw-ip(config)# ntp server 192.168.9.19
Jan 23 20:00:41.235: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I:Configured from console by console

bda1sw-ip# show ntp status
output varies by network
bda1sw-ip# show clock
15:00:57.919 EST Mon Jan 23 2012
A symbol may precede the output of the show clock command:

* (star): The time is not authoritative.
. (dot) The time is authoritative, but NTP is not synchronized.
(blank) The time is authoritative, as shown in the example.
Disabling the Spanning Tree

By default, spanning tree is enabled on Cisco switches, but it is disabled in the factory
on all the server connection ports 1 to 47.
Adding a switch with spanning tree enabled can cause problems on networks where it
is disabled intentionally. As a precaution, disable spanning tree on the uplink port's
VLAN before connecting to the customer network.
If spanning tree must be turned on before or after the connection, then the network
administrator can specify the appropriate protocol settings, as described in the Cisco
switch configuration documentation.
To disable the spanning tree:
1. If the port must be disabled, then enter these commands:
Switch(config)# no spanning-tree vlan 1
Switch(config)# end
Jan 23 20:01:15.083: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
2. To verify the disabling of the spanning tree:

bda1sw-ip# show spanning-tree vlan 1
Spanning tree instance(s) for vlan 1 does not exist.
3. To re-enable the default protocol settings, if necessary:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 1
Switch(config)# end
Verifying the Ethernet Configuration

To verify the Cisco Ethernet switch configuration:
1. Verify the configuration by entering the following command:
bda1sw-ip# show running-config
The following is an example of the output:

Current configuration :2654 bytes

!
version 15.0
no service pad
service timestamps debug datetime msec
service timestamps log datetime msec
no service password-encryption
service compress-config
.
.
.
2. If any setting is incorrect, then repeat the appropriate step. To erase a setting, enter
no in front of the same command. For example, to erase the default gateway, enter
these commands:
bda1sw-ip# no ip default-gateway 10.7.7.1
bda1sw-ip# end
bda1sw-ip#
3. Save the current configuration by entering this command:

bda1sw-ip# copy running-config startup-config
Destination filename [startup-config]?
4. Exit from the session with this command:

bda1sw-ip#exit
bda1sw-ip con0 is now available
Press RETURN to get started.
5. Disconnect the cable from the Cisco console.

6. To check the configuration, attach a laptop to port 48 and ping the IP address of
the internal management network.
Caution: Do not connect the Cisco Ethernet switch to the

management network until after the system is configured with the
customer's IP addresses and the switch configuration is complete.

Oracle Big Data Appliance has two Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway leaf
switches and one Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 spine switch. To configure the
switches, follow these procedures for each one:
Configuring an InfiniBand Switch
Setting the Time Zone and Clock on an InfiniBand Switch
Checking the Health of an InfiniBand Switch
Checking the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switches

Configuring an InfiniBand Switch

To configure an InfiniBand switch:
1. Connect to the switch using a serial or an Ethernet connection.
For a remote Ethernet connection to 192.168.1.201, 192.168.1.202, or
192.168.1.203, see "Connecting to Oracle ILOM Using the Network" on
page 15-3.
For a local serial connection, see "Connecting to Oracle ILOM Using a Serial
Connection" on page 15-5.
2. Log in as ilom-admin with password welcome1.
The switch has a Linux-like operating system and an Oracle ILOM interface that is
used for configuration.
3. Check the firmware version, which should be 2.1.3-4 or later:
-> version
SP firmware 2.1.3-4
SP firmware build number: 47111
SP firmware date: Sat Aug 24
16:59:14 IST 2013
SP filesystem version: 0.1.22
4. Change to the /SP/network directory.

cd /SP/network
5. Enter these commands to configure the switch:

set pendingipaddress=ip_address
set pendingipnetmask=ip_netmask
set pendingipgateway=ip_gateway
set pendingipdiscovery=static
set commitpending=true
In these commands, ip_address, ip_netmask, and ip_gateway represent the

appropriate settings on your network.
6. Enter a show command to view the changes. If any values are wrong, reenter the
set commands ending with set commitpending=true.
-> show
/SP/network
Targets:
interconnect
ipv6
test
Properties:
commitpending = (Cannot show property)
dhcp_ser_ip = none
ipaddress = 10.135.42.24
ipdiscovery = static
ipgateway = 10.135.40.1
ipnetmask = 255.255.255.0
macaddress = 00:21:28:E7:B3:34
managementport = SYS/SP/NET0
outofbandmacaddress = 00:21:28:E7:B3:33
pendingipaddress = 10.135.42.23
pendingipdiscovery = static
pendingipgateway = 10.135.42.1
pendingipnetmask = 255.255.248.0
pendingmanagementport = /SYS/SP/NET0
sidebandmacaddress = 00:21:28:E7:B3:35
state = enabled
Commands:
cd
set
show
->
7. Set and verify the switch host name, replacing hostname with the valid name of the
switch, such as bda1sw-ib2. Do not include the domain name.
-> set /SP hostname=hostname
-> show /SP hostname
/SP
Properties:
hostname = bda1sw-iba
8. Set the DNS server name and the domain name:

-> set /SP/clients/dns auto_dns=enabled
-> set /SP/clients/dns nameserver=ip_address
-> set /SP/clients/dns searchpath=domain_name
In these commands, ip_address is one to three comma-separated IP addresses of the

name servers in the preferred search order, and domain_name is the full DNS
domain name, such as us.example.com.
9. Verify the settings:
-> show /SP/clients/dns
/SP/clients/dns
Targets:
Properties:
auto_dns = enabled
nameserver = 10.196.23.245, 172.32.202.15
retries = 1
searchpath = us.example.com
timeout = 5
Commands:
cd
set
show
Setting the Time Zone and Clock on an InfiniBand Switch

To set the time zone on an InfiniBand switch:
1. Check the current time setting:
-> show /SP/clock
If the setting is not accurate, continue with these steps.

2. Set the time zone, replacing zone_identifier with the time zone in the Configuration
Template, such as America/New_York:
-> set /SP/clock timezone=zone_identifier

-> show /SP/clock
If the setting is not accurate, continue with these steps.

4. Set the SP clock manually, replacing MMDDHHmmCCyy with the month, day,
hour, minute, century, and year.
-> set datetime=MMddHHmmCCyy

-> show /SP/clock
6. Configure the Network Time Protocol (NTP), replacing ip_address with the server
address. Server 1 is the primary NTP server and Server 2 is the secondary server.
-> set /SP/clients/ntp/server/1 address=ip_address
-> set /SP/clients/ntp/server/2 address=ip_address
7. Enable the NTP servers:

-> set /SP/clock usentpserver=enabled
Note: Properly synchronized clocks are required for the Mammoth

software installation to succeed. If no NTP server is available on the
administrative network, then configure the first Oracle Big Data
Appliance server as an NTP server.
8. Verify the settings:

-> show /SP/clients/ntp/server/1
-> show /SP/clients/ntp/server/2
-> show /SP/clock
Checking the Health of an InfiniBand Switch

To check the health of an InfiniBand leaf or spine switch:
1. Open the Fabric Management shell:
-> show /SYS/Fabric_Mgmt
The prompt changes from -> to FabMan@hostname->

2. Check the firmware version, which for gateway switches should be 2.0.5-2 or later,
and for the spine switch should be 2.1.3-4 or later. Check My Oracle Support ID
1474875.1 for the current version.
FabMan@bda1sw-02->version
SUN DCS gw version: 2.0.5-2
Build time: Nov 29 2011 16:05:05
FPGA version: 0x34
SP board info:
Manufacturing Date: 2011.05.31
Serial Number: "NCD6Q0126"
Hardware Revision: 0x0006

Firmware Revision: 0x0000
BIOS version: SUN0R100
BIOS date: 06/22/2010
FabMan@bda1sw-02->
3. Check the overall health of the switch and correct any issues:
FabMan@bda1sw-ib2-> showunhealthy
OK - No unhealthy sensors
4. Check the environment. Ensure that all tests return OK and PASSED, and correct
any issues before continuing. This example shows a problem with PSU1 caused by
a loose power cord. See the line starting with WARNING PSU.
FabMan@bda1sw-ib2-> env_test
Environment test started:
Starting Environment Daemon test:
Environment daemon running
Environment Daemon test returned OK
Starting Voltage test
Voltage ECB OK
Measured 3.3V Main = 3.28
Measured 3.3V Standby = 3.39 V
Measured 12V = 11.97 V
Measured 5V = 4.99 V
Measured VBAT = 3.09 V
Measured 1.0V = 1.01 V
Measured I4 1.2V = 1.22 V
Measured V1P2 DIG = 1.19 V
Measured V1P2 ANG = 1.18 V
Measured 1.2V BridgeX = 1.22 V
Measured 1.2V Standby = 1.20 V
Voltage test returned OK
Starting PSU test:
PSU 0 present OK
WARNING PSU 1 present AC Loss
PSU test returned 1 faults
Starting Temperature test:
Back temperature 30
Front temperature 29
SP temperature 36
Switch temperature 52,
.
.
.
5. Verify a priority setting of 5 for the InfiniBand Gateway leaf switches or 8 for the
InfiniBand Switch 36 spine switch:
FabMan@bda1sw-ib2-> setsmpriority list
Current SM settings:
smpriority 5
controlled_handover TRUE
subnet_prefix 0xfe80000000000000
If smpriority is correct, then you can skip the next step.

6. To correct the priority setting:

a. Stop the InfiniBand Subnet Manager:

FabMan@bda1sw-ib2-> disablesm
b. Set the priority to 5 for the InfiniBand Gateway leaf switches or 8 for the
InfiniBand Switch 36 spine switch. This example is for a leaf switch:
FabMan@bda1sw-ib2-> setsmpriority 5
c. Restart the InfiniBand Subnet Manager:

FabMan@bda1sw-ib2-> enablesm
7. Exit the Fabric Management shell:

FabMan@bda1sw-ib2-> exit
->
8. Exit the Oracle ILOM shell:

-> exit
9. Log in to the switch as root and restart it to ensure that all changes take effect:
# reboot
10. Repeat these steps for the other InfiniBand switches.
Checking the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switches

You must check all gateway switch instance numbers (NM2-GW) in the fabric to
ensure that the automatic setup assigned unique instance numbers to each switch,
both within each rack and among all racks in a multirack environment.
If two switches in the fabric share the same instance number, then the IB-10GbE ports
might not work correctly.
The switches must not use consecutive numbers. Oracle recommends even numbers
only. From the factory, the Oracle Big Data Appliance gateway switches use the
numbers 10 and 20.
If Oracle Big Data Appliance racks are connected to Oracle Exalogic Elastic Cloud
Machine racks, then verify that the instance numbers are even and unique to each
switch in the fabric.
To check the gateway switches:
1. Login as user ilom-admin on rack 1 gateway switch 1:
localhost: ilom-admin
password: welcome1
2. Enter the Fabric Management shell:

NOTE: show on Fabric_Mgmt will launch a restricted Linux shell.
User can execute switch diagnosis, SM Configuration and IB
monitoring commands in the shell. To view the list of commands,
use "help" at rsh prompt.
Use exit command at rsh prompt to revert back to
ILOM shell.
FabMan@hostname->
3. Display the current number:
FabMan@bda1sw-iba->setgwinstance --list
No BXM system name set, using 6 last bits of the ip-address, value: 24
If you see No BXM system name set (as shown here), or a system name of 0, then
you must set the instance number manually.
4. If rack 1 gateway switch 1 is not set to 10:
FabMan@bda1sw-iba->setgwinstance 10
Stopping Bridge Manager..-. [ OK ]
Starting Bridge Manager. [ OK ]
FabMan@bda1sw-iba->setgwinstance --list
BXM system name set to 10
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for gateway switch 2. Set it to 20 instead of 10.

6. If multiple racks are cabled together (Oracle Big Data Appliance racks and Oracle
Exalogic Elastic Cloud Machine racks), then repeat Steps 1 to 5 on each rack.
Increment the instance numbers from the previous rack by 2 to get a unique
number:
Set rack 2 gateway switch 1 to 12 (10+2).
Set rack 2 gateway switch 2 to 22 (20+2).
Continue in this way, assigning even numbers between 0 and 63.

The power distribution unit (PDU) configuration consists of these procedures:
Connecting the PDUs to the Network
Updating the PDU Firmware Version
Connecting the PDUs to the Network

The power distribution units (PDUs) are configured with a static IP address to connect
to the network for monitoring. Ensure that you have the following network
information before connecting the PDUs:
Static IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
To connect the PDUs to the network:
1. Use a web browser to access the PDU metering unit by entering the factory default
IP address for the unit. The address of PDU A is 192.168.1.210, and the address
of PDU B is 192.168.1.211.
The Current Measurement page opens. If the PDUs do not respond, then they
probably have different IP addresses:
a. Press and hold the red RESET button.
b. When the display starts to count down in about 10 to 15 seconds, release the
button and then press it again without holding it down.
c. When the monitor is restarting, note the current IP setting, and whether it is a
dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) or static address. Use those
addresses to connect.

2. Log in as the admin user on the PDU metering unit. The default password is adm1n
or admin. Change this password after configuring the network.
3. To check the firmware version, select Module Info. The version should be 1.06.
You can upgrade the firmware for a lower version. See "Updating the PDU
Firmware Version" on page 7-19.
4. Click Net Configuration in the upper left of the page.
5. Confirm that the DHCP Enabled option is not selected.
6. Enter the following network settings for the PDU metering unit:
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
7. Click Submit to set the network settings and reset the PDU metering unit.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for the second PDU.
Updating the PDU Firmware Version

To update the PDU firmware version:
1. Download the latest firmware version from My Oracle Support:
a. Log in at http://support.oracle.com.
b. Select the Patches & Updates tab.
c. For Patch Search, click Product or Family (Advanced).
d. For Product, select Sun Rack II PDU.
e. For Release, select Sun Rack II PDU 1.0.6.
f. Click Search to see the Patch Search Results page.
g. Click the patch name, such as 16523441.
h. Download the file.
2. Unzip the file on your local system. It has a name such as p16523441_1060_
Generic.zip. Then unzip the PDU file, which has a name like OraclePDU_
v1.0.6.zip.
3. In the PDU web interface, select Net Configuration and log in as admin with
password adm1n.
4. Scroll down to Firmware Update.
5. Click Browse, select the MKAPP_V1.06.DL file, and click Submit.
6. Click Browse, select the HTML_V1.06.DL file, and click Submit.
7. Click Module Info to verify the firmware version number.
8. Click Net Configuration, and then click Logout.

Before configuring the network, ensure that the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers are
set up correctly.
Note: If you must connect to the Oracle ILOM serial management

port, then the baud rate setting on the servers changes from the
default Oracle ILOM setting of 9600 to 115200 baud, 8 bits, no parity,
and 1 stop bit. To display the server console, use this command:
start HOST/console
To check the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers:

1. Power on all servers by pressing the power button on the front panel of each
server. The servers take 5 to 10 minutes to run through the normal startup tests.
2. Use a laptop to connect to a server:
a. Open an SSH connection using PuTTY or a similar utility.
b. Enter the default IP address of the server.
3. Log in as the root user to the first server. The password is welcome1.
4. Set up passwordless SSH for root by entering the setup-root-ssh command, as
described in "Setting Up Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1.
For starter racks, with or without an in-rack expansion kit, you must use the -j
parameter. See setup-root-ssh on page 13-42.
# setup-root-ssh -j "etho0_ips[range]"
5. Verify that SSH keys are distributed across the rack:

# cd /opt/oracle/bda
# dcli "hostname ; date"
6. If prompted for a password, enter Ctrl+C several times. This prompt confirms
distribution of the keys, so that you can continue to the next step. Otherwise,
generate the root SSH keys across the rack, replacing password with a valid
password and using the -j parameter for a starter rack:
# setup-root-ssh -p password [-j "eth0_ips[range]"]
Enter the dcli command in Step 5 again to verify the keys.

7. Compare the system serial numbers (S/N) on the front sticker to the server
assignments from the bottom (1) to the top (18) of the rack, to ensure that they
match:
# dcli "dmidecode -s "chassis-serial-number"
192.168.10.1: 1143FMM064
.
.
.
192.168.10.18: 1144FMM1A0
8. Compare the rack master serial number on the rack front sticker to the rack
assignment, to ensure that they match:
# dcli "ipmitool sunoem cli 'show /SP system_identifier'" | grep =
192.168.10.1: system_identifier = Oracle Big Data Appliance AK00024695
.
.
.

9. If the rack master serial number is incorrect, then reset it in the ILOM on every
system. Enter the following command on one line, with no breaks, replacing
R-MSN with the rack master serial number (such as AK00024695):
# dcli -l root \"ipmitool sunoem cli' set /SP system_identifier=\"\"Oracle Big
Data Appliance R-MSN\""'" \> /tmp/set-rack-csn.out
In the previous syntax, the system_identifier has a 40-character limit.

10. Verify that the InfiniBand ports are up, two on each server (36 total for a full rack
of 18 servers).
# dcli ibstatus | grep phys
192.168.10.1: phys state: 5: LinkUp
..
11. Verify that the InfiniBand ports are running at 40 Gbps (4X QDR):
# dcli ibstatus | grep rate | more
192.168.10.1: rate: 40 Gb/sec (4X QDR)
192.168.10.1: rate: 40 Gb/sec (4X QDR)
..
192.168.10.18: rate: 40 Gb/sec (4X QDR)
192.168.10.18: rate: 40 Gb/sec (4X QDR)
12. Verify that Oracle ILOM does not detect any faults:
# dcli 'ipmitool sunoem cli "show faulty"'
The output should appear as follows for each server:

bda1node02-adm.example.com: Connected. Use ^D to exit.
bda1node02-adm.example.com: -> show faulty
bda1node02-adm.example.com: Target | Property | Value
bda1node02-adm.example.com:-------------+---------------------+-----------
bda1node02-adm.example.com:
bda1node02-adm.example.com: -> Session closed
bda1node02-adm.example.com: Disconnected
13. Power up each server and verify that BDA_IMAGING_SUCCEEDED and BDA_REBOOT_
SUCCEEDED are in the /root directory of every server:
# dcli 'ls /root/BDA*'
14. Save the hardware profile output from each system in a file for review, replacing
filename with a file name of your choice:
# dcli bdacheckhw > filename
15. Check the hardware profile output file using commands like the following. In
these example, the file name is all-bdahwcheck.out.
To verify that there are no failures in the hardware profile:
grep -vi SUCCESS ~/all-bdahwcheck.out
This command returns all lines that do not show SUCCESS, so no returned lines
means no failures.
To verify 32 cores:
grep cores ~/all-bdahwcheck.out
To verify 63 GB of memory:
grep memory ~/all-bdahwcheck.out
To verify four fans:

grep fans ~/all-bdahwcheck.out
To verify that the status is OK for both power supplies:

grep supply ~/all-bdahwcheck.out
To verify that disks 0 to 11 are all the same model, online, spun up, and no
alert:
grep disk ~/all-bdahwcheck.out | grep "model\|status" | more
To verify that the host channel adapter model is Mellanox Technologies

MT26428 ConnectX VPI PCIe 2.0:
grep Host ~/all-bdahwcheck.out | grep model | more
16. Save the RAID configuration in a file, replacing filename with a file name of your
choice:
dcli MegaCli64 -ldinfo -lall -a0 | grep "Virtual Drive\|State" > filename
17. Verify that 12 virtual drives (0 to 11) are listed for each server. In this example, the
RAID configuration is stored in a file named all-ldstate.out.
less ~/all-ldstate.out
18. Save the software profile output from each system into a file for review, replacing
filename with a file name of your choice:
dcli bdachecksw > filename
19. Verify that the partition setup and software versions are correct. In this example,
the software profile is stored in a file named all-bdaswcheck.out.
less ~/all-bdaswcheck.out
20. Verify the system boots in this order: USB, RAID Slot 0, PXE:
# dcli "ubiosconfig export all -x /tmp/bios.xml"
[# dcli "grep -m1 -A20 boot_order /tmp/bios.xml" | more
[root@bda01 bda]# dcli "ubiosconfig export all -x /tmp/bios.xml"
[root@bda01 bda]# dcli "grep -m1 -A20 boot_order /tmp/bios.xml" | more
<boot_order>
<boot_device>
<description>USB:USBIN:ORACLE UNIGEN-UFD PMAP</description>
<instance>1</instance>
</boot_device>
<boot_device>
<description>RAID:PCIE6:(Bus 50 Dev 00)PCI RAID Adapter</description>
</boot_device>
<boot_device>
<description>PXE:NET0:IBA XE Slot 4000 v2196</description>
</boot_device>

<boot_device>
</boot_device>
<boot_device>
</boot_device>
21. If the boot order is incorrect:
a. Log in to the ILOM for that server and force the next restart into BIOS setup:
# set /HOST boot_device=bios
b. Restart the server and correct the BIOS.

Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility generates the
BdaDeploy.json file, which is used to configure all three network interfaces and all
Oracle ILOMs. See "Generating the Configuration Files" on page 4-3 if you do not have
this file.
The network configuration consists of these procedures:
Copying the Configuration Files to Oracle Big Data Appliance
Starting the Network Configuration
Connecting to the Administrative Network
Completing the Network Configuration
Checking the Virtual Interface Cards (VNICs)
Verifying Access to the Network Services
Copying the Configuration Files to Oracle Big Data Appliance

To copy the configuration files to Oracle Big Data Appliance:
1. Copy the configuration files to a USB flash drive.
2. Use a laptop or the KVM switch to open a console session to the first server. The
first server is the lowest server in the rack. See Figure D1.
3. Log in as the root user on the first server. The initial password is welcome1.
4. Plug the USB drive into the USB port of the first server. The port is on the right
front of the server. Information like the following is displayed on the console:
# scsi 0:0:0:0: Direct-Access CBM USB 2.0
Q: 0 ANSI:2
sd 0:0:0:0: Attached scsi generic sg14 type 0
sd 0:0:0:0: [sdn] 7954432 512-byte logical blocks: (4.07 GB/3.79 GiB)
sd 0:0:0:0: [sdn] Write Protect is off
sd 0:0:0:0: [sdn] Assuming drive cache: write through
sd 0:0:0:0: [sdn] Attached SCSI removable disk
5. Enter the showusb command to locate the USB drive. The command returns with
the mapped device or, if no USB drive is connected, with no output.
# showusb
/dev/sdn1
6. Create a directory on the server:

# mkdir /mnt/usb
7. Mount the device using the device name given in Step 5. The following is an
example of the command.
# mount -t vfat /dev/sdn1 /mnt/usb
8. Verify the location of the file on the USB flash drive:

# ls /mnt/usb
BdaDeploy.json
bin
boot
.
.
.
9. Copy BdaDeploy.json or BdaExpansion.json from the USB flash drive to the

/opt/oracle/bda directory on the server:
# cd /mnt/usb
# cp BdaDeploy.json /opt/oracle/bda
Note: If cluster_name-config.json is also on the drive, you can

copy it to the server for use in Chapter 10.
10. Dismount the USB flash drive and remove the device:
# umount /mnt/usb
# rmdir /mnt/usb
11. Remove the USB flash drive from the server.
Starting the Network Configuration

The networksetup-one script sets up the host names and Oracle ILOM names for all
servers and configures the administrative network and the private InfiniBand
network. The procedure varies slightly depending on whether you are configuring a
new rackeither a full rack or a starter rackor configuring one or two in-rack
expansion kits after deploying the starter rack.
To start the network configuration on a new rack:
1. Log in as the root user on the first server. The initial password is welcome1. For
example:
# ssh root@192.168.10.1
2. For a new rack, verify that /opt/oracle/bda contains the new BdaDeploy.json file.
For one or two in-rack expansion kits, verify that /opt/oracle/bda contains both
BdaDeploy.json from an existing node and the new BdaExpansion.json file.
3. Verify that the InfiniBand network is healthy:

# bdacheckib -s
LINK bdasw-ib1.0B ... bdasw-ib3.8B UP

LINK bdasw-ib1.1B ... bdasw-ib2.8B UP
LINK bdasw-ib3.15A ... bda2.HCA-1.2 UP
LINK bdasw-ib3.15B ... bda1.HCA-1.2 UP
LINK bdasw-ib3.14B ... bda3.HCA-1.2 UP
.
.
.
The InfiniBand network is used extensively during software installation. To

perform more in-depth checks of the fabric, run the iblinkinfo utility.
4. Remove passwordless SSH. See "remove-root-ssh" on page 13-39.
5. Reconnect to the server using its ILOM instead of SSH:
# ssh root@192.168.1.101
Password: welcome1
-> start -f /HOST/console
bda1 login:
User: root
Password: welcome1
The networksetup-one script restarts the network services, so you do not see all of
the output using an ssh connection.
6. Begin the network configuration:
# cd /opt/oracle/bda/network
# ./networksetup-one
Example 71 shows sample output from the networksetup-one script.
Example 71 Sample Output from networksetup-one

networksetup-one: check syntax and static semantics of
/opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json
networksetup-one: passed
networksetup-one: ping servers on ship admin network
networksetup-one: test ssh to servers on ship admin network
hello from node02
hello from node03
.
.
.
networksetup-one: copy /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json to servers
BdaDeploy.json 0% 0 0.0KB/s --:-- ETABdaDeploy.json 100% 4304 4.2KB/s 00:00
BdaDeploy.json 0% 0 0.0KB/s --:-- ETABdaDeploy.json 100% 4304 4.2KB/s 00:00
.
.
.
networksetup-one: executing network settings on all servers
networksetup-one: wait a few seconds for the network to restart on 192.168.1.2
.
.
.
bda1node02.example.com BdaUserConfigNetwork: reset network
.
.
.
networksetup-one: deploying this server
networksetup-one: network will restart momentarily, pardon our dust
networksetup-one: generate dcli bda host file lists
networksetup-one: ping server ips on admin network
networksetup-one: test ssh server ips on admin network
hello from bda1node02.example.com
.
.
.
Connecting to the Administrative Network

Before completing the network configuration, you must connect Oracle Big Data
Applianceto the 1 GbE administrative (management) network.
To connect Oracle Big Data Appliance to the administrative network:
1. Connect port 48 of the Cisco Ethernet switch to the administrative network.
2. To use the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports for a fiber uplink in port 48
(optional), reconfigure the port:
bda1sw-ip(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/48

bda1sw-ip(config-if)# media-type sfp
bda1sw-ip(config-if)# end
bda1sw-ip#
bda1sw-ip# copy running-config startup-config
See Also: For SFP port configuration details, the Cisco Catalyst 4948
Install Guide at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst4900/49
48/05modcfg.html
Connecting to the Client Network

You must also connect Oracle Big Data Appliance to the 10 GbE client network.
To connect Oracle Big Data Appliance to the client network:
1. Connect the two Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway leaf switches to the data
center.

2. After the cables are routed, the network administrator may need to alter the
network switch end configuration to recognize the links.
3. Use SSH to connect to a Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switch, and log in
as the ilom-admin user.
5. Ensure that the Bridge entries have active links from the leaf switches to the
customer network switch:
FabMan@bda1sw-iba-> listlinkup
This output shows four ports connected to each switch:

Connector 0A-ETH Present
Bridge-0 Port 0A-ETH-1 (Bridge-0-2) up (Enabled)
Bridge-0 Port 0A-ETH-2 (Bridge-0-2) down (Enabled)
Connector 1A-ETH Present
6. Repeat Steps 3 to 5 on the second gateway switch (-ib3).
Completing the Network Configuration

The networksetup-two script completes some steps started by networksetup-one that
require a network connection. It also configures the default VLAN and all required
VNICs for the 10 GbE client network. It then verifies all network connections and
displays a message if it discovers any unexpected ones, including those caused by
cabling mistakes.
The 10 GbE ports of the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switches must be
connected to the data center.
To complete the network configuration:
1. Ensure that both the administrative network and the client network are connected
to Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Note: This procedure fails if the networks are not connected. See
"Connecting to the Administrative Network" on page 7-26.
2. Run the following script to complete the network setup:

./networksetup-two | tee /tmp/network-conf.out
The previous command captures the output in a file named

/tmp/network-conf.out.
Example 72 shows sample output from the script.
Example 72 Sample Output from networksetup-two

# ./networksetup-two
networksetup-two: check syntax and static semantics of

networksetup-two: passed
networksetup-two: ping server ips on admin network
networksetup-two: test ssh server ips on admin network
.
.
.
networksetup-two: run connected network post script on each server
networksetup-two: post network setup for 10.133.42.253
.
.
.
networksetup-two: post network setup for this node
networksetup-two: ping admin servers by name on admin network
networksetup-two: verify infiniband topology
networksetup-two: start setup client network (10gigE over Infiniband)
networksetup-two: ping both gtw leaf switches
networksetup-two: verify existence of gateway ports
networksetup-two: ping server ips on admin network
networksetup-two: ping servers by name on admin network
networksetup-two: test ssh server ips on admin network
.
.
.
networksetup-two: check existence of default vlan for port 0A-ETH-1 on bda1sw-ib2
networksetup-two: no default vlan for port, create it
spawn ssh root@10.133.43.36 createvlan 0A-ETH-1 -vlan -1 -pkey default
networksetup-two: verify default vlan for port 0A-ETH-1 for bda1sw-ib2
.
.
.
networksetup-two: apply eoib on each server
networksetup-two: wait a few seconds for the network to restart on 10.133.42.253
networksetup-two: wait a few seconds for the network to restart on 10.133.42.254
.
.
.
check and delete vNIC for bda1node02 eth9 on switch bda1sw-ib2
create vNIC eth9 bda1node02 using switch bda1sw-ib3
vNIC created

.
.
.
networksetup-two: ping server ips on client network
networksetup-two: test ssh server ips on client network
.
.
.
networksetup-two: end setup client network
Checking the Virtual Interface Cards (VNICs)

Verify that the VNICs were created correctly on both gateway switches.
To check the VNICs:
1. Use SSH to connect to a Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switch, and log in
as the ilom-admin user.
3. Verify that the active ports are assigned to the default VLAN (0):
FabMan@bda1sw-ib2-> showvlan
Connector/LAG VLN PKEY
------------- --- ----
0A-ETH-1 0 ffff
0A-ETH-3 0 ffff
1A-ETH-1 0 ffff
1A-ETH-3 0 ffff
4. Verify that the VNICs were created round-robin on each server and 10 GbE
interface:
FabMan@hostname-> showvnics
ID STATE FLG IOA_GUID NODE
IID MAC VLN PKEY GW
--- -------- --- ----------------------- --------------------------------
---- ----------------- --- ---- --------
561 UP N 0021280001CF4C23 bda1node12 BDA 192.168.41.31 0000
CE:4C:23:85:2B:0A NO ffff 0A-ETH-1
.
.
.
5. Ensure that you can ping in to and out from the 10 GB interfaces.
Verifying Access to the Network Services

Ensure that all network services are running correctly.
To verify access to the network services:
1. Verify that the dcli command is working:
# dcli "hostname ; date"
2. If you are prompted for a password, then enter Ctrl+c several times. Otherwise,
generate new SSH keys with the setup-root-ssh utility. See "setup-root-ssh" on
page 13-42.
3. Use the output from the date command to check that the servers are synchronized
within a few seconds. If they are not, then restart each device. Time differences can
cause the software installation to fail.
You can also check the NTP clients:
# ntpq -p
4. Verify network connectivity:

# bdachecknet | tee -a /tmp/bdachecknet_exp.out
bdachecknet: check syntax and static semantics of
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: ping test private infiniband ips (bondib0 40gbs)
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: ping test admin ips (eth0 1gbs)
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: ping test client access ips (bondeth0 10gbs Eoib)
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test admin network resolve and reverse resolve
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test admin name array matches ip array
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test client network (eoib) resolve and reverse resolve
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test client name array matches ip array
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test ntp servers
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test arp -a
bdachecknet: passed
5. If the network is not able to resolve both DNS names and IP addresses, then
correct the /etc/resolv.conf files. Otherwise, the software installation will fail.
6. Check the accessibility of the PDUs by entering the IP address or host name as the
address in a browser.
If the connection is successful, you see the Current Measurement page.

The general process when installing multiple racks is to configure the individual racks,
cable the racks together, and validate the multirack network.
Configuring and Cabling Multiple Racks

Complete one of the following procedures. They differ depending on whether you are
setting up a new installation or adding racks to an operational installation, and
whether there are other engineered systems, such as Oracle Exadata Database
Machine.
To install multiple racks:
1. Complete the configuration steps for each rack individually:


2. Cable the Oracle Big Data Appliance racks together. See Chapter 9.
3. Revalidate the InfiniBand network. See "Validating a Multirack InfiniBand
Network" on page 7-32.
To add one or more racks to an operational Oracle Big Data Appliance rack:
1. Complete the configuration steps for each new Oracle Big Data Appliance rack
individually:
2. Unplug the power to the InfiniBand switches on the new racks.
4. Plug in power to the InfiniBand switches. Wait five minutes between switches
while the subnet manager fabric is updated.
To connect Oracle Big Data Appliance racks to a new Oracle Exadata Database Ma-
chine or Oracle Exalogic Elastic Cloud Machine rack:
1. Complete the configuration steps for each Oracle Big Data Appliance rack
individually:
To add one or more racks to an operational Oracle Exadata Database Machine or Ora-
cle Exalogic Elastic Cloud Machine rack:
1. Complete the configuration steps for each new Oracle Big Data Appliance rack
individually:
2. Unplug the power to the InfiniBand switches on the new racks.
3. Cable the Oracle Big Data Appliance, Oracle Exadata Database Machine, or Oracle
Exalogic Elastic Cloud Machine racks together. See Chapter 9.
4. Plug in power to the InfiniBand switches. Wait five minutes between switches
while the subnet manager fabric is updated.
5. Ensure that the subnet manager only runs on the switches with the highest
firmware versions:
For example, if Oracle Big Data Appliance has the highest firmware version, then
make its spine switch the master and its gateway switches the failover. On the
racks that have lower firmware versions than the Oracle Big Data Appliance
InfiniBand switches (both spine and gateway), disable the subnet manager.
a. Log into the Exadata master switch as root.
b. Verify that the Oracle Big Data Appliance switches are visible:
# ibswitches
c. Disable the subnet manager on Oracle Exadata Database Machine:

# disablesm
d. Log in to each additional lower-version InfiniBand switch and verify that the
master switch changes to the Oracle Big Data Appliance spine switch:
# getmaster
e. Disable subnet manager on each lower-version InfiniBand switch:

# disablesm

Validating a Multirack InfiniBand Network

After cabling the racks together, verify that the InfiniBand network is operating
correctly.
Note: The bdacheckib utility validates connections among Oracle Big

Data Appliance and Oracle Exadata Database Machine racks. It does
not check other types of racks, such as Oracle Exalogic Elastic Cloud
Machine.

To validate the InfiniBand network:

1. Generate a topology file for the network:
# bdacheckib -g
The name of the generated file is sample-multi-rack.json

2. Open sample-multi-rack.json in a text editor.
3. Reorder the elements to start with the rack at the left and end with the rack on the
right. Save the file.
4. Validate the configuration:
# bdacheckib sample-multi-rack.json
Verifing rack #1
leaf: bda1sw-ib2
LINK ... to rack2 UP
leaf: bda1sw-ib3
.
.
.
Example 73 shows a sample configuration file.
Example 73 Multirack Configuration File sample-multi-rack.json

# cat sample-multi-rack.json
# This json multirack spec is generated. The array elements are sorted
# alphabetically. A proper arranged json spec representing racks from left to
right
# can be used as input mr.json to bdacheckib (bdacheckib mr.json)
# Commas separating rack elements are optional.
[{"SPINE_NAME": "bda1sw-ib1", "LEAF1_NAME": "bda1sw-ib2", "LEAF2_NAME":
"bda1sw-ib3"}
{"SPINE_NAME": "bda2sw-ib1", "LEAF1_NAME": "bda2sw-ib2", "LEAF2_NAME":
"bda2sw-ib3"}
{"SPINE_NAME": "exa1sw-ib1", "LEAF1_NAME": "exa1sw-ib2", "LEAF2_NAME":
"exa01sw-ib3"}]

8
Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance
8
In-Rack Expansion Kit
You can install and configure up to two in-rack expansion kits in an Oracle Big Data
Appliance starter rack. This chapter explains how to configure the hardware provided
in an expansion kit.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
About Expanding an Oracle Big Data Appliance Starter Rack
Installing the Servers in the Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack
Setting Up the Network
Installing Oracle Big Data Appliance Software on the New Servers
Note: Oracle recommends that an Oracle field engineer performs the

procedures described in this chapter.
About Expanding an Oracle Big Data Appliance Starter Rack

An Oracle Big Data Appliance starter rack has the same hardware configuration as a
full rack, except that it comes with six servers instead of 18. All switches and power
supplies are included in the starter rack, and do not need to be upgraded or
supplemented to support additional servers.
An in-rack expansion kit provides six more servers and the components needed to
install them. You can install one expansion kit to form a 12-server rack, or two
expansion kits to form a full, 18-server rack.
If you install the second in-rack expansion kit at a later time, then you must repeat the
instructions provided in this chapter. Otherwise, you can install and configure all 12
new servers together.
Checking the Contents of the In-Rack Expansion Kit

Before starting the installation, ensure that you received all components, cables, and
accessories, as shown in the following tables.
Table 81 lists the components and accessories.
Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance In-Rack Expansion Kit 8-1

Table 81 In-Rack Expansion Kit Components and Accessories

Part Number Quantity Description
7078043 or 7067086 6 Sun Server X4-2L or Sun Server X3-2L
350-1719 12 2U snap-in slide rail kit
7042273 6 1U-2U slim-rail CMA kit
250-2020 1 Velcro 25-foot roll
7071129 1 Cable labeling kit
1 Server documentation and license packages
Table 82 lists the cables.
Table 82 In-Rack Expansion Kit Cables

530-4433 10 feet 6 Red Ethernet Cat 5 or Cat 5e
530-4435 10 feet 6 Ethernet Black Cat 5 or Cat 5e
7019244 3 meters 12 InfiniBand QSFP
180-2380 2 meters 12 Power
Checking the Status of the Starter Rack

Ensure that the starter rack is in good working order before you install the in-rack
expansion kit:
Check the LEDs on all components to verify a normal operating state. Resolve any
issues before proceeding.
Verify that the Sun Rack II PDU firmware is at or above the minimum version of
1.06. See "Updating the PDU Firmware Version" on page 7-19.

The following instructions describe how to physically install the new servers in the
starter rack.
Caution: Two people are needed to install the servers in the rack.
To install the servers in the rack:

1. Unpack all power cables, Ethernet cables, and InfiniBand cables, and mark them
with the labels provided in the kit:
Mark each end of a cable with the appropriate label. Take care to put the
"from" and "to" labels on the correct end.
Select the appropriate PDU power cord labels for your installation, either
single-phase or three-phase.
2. Plug in the cables at both ends. Refer to the cabling tables in Appendix C.
3. Install the server rack mount kits in the rack. Start at the first empty unit at the
bottom and work up toward the top of the rack.

4. Install the servers in the rack rails. After installing each server, ensure that both it
and the unit below it can slide in and out normally.
5. Install the cable arms and cables into each server, starting with the first new server
at the bottom (server 7 or 13) and working up to the top unit. Ensure that all
InfiniBand cables are plugged in to the correct ports on both ends. Keep the power
cables out of the way while you route the InfiniBand and Ethernet cables.
Caution: Do not plug the power cables into the PDU strips until you
are ready to turn on the PDU and configure it. Plug the power cables
only into the servers now.

After installing the new servers in the rack, you can configure them.
To configure the new servers:
1. Disconnect the Cisco switch uplink cable (port 48) from the network, in case the
factory IP addresses duplicate those on the local network.
2. Plug the power cords into the appropriate outlets. Route the cables to PDU-A last.
When you are done, Oracle ILOM starts, the service processor LED is solid green,
and the system is in Standby mode with a flashing OK LED.
3. Press the power button on the servers to turn them on. The system automatically
detects the factory IP addresses. See "Factory Network Settings" on page 3-6.
4. Using a laptop connected to the first new server (server 7 or 13), log in as root
using SSH. The default password is welcome1.
5. Set up passwordless SSH for the root user. For range, enter [7:12] when you install
the first expansion kit, [13-18] for the second expansion kit, or [7:18] for both kits.
# setup-root-ssh -j "eth0_ips[range]" -p welcome1
See "setup-root-ssh" on page 13-42.

6. Confirm that passwordless SSH works properly across the range of new servers.
Use the same value for range as you did in step 5.
# dcli -j "eth0_ips[range]" "hostname; date"
7. Compare the output of the following command with the system serial number
(S/N) sticker on the front of each system. Verify the order of each server
assignment, where the range for the first expansion kit is 7 to 12, and for the
second expansion kit is 13 to 18.
# dcli -j "eth0_ips[7:12]" "dmidecode -s chassis-serial-number"
192.168.1.7: 1143FMM064
.
.
.
192.168.1.12: 1144FMM1A0
If you find inconsistencies, then verify that the InfiniBand cables are plugged into
the correct ports on the gateway switches for each node.
8. Set the rack master serial number in the ILOM to the S/N on the front left rack
sticker (also displayed on the rear of the rack near PDU-A):
# dcli -j "eth0_ips[range]" "ipmitool sunoem cli 'set /SP \system_

identifier="\"Oracle Big Data Appliance rack-master-serial-number\""'"
This example sets the range to [7:12] for the first expansion kit, and sets the serial
number to AK00086253:
# dcli -j "eth0_ips[7:12]" "ipmitool sunoem cli 'set /SP \system_
identifier="\"Oracle Big Data Appliance AK00086253\""'"
The system identifier has a 40-character limit.

9. Verify that the rack master serial number is set correctly. This example uses the
range for the first expansion rack:
# dcli -j "eth0_ips[7:12]" "ipmitool sunoem cli 'show /SP system_identifier'" |
grep =
.
.
.
10. Complete the physical hardware checks beginning with Step 10 in "Configuring
the Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers" on page 7-19. In all dcli commands, be
sure to enter the range, using the eth0_ips[range] syntax shown previously.

The following topics explain how to add the new servers to the Ethernet
administrative network:
Copying the Configuration Files
Verifying the Network Configuration
See Also: "Configuring the Network" on page 7-23
Copying the Configuration Files

These instructions use a serial connection to Oracle ILOM. If you use an SSH
connection instead, then you lose the console connection when the IP addresses
change from the factory settings to the custom settings in "Configuring the Network"
on page 8-5.
Follow these steps to copy the configuration files to the first new server in the rack.
To copy the configuration files:
1. Plug your laptop into the Oracle ILOM "SER MGT" port of the first new server (7
or 13).
2. Log in as root with the default welcome1 password:
login as: root
Using keyboard-interactive authentication.
Password: welcome1
Oracle(R) Integrated Lights Out Manager
Version 3.1.2.12 r74388
Copyright (c) 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
->

3. Open the console and log in with the same credentials:

-> start /SP/console
Are you sure you want to start /SP/console (y/n)? y
Serial console started. To stop, type ESC (
bda7 login:
User: root
Password: welcome1
#
4. If you do not see a prompt, press Enter.

5. Copy the original Oracle Big Data Appliance configuration file from the first
server in the rack (server 1) to the new server where you are logged in. Replace IP_
address with the real IP address of server 1:
# scp root@IP_address:/opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json /opt/oracle/bda
Alternatively, use a USB flash drive to copy the file between servers.
6. Copy the new BdaExpansion.json configuration file from a USB flash drive to the
same /opt/oracle/dba directory:
# mkdir /mnt/usb
# /opt/oracle/bda/bin/showusb /dev/sdm1
# mount /dev/sdm1 /mnt/usb
# cp /mnt/usb/BdaExpansion.json /opt/oracle/bda
See "Copying the Configuration Files to Oracle Big Data Appliance" on page 7-23
for general instructions on using a flash drive.

Complete the following procedure to configure the network.
1. Run the networksetup-one script:
# cd network
After this step completes, the servers have their custom IP addresses.
2. Reconnect the Cisco switch uplink cable to the local network.
3. If you lost your SSH connection when the IP addresses changed, then reconnect:
a. Use SSH to connect to Oracle ILOM of the first server, using the custom IP
address.
b. Log in as the root user with the default welcome1 password.
If you use a serial connection, you may still be connected when networksetup-one
completes. If not, type Esc+( to get the Oracle ILOM prompt before reconnecting.
4. Verify the InfiniBand topology:
# bdacheckib BdaDeploy.json
5. Verify that passwordless SSH still works:

# dcli -j "eth0_ips[7:12]" "hostname ; date"

If you are prompted for a password, type Ctrl+c several times. If the dcli
command fails, then repeat Steps 5 and 6 of the first procedure to configure the
servers.
6. Use the output from the date utility in Step 5 to verify that the clocks for all
servers and switches are synchronized. The times should be within a few seconds.
If they are not synchronized, then you can manually change the time, restart the
device, or check the routing through the Cisco switch to the NTP server. Issue this
command to check the status of an NTP client:
# ntpq -p
7. Run networksetup-two:
# ./networksetup-two | tee /tmp/bdanet_exp.out
The tee utility captures the output in a file while still allowing it to appear on your
screen.
8. Log out of the server, unless it is the first server in the cluster.
Verifying the Network Configuration

Complete the following procedure to ensure that the network is working properly
1. Log in to the first server in the cluster.
2. Verify that the network and all network services are working properly:
# bdachecknet | tee -a /tmp/bdanet_exp.out
bdachecknet: check syntax and static semantics of opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: passed
.
.
.
3. If the systems are not able to resolve and use the DNS names, then manually
correct the /etc/resolv.conf files and verify the reverse lookup.
4. Submit an install base update service request in My Oracle Support to update your
assets.

You can add the new servers to an existing cluster, or configure them as a new cluster.
To add the servers to an existing cluster:
Complete the instructions in "Adding Servers to a Cluster" on page 10-7.
To configure the servers as a separate cluster:
1. Run Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility, and generate the
configuration files. See "Generating the Configuration Files" on page 4-3.
2. Run the Mammoth utility to install the software. See "Installing the Software on a
New Rack" on page 10-5.

9
Connecting Multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance
9
Racks
This chapter describes how to combine multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance racks into
one large cluster. It contains the following sections:
Extending a Rack by Adding Another Rack
Prerequisites for Multirack Cabling
Cabling Two Racks Together
Cabling Several Racks Together
See Also: Appendix E, "Multirack Cabling Tables"
Extending a Rack by Adding Another Rack

When creating a multirack Hadoop cluster or providing access to Oracle Big Data
Appliance from an Oracle Exadata Database Machine, you must connect multiple
racks to each other. Racks can be cabled together with no downtime.
During the cabling procedure, note the following:
There is some performance degradation while you are cabling the racks together.
This degradation results from reduced network bandwidth, and the data
retransmission due to packet loss when a cable is unplugged.
The environment is not a high-availability environment because one leaf switch
must be off. All traffic goes through the remaining leaf switch.
Only the existing rack is operational, and any new rack is powered down.
The software running on the systems must not have problems related to
InfiniBand restarts.
The new racks must be configured with the appropriate IP addresses to be
migrated into the expanded system before any cabling, and duplicate IP addresses
are not allowed.
The existing spine switch is set to priority 10 during the cabling procedure. This
setting gives the spine switch a higher priority than any other switch in the
network fabric. The spine switch is first to take the Subnet Manager Master role
whenever a new Subnet Manager Master is set during the cabling procedure.
Connecting Multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance Racks 9-1

See Also:
Appendix E, "Multirack Cabling Tables" for the physical
connections among the racks
Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 Administration Guide for
monitoring the Subnet Manager at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26698_
01/html/E26434/z40001039112.html#scrolltoc

Verify that all Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switches on all connected
Oracle Big Data Appliance and Oracle Exadata Database Machine racks are running
firmware version 2.1.3-4 NM2 or later. Update the firmware as necessary.
When updating the firmware of Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switches from
v2.0.x to v2.1.x or higher, be careful to update them in descending order of the
gateway instance numbers. Start with the switch with the highest gateway instance
number.
From the Oracle ILOM interface, use this hardware command to obtain the gateway
instance number:
setgwinstance --list
See My Oracle Support Doc ID 1534255.1 about upgrading the firmware for Oracle Big
Data Appliance.
Cabling Two Racks Together

The following procedure describes how to cable two racks together. This procedure
assumes that the racks are adjacent to each other. In the procedure, the existing rack is
R1, and the new rack is R2.
To cable two racks together:
1. Set the priority of the current, active Subnet Manager Master to 10 on the spine
switch, as follows:
a. Log in to any InfiniBand switch on the active system.
b. Use the getmaster command to verify that the Subnet Manager Master is
running on the spine switch.
c. Log in to the spine switch.
d. Use the disablesm command to stop the Subnet Manager.
e. Use the setsmpriority 10 command to set the priority to 10.
f. Use the enablesm command to restart the Subnet Manager.
g. Repeat Step b to ensure that the Subnet Manager Master is running on the
spine switch.
2. Ensure that the new rack is near the existing rack. The InfiniBand cables must be
able to reach the servers in each rack.
3. Completely shut down the new rack (R2).
4. Cable the leaf switch in the new rack according to Table E2.

5. Power off leaf switch R1 IB2. This causes all servers to fail over their InfiniBand
traffic to R1 IB3.
6. Disconnect all interswitch links between R1 IB2 and R1 IB3.
7. Cable leaf switch R1 IB2 according to Table E1.
8. Power on leaf switch R1 IB2.
9. Wait for 3 minutes for R1 IB2 to become completely operational.
To check the switch, log in to it and run the ibswitches command. The output
should show three switches: R1 IB1, R1 IB2, and R1 IB3.
10. Power off leaf switch R1 IB3. This causes all servers to fail over their InfiniBand
traffic to R1 IB2.
11. Cable leaf switch R1 IB3 according to Table E1.
12. Power on leaf switch R1 IB3.
13. Wait for 3 minutes for R1 IB3 to become completely operational.

should show three switches: R1 IB1, R1 IB2, and R1 IB3.
14. Power on all the InfiniBand switches in R2.
15. Wait for 3 minutes for the switches to become completely operational.
should show six switches: R1 IB1, R1 IB2, R1 IB3, R2 IB1, R2 IB2, and R2 IB3.
16. Ensure that the Subnet Manager Master is running on R1 IB1 by running the
getmaster command from any switch.
17. Power on all servers in R2.
18. Log in to spine switch R1 IB1, and lower its priority to 8 as follows:
a. Use the disablesm command to stop the Subnet Manager.

b. Use the setsmpriority 8 command to set the priority to 8.
c. Use the enablesm command to restart the Subnet Manager.
19. Ensure that the Subnet Manager Master is running on one of the spine switches.
After cabling the racks together, proceed to configure the racks.

The following procedure describes how to cable several racks together. This procedure
assumes that the racks are adjacent to each other. In the procedure, the existing racks
are R1, R2,... Rn, the new rack is Rn+1, and the Subnet Manager Master is running on
R1 IB1.
You can cable up to 18 racks together without additional switches.
To cable several racks together:
1. Set the priority of the current, active Subnet Manager Master to 10 on the spine
switch, as follows:
a. Log in to any InfiniBand switch on the active system.
b. Use the getmaster command to verify that the Subnet Manager Master is
running on the spine switch.

c. Log in to the spine switch.

d. Use the disablesm command to stop the Subnet Manager.
e. Use the setsmpriority 10 command to set the priority to 10.
f. Use the enablesm command to restart the Subnet Manager.
g. Repeat Step b to ensure that the Subnet Manager Master is running on the
spine switch.
2. Ensure that the new rack is near the existing rack. The InfiniBand cables must be
able to reach the servers in each rack.
3. Completely shut down the new rack (Rn+1).
4. Cable the leaf switch in the new rack according to the appropriate table in
Appendix E. For example, if rack Rn+1 was R4, then use Table E9.
5. Complete the following procedure for each of the original racks. In these steps, Rx
represents a rack number from R1 to Rn.
a. Power off leaf switch Rx IB2. This causes all servers to fail over their
InfiniBand traffic to Rx IB3.
b. Cable leaf switch Rx IB2 according to Appendix E.
c. Power on leaf switch Rx IB2.
d. Wait for 3 minutes for Rx IB2 to become completely operational.
To check the switch, log in it and run the ibswitches command. The output
should show n*3 switches for IB1, IB2, and IB3 in racks R1, R2,... Rn.
e. Power off leaf switch Rx IB3. This causes all servers to fail over their
InfiniBand traffic to Rx IB2.
f. Cable leaf switch Rx IB3 according to Appendix E.
g. Power on leaf switch Rx IB3.
h. Wait for 3 minutes for Rx IB3 to become completely operational.
To check the switch, log in to the switch and enter the ibswitches command.
The output should show n*3 switches for IB1, IB2, and IB3 in racks R1, R2,...
Rn.
All racks should now be rewired according to Appendix E.
6. Power on all the InfiniBand switches in Rn+1.
7. Wait for 3 minutes for the switches to become completely operational.
To check the switch, log in to the switch and run the ibswitches command. The
output should show (n+1)*3 switches for IB1, IB2, and IB3 in racks R1, R2,... Rn+1.
8. Ensure that the Subnet Manager Master is running on R1 IB1 by entering the
getmaster command from any switch.
9. Power on all servers in Rn+1.
10. Log in to spine switch R1 IB1, and lower its priority to 8 as follows:
a. Enter the disablesm command to stop the Subnet Manager.

b. Enter the setsmpriority 8 command to set the priority to 8.
c. Enter the enablesm command to restart the Subnet Manager.

11. Ensure that the Subnet Manager Master is running on one of the spine switches by
entering the getmaster command from any switch.
12. Ensure that the Subnet Manager is running on every spine switch by entering the
following command from any switch:
ibdiagnet -r
Each spine switch should show as running in the Summary Fabric SM-state-priority
section of the output. If a spine switch is not running, then log in to the switch and
enable the Subnet Manager by entering the enablesm command.
13. If there are now four or more racks, then log in to the leaf switches in each rack
and disable the Subnet Manager by entering the disablesm command.


Part III
Part III Software Installation and Configuration
An Oracle service representative typically configures the network configuration, and

installs and configures the software.
Part III contains the following chapter:
Chapter 10, "Installing the Oracle Big Data Appliance Software"
10
Installing the Oracle Big Data Appliance
10
Software
This chapter explains how to install, reinstall, and reconfigure the software on Oracle
Big Data Appliance. It contains these sections:
About the Mammoth Utility
Installation Prerequisites
Downloading the Mammoth Software Deployment Bundle
Installing the Software on a New Rack
Adding Servers to a Cluster
What If an Error Occurs During the Installation?
Upgrading the Software on Oracle Big Data Appliance
Changing the Configuration of Optional Software
Reinstalling the Base Image
Installing a One-Off Patch
Mammoth Software Installation and Configuration Utility
Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility Syntax
Oracle Big Data Appliance Base Imaging Utilities
Note: If you did not enter the required passwords in the Oracle Big
Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility, then you are
prompted to enter them during the software installation. Ensure that
you know the current passwords for the operating system root and
oracle users, the Cloudera Manager admin user, and the MySQL
administrator. If you are installing or reinstalling Oracle Big Data
Connectors, then you also need the MySQL password for Oracle Data
Integrator.
About the Mammoth Utility

Mammoth is a command-line utility for installing and configuring the Oracle Big Data
Appliance software. Using Mammoth, you can:
Set up a cluster for either CDH or Oracle NoSQL Database.
Create a cluster on one or more racks.
Installing the Oracle Big Data Appliance Software 10-1

Create multiple clusters on an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack.

Extend a cluster to new servers on the same rack or a new rack.
Update a cluster with new software.
The Oracle Audit Vault, Auto Service Request, and Oracle Enterprise Manager options
require software on a remote server on the same network as Oracle Big Data
Appliance. Those installations must be complete before you run Mammoth, or it will
fail.
Similarly, you must complete several steps for Kerberos if the key distribution center
(KDC) is installed on a remote server. There are no preliminary steps if you install the
KDC on Oracle Big Data Appliance.
The following list describes the prerequisites for all installation options.
Audit Vault Requirements:
Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall Server Release 12.1.1 or later must be up
and running on a separate server on the same network as Oracle Big Data
Appliance
Auto Service Request Requirements:
Your My Oracle Support account is set up.
ASR Manager is up and running.
Enterprise Manager Requirements:
Oracle Management System (OMS) version 12.1.0.4.0 or higher is up and running.
The OMS agent pull URL is working.
The OMS emcli download URL is working.
Both the HTTPS upload port and the console port are open.
Note: Double-check the OMS credentials and ensure that you enter
them correctly when running Mammoth. Invalid credentials are the
primary cause of failure in the Enterprise Manager discovery process.
Kerberos Requirements for a Remote KDC:

1. Add cloudera-scm/admin as a user to the KDC database by running the following
command from kadmin:
addprinc -randkey cloudera-scm/admin@<REALM NAME>
2. Grant cloudera-scm/admin all permissions to the Kerberos database. It must be

able to add, modify, remove, and list principals from the database.
3. Create the cmf.keytab file by running the following command from kadmin:
xst -k cmf.keytab cloudera-scm/admin@<REALM NAME>
4. Move cmf.keytab to/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth.

5. To support Oozie and Hue, ensure that the remote KDC supports renewable
tickets. If it does not, then follow these steps:

a. Open kdc.conf and set values for max_life and max_renewable_life. The
max_life parameter defines the time period when the ticket is valid, and the
max_renewable_life parameter defines the time period when users can renew
a ticket.
b. Set maxrenewlife for the krbtgt principal. Use the following kadmin
command, replacing duration with the time period and REALM NAME with
the name of the realm:
modprinc -maxrenewlife duration krbtgt/REALM NAME
If the KDC does not support renewable tickets when Kerberos is configured, then
Oozie and Hue might not work correctly.
Sentry Requirements
1. Create a Sentry policy file named sentry-provider.ini.
2. Copy the file to /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth on the first node in the cluster.
See Also: For information about creating a policy file, "Configuring

Sentry" in the CDH5 Security Guide at
http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-do
cs/CDH5/latest/CDH5-Security-Guide/cdh5sg_
sentry.html?scroll=concept_mm2_21p_wk_unique_1

The Mammoth bundle contains the installation files and the base image. Before you
install the software, you must use Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration
Generation Utility to generate the configuration files, as described in "Generating the
Configuration Files" on page 4-3.
You use the same bundle for all procedures described in this chapter, regardless of rack
size, and whether you are creating CDH or Oracle NoSQL Database clusters, or
upgrading existing clusters.
To download the Mammoth bundle:
1. Locate the download site in either My Oracle Support or Automated Release
Updates (ARU):
My Oracle Support
a. Go to My Oracle Support Doc ID 1445745.
b. Display the Install and Configure page.
c. Click the appropriate link under Latest Oracle Big Data Software Installation
Documents.
ARU
a. Connect to ARU.
b. On the Patches page, set Product to Big Data Appliance Integrated Software
and Release to the appropriate release number.
c. Click Search.
2. Download the BDAMammoth ZIP files to any directory (such as /tmp) in the first
node of the cluster. Depending on the configuration of the rack, this node can be

the first, seventh, or thirteenth server from the bottom of the rack. For multirack
clusters, this server is in the primary rack.
The patch consists of two files:
ppatch_version_Linux-x86-64_1of2.zip contains the Mammoth installation
files.
ppatch_version_Linux-x86-64_2of2.zip contains the base image.
3. Log in to the first node of the cluster as root.
4. Extract all files from the downloaded zip files. For example:
$ unzip p12345678_400_Linux-x86-64_1of2.zip
Archive: p12345678_400_Linux-x86-64_1of2.zip
inflating: README.txt
creating: BDAMammoth-ol6-4.0.0/
inflating: BDAMammoth-ol6-4.0.0/BDAMammoth-ol6-4.0.0.run
creating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/biosconfig
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/makebdaimage
extracting: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_
RELEASE.md5sum
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/reimagerack
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE.iso
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/reimagecluster
creating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/
creating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/RCU/
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_
RELEASE/Extras/RCU/rcuintegration-11.1.1.7.0-1.x86_64.rpm
creating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/ODI/
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/ODI/odi_generic.jar
creating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/NOSQL/
RELEASE/Extras/NOSQL/kv-ee-3.0.14-0.noarch.rpm
RELEASE/Extras/NOSQL/kv-ce-3.0.14-0.noarch.rpm
creating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/BALANCER/
RELEASE/Extras/BALANCER/orabalancer-2.2.0-h2.noarch.rpm
extracting: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_
RELEASE/Extras/BALANCER/orabalancer-2.2.0-h2.zip
creating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/CELL/
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/CELL/bd_cell-12.1.2.0.99_
LINUX.X64_140907.2307-1.x86_64.rpm
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/Extras/CELL/bd_cellofl-12.1.2.0.99_
LINUX.X64_140907.2307-1.x86_64.rpm
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/README.txt
inflating: BDABaseImage-ol6-4.0.0_RELEASE/ubiosconfig
5. Change to the BDAMammoth-version directory:

# cd BDAMammoth-ol6-4.0.0
6. Extract all files from BDAMammoth-version.run:

# ./BDAMammoth-ol6-4.0.0.run
Big Data Appliance Mammoth v4.0.0 Self-extraction

Checking for and testing BDA Base Image in /tmp
BDABaseImage-4.0.0_RELEASE.iso: OK
Removing existing temporary files
Generating /tmp/BDAMammoth.tar
Verifying MD5 sum of /tmp/BDAMammoth.tar
/tmp/BDAMammoth.tar MD5 checksum matches
Extracting /tmp/BDAMammoth.tar to /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth
Extracting Base Image RPMs to bdarepo

Moving BDABaseImage into /opt/oracle/
Removing temporary files

.
.
.
Please "cd /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth" before running "./mammoth -i <rack_name>"
#
The new version of the Mammoth software is installed in

/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth, and the previous version (if you are upgrading) is
saved in /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/previous-BDAMammoth.
7. Follow the specific instructions for the type of installation you are performing.

Mammoth installs and configures the software on Oracle Big Data Appliance using the
files generated by Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility. A
cluster can be dedicated to either CDH (Hadoop) or Oracle NoSQL Database.
For a CDH cluster, Mammoth installs and configures Cloudera's Distribution
including Apache Hadoop. This includes all the Hadoop software and Cloudera
Manager, which is the tool for administering your Hadoop cluster. If you have a
license, Mammoth optionally installs and configures all components of Oracle Big
Data Connectors.
For a NoSQL cluster, Mammoth installs Oracle NoSQL Database. CDH and Oracle
NoSQL Database do not share a cluster, beginning with Oracle Big Data Appliance 2.2.
In addition to installing the software across all servers in the rack, Mammoth creates
the required user accounts, starts the correct services, and sets the appropriate
configuration parameters. When it is done, you have a fully functional, highly tuned,
up and running Hadoop cluster.
Complete the appropriate instructions for your installation:
For an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack that forms one or more clusters, follow the
procedure in "Installing the Software" on page 10-6.
For multiple racks where each rack forms an independent cluster, follow the
procedure in "Installing the Software" on page 10-6 for each rack.
For multiple racks that form a single, multirack cluster:
Identify the primary rack of the cluster, then follow the procedure in
"Installing the Software" on page 10-6.

For the other racks of the cluster, follow the procedure in "Adding Servers to a
Cluster" on page 10-7.
Installing the Software

Follow this procedure to install and configure the software on one or more Oracle Big
Data Appliance racks. You can configure one cluster on multiple racks in a single
installation.
To install the software:
1. Verify that the Oracle Big Data Appliance rack is configured according to the
custom network settings described in /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json. If the
rack is still configured to the factory default IP addresses, first perform the
network configuration steps described in "Configuring the Network" on page 7-23.
2. Verify that the software is not installed on the rack already. If the software is
installed and you want to upgrade it, then use the mammoth -p option in Step 6.
3. Download and unzip the Mammoth bundle, as described in "Downloading the
Mammoth Software Deployment Bundle" on page 10-3. You must be logged in as
root to the first server in the cluster.
4. Change to the BDAMammoth directory.
# cd /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth
5. Copy cluster_name-config.json to the current directory. See "About the

Configuration Files" on page 4-3.
6. Run the mammoth command with the appropriate options. See "Mammoth Software
Installation and Configuration Utility" on page 10-24. This sample command runs
all steps:
./mammoth -i rack_name
After Mammoth completes Step 3 of the installation, it prompts you to restart, if it

upgraded the base image.
7. If you installed support for Auto Service Request, then complete the steps in
"Verifying the Auto Service Request Installation" on page 10-6.
8. To configure another CDH cluster on the server:
a. Copy the BDAMammoth ZIP file to any directory on the first server of the
cluster, which is either server 7 or server 13.
b. Repeat Steps 3 to 7. Each cluster has its own cluster_name-config.json file.
Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility creates the files in
separate directories named for the clusters.
Note: Mammoth stores the current configuration in the

/opt/oracle/bda/install/state directory. Do not delete the files in this
directory. Mammoth fails without this information if you must use it
again, such as adding a rack to the cluster.
Verifying the Auto Service Request Installation

1. Log in to My Oracle Support at http://support.oracle.com.

2. Search for document ID 1450112.1, ASR Exadata Configuration Check via

ASREXACHECK, and download the asrexacheck script.
Although this check was originally intended for Oracle Exadata Database
Machine, it is now supported on Oracle Big Data Appliance.
3. Copy asrexacheck to a server in the Oracle Big Data Appliance cluster.
4. Log in to the server as root.
5. Copy asrexacheck to all servers in the cluster:
# dcli -C -f asrexacheck -d /opt/oracle.SupportTools
See Chapter 14 for information about dcli.

6. Change the file access permissions:
# dcli -C chmod 755 /opt/oracle.SupportTools/asrexacheck
7. Run the script:

# dcli -C /opt/oracle.SupportTools/asrexacheck
8. File an Oracle Support Request (SR) to validate the ASR installation. Note the
following choices:
1. Under "What is the Problem?" click the Hardware tab.
2. For Products Grouped By, select Hardware License.
3. For Problem Type, select My - Auto Service Request (ASR) Installation and
Configuration Issues.
4. Include the output of asrexacheck.
9. Continue with Step 8 of the software installation procedure.

You can add servers to an existing cluster in groups of three servers. You add a full
rack the same way that you add a smaller number of servers. However, Oracle Big
Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility does not generate the configuration
file. Instead, you use Mammoth to generate the configuration file and then use it to
configure the servers.
To install the software on additional servers in a cluster:
1. Ensure that all servers are running the same software version. The additional
servers must not have an Oracle Big Data Appliance base image that is newer than
the existing cluster. See "About Software Version Differences" on page 10-8.
2. Ensure that all racks that form a single Hadoop cluster are cabled together. See
Chapter 9.
3. Connect as root to node01 of the primary rack and change to the BDAMammoth
directory:
cd /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth
Note: Always start Mammoth from the primary rack.

4. Generate a parameter file for the server group. The following example adds six
servers beginning with node13:
./mammoth -e node13 node14 node15 node16 node17 node18

The servers can be on the same rack or multiple racks. See the -e option in
"Mammoth Software Installation and Configuration Utility" on page 10-24.
After Mammoth completes Step 3 of the installation, it prompts you to restart, if it
upgraded the base image.
5. If you are using Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control to monitor Oracle Big
Data Appliance, then run rediscovery to identify the hardware and software
changes.
If you have a license for Oracle Big Data Connectors, then they are installed on all
nodes of the non-primary racks, although the services do not run on them. Oracle Data
Integrator agent still runs on node03 of the primary rack.
Mammoth obtains the current configuration from the files stored in
/opt/oracle/bda/install/state. If those files are missing or if any of the services
have been moved manually to run on other nodes, then Mammoth fails.
About Software Version Differences

All servers configured as one Hadoop cluster must have the same image. A new
Oracle Big Data Appliance rack or an in-rack expansion kit might be factory-installed
with a newer base image than the previously installed racks. Use the imageinfo utility
on any server to get the image version. When all servers of a single Hadoop cluster
have the same image version, you can install the software.
To synchronize the new servers with the rest of the Hadoop cluster, either upgrade the
existing cluster to the latest image version or downgrade the image version of the new
servers.
To upgrade the image version:
Run Mammoth with the -p option to upgrade the software on the cluster to the
latest version. See "Upgrading the Software on Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
page 10-9.
To downgrade the image version:
Reimage the new rack to the older version installed on the cluster. See My Oracle
Support Information Center ID 1445745.2.
Use the old version of the Mammoth utility, which is on the first server of the
existing cluster, to extend the cluster onto the new rack.
If you add a newer server model, then you can downgrade only to the first software
version available for that model. For example, if you add Sun Server X3-2L servers,
then you must install Oracle Big Data Appliance software version 2.3 or higher.

If the Mammoth utility fails, take these steps to resolve the problem:
1. Read the error message to see if it suggests a cause or a resolution.
2. Make the recommended changes and rerun the step.
3. If the error message does not recommend a resolution, or it does not resolve the
problem:
File a service request (SR) with My Oracle Support.
Upload the diagnostic zip file, which Mammoth generates when an error
occurs.

See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide

The procedure for upgrading the software is the same whether you are upgrading
from one major release to another or just applying a patch set. The procedure is also
the same whether your Hadoop cluster consists of one Oracle Big Data Appliance rack
or multiple racks.
The process upgrades all components of the software stack including the firmware,
Oracle Linux Unbreakable Enterprise Kernel (UEK), CDH, JDK, and Oracle Big Data
Connectors (if previously installed). Two versions of the software bundle are available,
one for Oracle Linux 5 and the other for Oracle Linux 6).
To upgrade only Oracle Big Data Connectors, and no other components of the software
stack, contact Oracle Support for assistance.
Software downgrades are not supported.
Note: Because the upgrade process automatically stops and starts

services as needed, the cluster is unavailable while the mammoth
command is executing.
About the Operating System Versions

The Oracle Big Data Appliance 2.3 and later software runs on either Oracle Linux
version 5 or version 6. When upgrading the software, you can choose whether to
upgrade the operating system also:
Retaining Oracle Linux 5: Download the Mammoth bundle for Oracle Linux 5. It
retains Oracle Linux 5, but upgrades Oracle Unbreakable Enterprise Kernel (UEK)
to version 2. It installs all of the Oracle Big Data Appliance software for this
release.
Upgrading to Oracle Linux 6: Download the Mammoth bundle for Oracle Linux 6.
To upgrade the operating system, you must first reimage the servers. Reimaging
erases all files and data, therefore Oracle does not recommend this type of upgrade
for a production system, unless you have a second cluster functioning as a backup
with the same data. After reimaging, you can install the software with Oracle
Linux 6 and UEK version 2.
Upgrading the Software

Follow these procedures to upgrade the software on an Oracle Big Data Appliance
cluster to the current version.
Prerequisites
You must know the passwords currently in effect for the cluster, which the Mammoth
utility will prompt you for:
oracle
root
Cloudera Manager admin
MySQL Database admin

MySQL Database for Oracle Data Integrator (if Oracle Data Integrator agent is
installed)
Upgrading to the Current Software Version

Take these steps to upgrade the Oracle Big Data Appliance software to the current
software version:
1. Upgrade the software to version 2.5, if your system is running an earlier version of
the Oracle Big Data Appliance software:
For Oracle Big Data Appliance 2.3.1 and later, see My Oracle Support Doc ID
1623304.1.
For Oracle Big Data Appliance 2.1 and 2.2.1, see Doc ID 1600274.1.
2. Upgrade the software to version 3.0.1, if your system is running an earlier version
of the software. You cannot upgrade directly to the current version from versions
earlier than 3.0.
3. Download and unzip the Mammoth bundle, as described in "Downloading the
Mammoth Software Deployment Bundle" on page 10-3. You must be logged in as
root to the first server in the cluster.
4. Change to the BDAMammoth directory.
5. Run the mammoth command with the -p option:

# ./mammoth -p
Mammoth automatically upgrades the base image if necessary.

6. If you are using Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control to monitor Oracle Big
Data Appliance, then run rediscovery to identify the software changes.

During the initial configuration of Oracle Big Data Appliance, the optional software
components may or may not be installed. Using the Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility,
you can reverse some of those decisions. You must provide the relevant server names,
ports, user names, and passwords. See "Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility Syntax" on
page 10-28.
This section provides examples of some reconfiguration options. It has the following
topics:
Changing Support for Oracle Big Data Connectors
Adding Support for Auto Service Request
Adding Support for Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control
Adding Support for Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall
Adding Disk Encryption
Adding Kerberos Authentication
Note: The bdacli command provides an alternative syntax for

calling mammoth-reconfig. See "bdacli" on page 13-11.

Changing Support for Oracle Big Data Connectors

You can add or remove support for Oracle Big Data Connectors:
Adding Oracle Big Data Connectors

When adding support for Oracle Big Data Connectors, you can choose whether to
install Oracle Data Integrator Application Adapter for Hadoop. If you do, then you
must provide passwords for the MySQL Database root user and the Oracle Data
Integrator user of MySQL Database (BDA_ODI_REPO). You must also know these
passwords if they are not saved in cluster_name-config.json:
Cloudera Manager admin user
Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall, if enabled
The following procedure uses the bdacli utility.
To add Oracle Big Data Connectors to a cluster:
1. Log in to the first NameNode (node01) of the primary rack as root.
2. Enable Oracle Big Data Connectors:
# bdacli enable bdc
INFO: Logging all actions in
/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/bda1node03-20140805110007.log and traces
in /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/bda1node03-20140805110007.trc
INFO: This is the install of the primary rack
INFO: Checking if password-less ssh is set up
.
.
.
Do you wish to enable ODI? [y/n]: y
Enter password for the BDA_ODI_REPO mysql user
Enter password: odi_password
Enter password again: odi_password
Enter password for the mysql root user
Enter password: root_password
Enter password again: root_password
WARNING: The password for the Cloudera Manager admin user is missing from the
parameters file and is required for the installation.
Enter password: admin_password
Enter password again: admin_password
% Total % Received % Xferd Average Speed Time Time Time Current
Dload Upload Total Spent Left Speed
0 2 0 2 0 0 181 0 --:--:-- --:--:-- --:--:-- 250
INFO: The password for audit vault server is not needed since feature is not
enabled
INFO: Creating environment.pp file ...
INFO: Making sure all puppet agents can be accessed.
INFO: Pinging puppet agents
INFO: Adding BDC to the cluster. This will take some time ...
.
.
.
SUCCESS: Successfully reconfigured service
Removing Oracle Big Data Connectors

When removing support for Oracle Big Data Connectors, you must provide passwords
for the following users, if the passwords are not saved in cluster_name-config.json:

Cloudera Manager admin user

MySQL Database root user, if Oracle Data Integrator Application Adapter for
Hadoop is enabled
BDA_ODI_REPO user of MySQL Database, if Oracle Data Integrator Application
Adapter for Hadoop is enabled
Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall, if enabled
The following procedure uses the bdacli utility.
To remove Oracle Big Data Connectors from a cluster:
1. Log in to the first NameNode (node01) of the primary rack as root.
2. Remove Oracle Big Data Connectors:
# bdacli disable bdc
INFO: Executing checkRoot.sh on nodes
/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/all_nodes #Step -1#

SUCCESS: Executed checkRoot.sh on nodes

INFO: Executing checkSSHAllNodes.sh on nodes

SUCCESS: Executed checkSSHAllNodes.sh on nodes

INFO: Reading component versions from
/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/COMPONENTS
INFO: Creating nodelist files...
WARNING: The password for the Cloudera Manager admin user is missing from the
Enter password: admin_password
% Total % Received % Xferd Average Speed Time Time Time Current
Dload Upload Total Spent Left Speed
0 2 0 2 0 0 184 0 --:--:-- --:--:-- --:--:-- 250
WARNING: The password for the MySQL root user is missing from the parameters
file and is required for the installation.
Enter password: root_password
Enter password again: root_password
INFO: Executing verifyMySQLPasswd.sh on nodes
SUCCESS: Executed verifyMySQLPasswd.sh on nodes

WARNING: The password for the MySQL BDA_ODI_REPO user is missing from the
Enter password: odi_password
Enter password again: odi_password
INFO: Executing verifyMySQLPasswd.sh on nodes

enabled
INFO: Removing big data connectors. This will take some time ...
.
.
.
SUCCESS: Successfully reconfigured service
Adding Support for Auto Service Request

The following procedure shows how to add support for Auto Service Request.
To support Auto Service Request:
1. Set up your My Oracle Support account and install ASR Manager. You must do
this before activating Auto Service Request on Oracle Big Data Appliance. See
Chapter 5.
2. Log in to the first NameNode (node01) of the primary rack as root and change to
the BDAMammoth directory:
3. Turn on Auto Service Request monitoring and activate the assets:

# ./mammoth-reconfig add asr
.
.
.
Enter the value for ASR_HOST [Default: ]: asr-host.example.com
Enter the value for ASR_PORT [Default: 162]:
Enter the value for ASR_SERVER_USER: jdoe
Please Check the values you entered for the ASR parameters
ASR_HOST = asr-host.example.com
ASR_PORT = 162
ASR_SERVER_USER = jdoe
Are these values correct (y/n): y

Enter password for user jdoe on machine asr-host.example.com
Enter password: password
Enter password again: password
INFO: Setting up ASR on all nodes. This will take some time ...
.
.
.
4. Complete the steps in "Verifying the Auto Service Request Installation" on

page 10-6.

Adding Support for Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control

The next procedure shows how to add support for Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud
Control:
To support Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control:
1. Install the system monitoring plug-in for Oracle Big Data Appliance in an Oracle
Enterprise Manager Cloud Control installation on the same network. See the
Oracle Enterprise Manager System Monitoring Plug-in Installation Guide for Oracle Big
Data Appliance.
2. Log into the first NameNode (node01) of the primary rack and change to the
BDAMammoth directory:
3. Add support for Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control:

# ./mammoth-reconfig add em
.
.
.
See Also: My Oracle Support Doc ID 1682558.1, "Instructions to

Install 12.1.0.4 BDA Plug-in on Oracle Big Data Appliance" for
complete installation instructions.
Adding Support for Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall

Before installing support on Oracle Big Data Appliance, ensure that Oracle Audit Vault
and Database Firewall Server Release 12.1.1 or a later version is up and running. It
must be installed on a separate server on the same network as Oracle Big Data
Appliance.
You must also have the following information about the Audit Vault Server
installation:
Audit Vault Server administration user name and password
Database service name
IP address
Port number
Password for disk encryption on Oracle Big Data Appliance, if it is enabled
To add support for Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall:
2. Add support for Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall:

# ./mammoth-reconfig add auditvault
INFO: Logging all actions in /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/
bda1node01-20140805072714.log and traces in

/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/ bda1node01-20140805072714.trc
INFO: Executing checkRoot.sh on nodes


INFO: Executing checkSSHAllNodes.sh on nodes

SUCCESS: Executed checkSSHAllNodes.sh on nodes

INFO: Reading component versions from
/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/COMPONENTS
INFO: Creating nodelist files...
Please enter the Audit Vault Server Admin Username: admin_username
Please enter the Audit Vault Server Admin Password: admin_password
Please enter the Audit Vault Server Database Service Name: service_name
Please enter the Audit Vault Server IP Address: IP address
Please enter the Audit Vault Server Port: port_number
INFO: The password for disk encryption is not needed since feature is not
enabled
INFO: Adding audit Vault Service. This will take some time ...
.
.
.
Adding Disk Encryption

The following procedure configures disk encryption. After installation, a series of tests
run to ensure that the services are working properly.
To change the password, use the mammoth-reconfig update command.
To support disk encryption:
2. Enable disk encryption:

# bdacli enable disk_encryption
in /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/
bda1node01-20140805084442.trc
.
.
.
Enter password for encrypting disks: password


enabled
INFO: Pinging puppet agents ..
INFO: Shutting down Cloudera Manager server/agents. This will take some time
...
.
.
.
INFO: Executing setup_disk_encryption.sh on nodes

SUCCESS: Executed setup_disk_encryption.sh on nodes

SUCCESS: Successfully setup disk encryption on the cluster
.
.
.
INFO: Starting Hadoop Services. This will take some time ...
.
.
.
INFO: Doing post-cleanup operations

INFO: Running cluster validation checks and generating install summary
Enter CM admin password to enable check for CM services and hosts
Press ENTER twice to skip CM services and hosts checks
Enter password: Enter
Enter password again: Enter
INFO: No Cloudera Manager password given. Skipping Cloudera Manager health
checks
Checking Cluster Type
Checking if Kerberos enabled
Retrieving Cluster Information
Running Cluster Health Checks (bdacheckcluster)

Warning: Permanently added 'bda1node01-master' (RSA) to the list of known
hosts.
INFO: No Cloudera Manager password given - Cloudera Manager health checks
skipped
Running 1 GB teragen-terasort-teravalidate Hadoop Validation Test

teragen : 29 s
terasort : 36 s
teravalidate : 33 s
-----------------------------
Total time : 98 s
Status : succeeded
Running An Oozie Workflow Test

oozie passed
oozie workflow test finished in 267 seconds
Map Reduce Job Status:

0000000-140805085424212-oozie-oozi-W@mr-node OK job_1407254020699_0012
SUCCEEDED -

Pig Job Status:

0000000-140805085424212-oozie-oozi-W@pig-node OK job_1407254020699_0004
SUCCEEDED -
Hive Job Status:
0000000-140805085424212-oozie-oozi-W@hive-node OK job_1407254020699_0006
.
.
.
SUCCESS: Cluster validation checks were all successful
INFO: Time spent in post-cleanup operations is 1051 seconds.
===============================================================================
===
INFO: Please download the install summary zipfile from

/tmp/bda1cdh-install-summary.zip
Adding Kerberos Authentication

The following procedure configures Kerberos authentication.
To support Kerberos authentication:
1. Ensure that you complete the Kerberos prerequisites listed in "Installation
Prerequisites" on page 10-2.
3. Configure Kerberos:
# ./mammoth-reconfig add kerberos
.
.
.
INFO: Executing checkRoot.sh on nodes /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/all_
nodes #Step -1#
SUCCESS: Password-less root SSH is setup.
Do you want to setup KDC on a BDA node (yes/no): yes
Please enter the realm name: EXAMPLE.COM
Enter password for Kerberos database: password

INFO: Executing changekrb5_kdc.sh on nodes bda1node01 #Step -1#
SUCCESS: Executed changekrb5_kdc.sh on nodes bda1node01 #Step -1#
SUCCESS: Successfully set the Kerberos configuration on the KDC
INFO: Setting up Master KDC
INFO: Executing setupKDC.sh on nodes bda1node01 #Step -1#
.
.
.


The operating system and various utilities are factory installed on Oracle Big Data
Appliance, as described in "Oracle Big Data Appliance Management Software" on
page 1-4. You may need to reinstall this base image if, for example, you want to return
Oracle Big Data Appliance to its original state, or you replaced a failed server.
Mammoth automatically upgrades the base image as necessary before upgrading the
Oracle Big Data Appliance software to a newer version.
You can reimage all or part of a rack. However, all the servers in a cluster must have
the same image. Follow the appropriate instructions:
Reimaging a Single Oracle Big Data Appliance Server
Reimaging an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack
Reimaging an Oracle Big Data Appliance Cluster
Reimaging a Single Oracle Big Data Appliance Server

Follow this procedure to reimage one server, for example, following replacement of a
failed server.
Caution: If you reimage a server, then all files and data are erased.
To reinstall the base image on one server:

1. Download the base image patch from My Oracle Support or Oracle Automated
Release Updates (ARU), and copy it to the server being reimaged. You can use the
base image downloaded with the Mammoth bundle, or download the separate
base image patch.
Caution: Use the most recent 2.x version of the base image. Do not
use the version included in the Mammoth bundle.
See "Downloading the Mammoth Software Deployment Bundle" on page 10-3. You
can take the same basic steps to download the base image patch from My Oracle
Support.
2. If you are reimaging the server to the current customer settings, verify that
/opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json reflects the intended network configuration. If
it does not, then generate a new file using Oracle Big Data Appliance
Configuration Generation Utility. See "Generating the Configuration Files" on
page 4-3.
3. Ensure that 4 GB or more disk space are free in the partition:
$ df -h
Filesystem Size Used Avail Use% Mounted on
/dev/md2 161G 23G 130G 15% /
/dev/md0 194M 40M 145M 22% /boot
tmpfs 24G 0 24G 0% /dev/shm
/dev/sda4 1.7T 197M 1.7T 1% /u01
/dev/sdb4 1.7T 197M 1.7T 1% /u02
/dev/sdc1 1.8T 199M 1.8T 1% /u03
/dev/sdd1 1.8T 199M 1.8T 1% /u04
.
.

.
4. Unzip the downloaded base image ZIP file. For example:
$ unzip p19070502_260_Linux-x86-64.zip
Archive: p19070502_260_Linux-x86-64.zip
RELEASE.md5sum
RELEASE/Extras/ODI/odiagent-11.1.1.7.0-1.x86_64.rpm
5. Change to the subdirectory created in the previous step:

$ cd BDABaseImage-ol6-2.6.0_RELEASE
6. Reimage the server using the makebdaimage command. The following example
reimages server 4, including the internal USB, from the 2.6.0 base image to the
custom settings in BdaDeploy.json. You must be logged in to the server being
reimaged, which is server 4 in this example.
./makebdaimage --usbint BDABaseImage-ol6-2.6.0_RELEASE.iso
/opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json 4
See makebdaimage on page 10-30 for the complete syntax of the command.
7. If the makebdaimage command succeeds without errors, then restart the server.
Reimaging an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack

Follow this procedure to reimage an entire rack.
Caution: If you reimage an entire rack, then all clusters, files, and
data on the rack are erased. Reimaging is not required for a software
upgrade.
To reinstall the base image on all servers in a rack:

1. If the Oracle Big Data Appliance software was installed previously on the rack,
then save the /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/cluster_name-config.json file to a safe
place outside Oracle Big Data Appliance.
2. Download the most recent base image patch from My Oracle Support or Oracle
Automated Release Updates (ARU), and copy it to the first (bottom) server of the
rack being reimaged. You can use the base image downloaded with the Mammoth
bundle, or download the separate base image patch.

See "Downloading the Mammoth Software Deployment Bundle" on page 10-3. You
can take the same basic steps to download the base image patch from My Oracle
Support.
3. Establish an SSH connection to the first server and log in as root.

4. If you are reimaging to existing customer network settings, then verify that
/opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json reflects the intended network configuration. If
it does not, then generate a new file using Oracle Big Data Appliance
Configuration Generation Utility. See "Generating the Configuration Files" on
page 4-3.
5. Ensure that passwordless SSH is set up:
# dcli hostname
192.168.41.37: bda1node01.example.com
.
.
.
This command must run without errors and return the host names of all Oracle
Big Data Appliance servers. If not, then follow the steps in "Setting Up
Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1. Do not continue until the dcli hostname
command runs successfully on all servers.
6. Check all Oracle Big Data Appliance servers for hardware issues:
# dcli bdacheckhw | grep -v SUCCESS
7. Resolve any hardware errors and warnings before reimaging the rack.
8. Verify that at least 4 GB are available in the root (/) partition of all servers:
# dcli df -h /
192.168.41.37: Filesystem Size Used Avail Use% Mounted on
192.168.41.37: /dev/md2 161G 21G 132G 14% /
192.168.41.38: /dev/md2 161G 19G 135G 12% /
192.168.41.39: /dev/md2 161G 23G 131G 15% /
.
.
.
9. Unzip the downloaded base image ZIP file. For example:

$ unzip p19070502_260_Linux-x86-64.zip
Archive: p19070502_260_Linux-x86-64.zip
RELEASE.md5sum

RELEASE/Extras/ODI/odiagent-11.1.1.7.0-1.x86_64.rpm

11. Complete one of the following procedures:
To reimage an Oracle Big Data Appliance that was configured for a customer
network to the same customer network settings, execute the ./reimagerack
command.
To reimage an appliance that still has the factory settings:
a. Ensure that /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json does not exist.
b. Execute the ./reimagerack command.
To restore the factory network settings on a rack configured with custom
network settings:
a. Copy /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json to a safe location outside Oracle
Big Data Appliance.
b. Ensure that /opt/oracle/bda/BdaShip.json exists.
c. Reimage the rack:
./reimagerack deploy ship
See reimagerack on page 10-31 for the complete syntax of the command.
12. Run Mammoth. See "Installing the Software" on page 10-6.
Reimaging an Oracle Big Data Appliance Cluster

Follow this procedure to reimage a group of servers that the Mammoth utility has
deployed as a cluster. The existing network settings are automatically reapplied after
reimaging.
Caution: If you reimage a cluster, then all files and data on the
cluster are erased. Reimaging is not required for a software upgrade.
To reinstall the base image on all servers in a cluster:

1. Save the /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/cluster_name-config.json file to a safe place
outside Oracle Big Data Appliance.
2. Download the most recent base image patch from My Oracle Support or Oracle
Automated Release Updates (ARU), and copy it to the first server of the cluster
being reimaged.You can copy the file to any directory, such as /tmp.
You can use the base image downloaded with the Mammoth bundle, or download
the separate base image patch.

Depending on the configuration of clusters in the rack, the first server might be 1,
7, 10, or 13, counting from the bottom
3. Establish an SSH connection to the first server and log in as root.
4. Verify that /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json reflects the intended network
configuration. If it does not, then generate a new file using Oracle Big Data
Appliance Configuration Generation Utility. See "Generating the Configuration
Files" on page 4-3.
5. Ensure that passwordless SSH is set up:
# dcli -C hostname
.
.
.
This command must run without errors and return the host names of all Oracle
Big Data Appliance servers in the cluster. If not, then follow the steps in "Setting
Up Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1. Do not continue until the dcli -C hostname
command runs successfully on all servers.
6. Check all Oracle Big Data Appliance servers for hardware issues:
# dcli -C bdacheckhw | grep -v SUCCESS
7. Resolve any hardware errors and warnings before reimaging the rack.
8. Verify that at least 4 GB are available in the root (/) partition of all servers:
# dcli -C df -h /
192.168.41.37: /dev/md2 161G 21G 132G 14% /
192.168.41.38: /dev/md2 161G 19G 135G 12% /
192.168.41.39: /dev/md2 161G 23G 131G 15% /
.
.
.
9. Unzip the downloaded base image ZIP file (2 of 2). For example:
RELEASE.md5sum


11. Reimage the cluster:

./reimagecluster
See reimagecluster on page 10-31 for the complete syntax of the command.
12. Run Mammoth. See "Installing the Software" on page 10-6.

One-off patch bundles provide a fix to specific bugs in one or more releases. You use
Mammoth to apply the patch to your cluster.
To install a one-off patch bundle:
1. Download the patch bundle from the Automated Release Update (ARU) system to
a directory such as /tmp on the first node of the Oracle Big Data Appliance cluster.
The file is named BDA-patch-release-patch.zip. The examples in this procedure
use the name BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.zip.
2. Unzip the file. For example:
# unzip BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.zip
Archive: BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.zip
creating: BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456/
inflating: BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456/BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.run
inflating: BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456/README.txt
3. Change to the patch directory created in Step 2. For example:

$ cd BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456
4. Extract the contents of the run file. For example:

$ ./BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.run
Big Data Appliance one-off patch 123456 for v2.2.1 Self-extraction
Removing existing temporary files
Generating /tmp/BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.tar
Verifying MD5 sum of /tmp/BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.tar
/tmp/BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.tar MD5 checksum matches
Extracting /tmp/BDA-patch-2.2.1-123456.tar to
/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/patches/123456
Removing temporary files
Please "cd /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth" before running "./mammoth -p 123456"
5. Change to the BDAMammoth directory:

$ cd /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth
6. Install the patch. For example:

$ ./mammoth -p 123456
Alternatively, you can use the bdacli command. See "bdacli" on page 13-11.


You must log in as root on the first server and change to the
/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth directory to use Mammoth. It has this syntax:
./mammoth option [cluster_name] ]
In this command, cluster_name is the name of the cluster You must enter cluster_name
in the first command exactly as it appears in (cluster_name-config.json). Afterward,
cluster_name defaults to the rack specified in a previous mammoth command.
You must finish installing one rack before starting the installation of another rack.
Example 101 Mammoth Syntax Examples

This command displays Help for the Mammoth utility:
./mammoth -h
This command does a complete install on rack bda3:

./mammoth -i bda3
This command runs steps 2 through 6 on the rack being set up:
./mammoth -r 2-6
This command generates a parameter file to add six servers in an in-rack expansion
kit, beginning with node07, to an existing cluster:
./mammoth -e node07 node08 node09 node10 node11 node12
Mammoth Options
The syntax of the mammoth command supports the configuration of new clusters and
in-rack expansion kits. You can also use the Mammoth bundle to upgrade from earlier
releases.
-c
Run the Oracle Big Data Appliance cluster checks.
-e newnode1, newnode2, newnode3...

Generates a parameter file for a group of servers being added to a cluster. The file is
named cluster_name-config.json if the new servers are in a rack outside the cluster.
Otherwise, Mammoth prompts for an in-rack expansion number from 1 to 5 that it
uses in the name, such as mammoth-bda1-1.
To identify the new servers, list them on the command line. The servers can be in the
same rack or multiple racks.
No passwords are included in the parameter file, so you must enter them when
running Mammoth.
On Oracle NoSQL Database clusters, Mammoth prompts for the kind of zone for the
new nodes. You can choose from an existing zone, a new primary zone, or a new
secondary zone. When adding to an existing zone, Mammoth lists the zones that you
can use. When creating a new zone, Mammoth prompts for the zone name and
replication factor.
-h
Displays command Help including command usage and a list of steps.

-i cluster_name
Runs all mandatory steps on the cluster, equivalent to -r 1-18 for a full rack. Use this
option when configuring a new rack or adding a group of servers to a cluster.
-l
Lists the steps of the Mammoth utility.
-p
Upgrades the software on the cluster to the current version or installs a one-off patch.
-r n-N
Runs steps n through N of the Mammoth while no errors occur.
-s n [cluster_name]
Runs step n. Enter cluster_name to identify another cluster on the same rack. See the -e
option.
-v
Displays the version number of the Mammoth.
Mammoth Installation Steps

Following are descriptions of the steps that the Mammoth and the Mammoth
Reconfiguration Utility perform when installing the software.
Step 1 PreinstallChecks
This step performs several tasks:
Validates the configuration files and prompts for the passwords.
Sets up a Secure Shell (SSH) for the root user so you can connect to all addresses
on the administrative network without entering a password.
Sets up passwordless SSH for the root user on the InfiniBand network.
Generates /etc/hosts from the configuration file and copies it to all servers so
they use the InfiniBand connections to communicate internally. The file maps
private IP addresses to public host names.
Sets up an alias to identify the node where the Mammoth is run as the puppet
master node. For example, if you run the Mammoth from bda1node01 with an IP
address 192.168.41.1, then a list of aliases for that IP address includes
bda1node01-master. The Mammoth uses Puppet for the software installation.
Checks the network timing on all nodes. If the timing checks fail, then there are
unresolved names and IP addresses that will prevent the installation from running
correctly. Fix these issues before continuing with the installation.
This step also performs a variety of hardware and software checks. A failure in any of
these checks causes the Mammoth to fail:
The ARP cache querying time is 2 seconds or less.
All server clocks are synchronized within 10 seconds of the current server.
All servers succeeded on the last restart and generated a /root/BDA_REBOOT_
SUCCEEDED file.
The bdacheckhw utility succeeds.
The bdachecksw utility succeeds.

Step 2 SetupPuppet
This step configures puppet agents on all nodes and start them, configures a puppet
master on the node where the Mammoth is being run, waits for the agents to submit
their certificates, and automates their signing. This step also changes the root
password on all nodes (optional). After this step is completed, Puppet can deploy the
software.
Puppet is a distributed configuration management tool that is commonly used for
managing Hadoop clusters. The puppet master is a parent service and maintains a
Puppet repository. A puppet agent operates on each Hadoop node.
A file named /etc/puppet/puppet.conf resides on every server and identifies the
location of the puppet master.
Puppet operates in two modes:
Periodic pull mode in which the puppet agents periodically contact the puppet
master and asks for an update, or
Kick mode in which the puppet master alerts the puppet agents that a
configuration update is available, and the agents then ask for the update. Puppet
operates in kick mode during the Mammoth installation.
In both modes, the puppet master must trust the agent. To establish this trust, the
agent sends a certificate to the puppet master node where the sys admin process signs
it. When this transaction is complete, the puppet master sends the new configuration
to the agent.
For subsequent steps, you can check the Puppet log files on each server, as described
in "What If an Error Occurs During the Installation?" on page 10-8.
Step 3 PatchFactoryImage
Installs the most recent Oracle Big Data Appliance image and system parameter
settings.
Step 4 CopyLicenseFiles
Copies third-party licenses to /opt/oss/src/OSSLicenses.pdf on every server, as
required by the licensing agreements.
Step 5 CopySoftwareSource
Copies third-party software source code to /opt/oss/src/ on every server, as required
by the licensing agreements.
Mammoth does not copy the source code to Oracle NoSQL Database clusters.
Step 6 CreateLogicalVolumes
Mammoth does not create logical volumes for Oracle NoSQL Database clusters.
Step 7 CreateUsers
Creates the hdfs and mapred users, and the hadoop group. It also creates the oracle
user and the dba and oinstall groups.
The various packages installed in later steps also create users and groups during their
installation.
See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide for more
information about users and groups.

Step 8 SetupMountPoints
The NameNode data is copied to multiple places to prevent a loss of this critical
information should a failure occur in either the disk or the entire node where they are
set up.
Step 9 SetupMySQL
Installs and configures MySQL Database. This step creates the primary database and
several databases on node03 for use by Cloudera Manager. It also sets up replication of
the primary database to a backup database on node02.
Mammoth does not install MySQL Database on Oracle NoSQL Database clusters.
Step 10 InstallHadoop
Installs all packages in Cloudera's Distribution including Apache Hadoop (CDH) and
Cloudera Manager. It then starts the Cloudera Manager server on node03 and
configures the cluster.
Mammoth does not install CDH or Cloudera Manager on Oracle NoSQL Database
clusters.
Step 11 StartHadoopServices
Starts the agents on all nodes and starts all CDH services. After this step, you have a
fully functional Hadoop installation.
Cloudera Manager runs on port 7180 of node03. You can open it in a browser, for
example:
http://bda1node03.example.com:7180
In this example, bda1node02 is the name of node02 and example.com is the domain.
The default user name and password is admin, which is changed in Step 17.
Mammoth does not install or start CDH services on Oracle NoSQL Database clusters.
Step 12 InstallBDASoftware
Installs the server-side components of Oracle Big Data Connectors, if this option was
selected in Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility. Oracle Big
Data Connectors must be licensed separately. Optional.
Installs the server-side components of Oracle Big Data SQL, if this option was selected
in Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility. For Oracle Big Data
SQL support of Oracle NoSQL Database, this step installs the client libraries
(kvclient.jar) on the CDH nodes. Oracle Big Data SQL must be licensed separately.
Optional.
Installs Oracle NoSQL Database on clusters allocated to its use. Enterprise Edition
requires a separate license.
Step 13 HadoopDataEncryption
Configures network and disk encryption.
Step 14 SetupKerberos
Configures Kerberos authentication on Oracle Big Data Appliance, if this option was
selected. No prerequisites are required if you set up the key distribution center on
Oracle Big Data Appliance. Otherwise, see "Installation Prerequisites" on page 10-2.

Step 15 SetupEMAgent
Installs and configures the Oracle Enterprise Manager agents. Optional.
This step does the following:
Creates following named credentials: Switch Credential, Host Credential,
Cloudera Manager credential and ILOM credential.
In a cluster expansion, the same credentials are reused.
Updates the Oracle Big Data Appliance and Oracle Exadata Database Machine
plug-in agents on the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers to the latest version
deployed on the management servers.
Performs discovery of the cluster using the named credentials.
Note: For this step to run successfully, Oracle Management System

must be up and running. See Oracle Enterprise Manager System
Monitoring Plug-in Installation Guide for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Step 16 SetupASR
Installs and configures Auto Service Request (ASR). Optional.
This step does the following:
Installs the required software packages
Configures the trap destinations
Starts the monitoring daemon
To activate the assets from ASR Manager, see "Verifying ASR Assets" on page 5-4.
Note: For this step to run successfully, the ASR host system must be
up with ASR Manager running and configured properly. See
Chapter 5.
Step 17 CleanupInstall
Performs the following:
Changes the Cloudera Manager password if specified in the Installation Template.
Deletes temporary files created during the installation.
Copies log files from all nodes to subdirectories in /opt/oracle/bda/install/log.
Runs cluster verification checks, including TeraSort, to ensure that everything is
working properly. It also generates an install summary. All logs are stored in a
subdirectory under /opt/oracle/bda/install/log on node01.
Step 18 CleanupSSHroot (Optional)

Removes passwordless SSH for root that was set up in Step 1.

You must log in as root on the first server and change to the /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth
directory to use the Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility. It has this syntax:
./mammoth-reconfig option parameter

Note:
Where parameter is a node name in the syntax examples, bda1 is
the rack name, node is the server base name, and -adm is the
administrative access suffix.
This utility uses the configuration settings stored in
/opt/oracle/bda/install/state/config.json. When the utility
makes a change, it modifies this file to reflect the new
configuration.
The bdacli command provides an alternative way to call
mammoth-reconfig. See "bdacli" on page 13-11.
Options
add | remove
Adds or removes a service from the cluster.
This example adds Auto Service Request support to all servers in the cluster:
# ./mammoth-reconfig add asr
This example removes Oracle Enterprise Manager support from all servers in the
cluster:
# ./mammoth-reconfig remove em
Table 101 describes the keywords that are valid parameters for add and remove.
Table 101 Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility ADD and REMOVE Keywords

Component Keyword Description
asr Auto Service Request
auditvault Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall plugin
bdc Oracle Big Data Connectors
big_data_sql Oracle Big Data SQL
disk_encryption Automatically encrypt and decrypt data on disk and at rest
em Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control agent
kerberos Kerberos authentication; manual removal only
network_encryption Automatically encrypt data as it travels over the network. The
cluster must be set up with Kerberos authentication.
sentry Apache Sentry authorization
Tip: See "Installation Prerequisites" on page 10-2 and "Changing the

Configuration of Optional Software" on page 10-10.
install node
Installs and configures software on the specified node.

failover node
Moves critical services from the specified node to a node with no critical services.
update
Changes the configuration of a service from the cluster. The parameter is a keyword
that identifies the service. See Table 102.
Table 102 Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility UPDATE Keywords

Component Keyword Description
disk_encryption Changes the password used for password-based encryption. The
command prompts for both the old password and the new
password.
A valid password consists of 1 to 64 printable ASCII characters.
It cannot contain whitespace characters (such as spaces, tabs, or
carriage returns), single or double quotation marks, or
backslashes (\).

The following utilities are distributed in the base image bundle. To run the utilities,
you must be logged in as root.
makebdaimage
reimagecluster
reimagerack
makebdaimage
Reinstalls the base image on a single server, a cluster, or an entire rack. Both
reimagecluster and reimagerack call this utility.
The makedbaimage utility has this syntax:
makebdaimage [--usb | --usbint] [--noiloms] /path/BDABaseImage-version_RELEASE.iso
/path/BDdaDeploy.json target_servers
Options
--usb | --usbint
Identifies the USB port that will be used for reimaging. Use --usb for the external USB
drive, or --usbint for the internal drive. The internal USB drive contains a full Linux
installation.
To use the --usbint option, you must be logged in to the target server; otherwise, you
reimage the server using the wrong network information.
--noiloms
The reimaging process does not alter the Oracle ILOMs on the target servers.
target_servers
One or more servers where the image will be installed, which you specify using one of
these formats:
node_number
Identifies one server for reimaging. Enter the position of the server in the rack,
from 1 to 18, counting from bottom to top.

from.json to.json
Identifies the current configuration (from.json) and the desired configuration
(to.json). The JSON files can be either the factory configuration in BdaShip.json
or a custom configuration in BdaDeploy.json. You can find them in
/opt/oracle/bda on configured servers.
to.json: Concatenation of JSON files similar to BdaDeploy.json and BdaShip.json,
but containing an extra ETH0_MACS array entry. The first entry in the
concatenated file with a matching eth0_mac entry is used when reimaging. The
to.json file is used as is.
reimagecluster
Reimages all servers in the cluster in parallel using dcli and makebdaimage.
The reimagecluster utility has this syntax:
reimagecluster [--no-iloms] [from.json [to.json]]
Prerequisites
Verify that the following command returns the list of servers in the cluster:
$ dcli -C hostname
Ensure that exactly one BDABaseImage-version_RELEASE*.iso file is in the current

directory.
Options
--no-iloms
from.json
The full path to the current configuration file, either BdaShip.json or BdaDeploy.json.
This option defaults to /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json. If BdaDeploy.json is
missing, then the option defaults to /opt/oracle/bda/BdaShip.json. The servers must
already be set to the values in the JSON file used by reimagecluster.
to.json
The full path to the new network configuration in effect after reimaging. It can be
either a BdaDeploy.json or a BdaShip.json file.
reimagerack
Reimages all servers in the rack in parallel using dcli and makedbaimage.
The reimagerack utility has this syntax:
reimagerack [--no-iloms] [--no-macs] [--hosts n1, n2...] [from.json [to.json]]
Prerequisites
Verify that the following command returns the list of servers in the rack:
$ dcli -hostname
Ensure that exactly one BDABaseImage-version_RELEASE*.iso file is in the current

directory.

Options
--no-iloms
--no-macs
The utility does not retrieve the server MAC addresses. Instead, it uses the InfiniBand
cabling. Use this option only when restoring the factory settings; you must include
both JSON files (from.json and to.json) in the command line.
--hosts n1, n2...

Restricts reimaging to the servers identified by a comma-delimited list of host names
or IP addresses, whichever one dcli accepts. All servers must be in the list of target
servers identified by the dcli -t command.
This option enforces the --no-macs option, so its restrictions also apply.
from.json
The full path to the current configuration file, either BdaShip.json or BdaDeploy.json.
This option defaults to /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json. If BdaDeploy.son is
missing, then the option defaults to /opt/oracle/bda/BdaShip.json. The servers must
already be set to the values in the JSON file used by reimagerack.
to.json
The full path to the new network configuration in effect after reimaging. It can be
either a BdaDeploy.json or a BdaShip.json file.

Part IV
Part IV Maintenance
Part IV describes procedures and utilities that you use to maintain Oracle Big Data
Appliance. It contains the following chapters:
Chapter 11, "Maintaining Oracle Big Data Appliance"
Chapter 12, "Replacing a Server Disk"
Chapter 13, "Oracle Big Data Appliance Utilities"
Chapter 14, "Executing Commands Across a Cluster Using the dcli Utility"
Chapter 15, "Using Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager"
11
Maintaining Oracle Big Data Appliance
1
This chapter describes how to monitor and maintain Oracle Big Data Appliance. Some
procedures use the dcli utility to execute commands in parallel on all servers.
Monitoring the Ambient Temperature of Servers
Powering On and Off Oracle Big Data Appliance
Adding Memory to the Servers
Maintaining the Physical Disks of Servers
Maintaining the InfiniBand Network
Changing the Number of Connections to a Gateway Switch
Changing the NTP Servers
Monitoring the PDU Current
See Also: Chapter 14, "Executing Commands Across a Cluster Using

the dcli Utility"
Monitoring the Ambient Temperature of Servers

Maintaining environmental temperature conditions within design specification for a
server helps to achieve maximum efficiency and targeted component service lifetimes.
Temperatures outside the ambient temperature range of 21 to 23 degrees Celsius (70 to
74 degrees Fahrenheit) affect all components within Oracle Big Data Appliance,
possibly causing performance problems and shortened service lifetimes.
To monitor the ambient temperature:
1. Connect to an Oracle Big Data Appliance server as root.
2. Set up passwordless SSH for root by entering the setup-root-ssh command, as
described in "Setting Up Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1.
3. Check the current temperature:
dcli 'ipmitool sunoem cli "show /SYS/T_AMB" | grep value'
4. If any temperature reading is outside the operating range, then investigate and
correct the problem. See Table 211.
The following is an example of the command output:
bda1node01-adm.example.com: value = 22.000 degree C
Maintaining Oracle Big Data Appliance 11-1


.
.
.

This section includes the following topics:
Nonemergency Power Procedures
Emergency Power-Off Considerations
Cautions and Warnings
Nonemergency Power Procedures

This section contains the procedures for powering on and off the components of
Oracle Big Data Appliance in an orderly fashion.
See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide for
powering on and off gracefully when the software is installed and
running.

To power on Oracle Big Data Appliance:
Turn on all 12 breakers on both PDUs.
Oracle ILOM and the Linux operating system start automatically.
Powering Off Oracle Big Data Appliance

To power off Oracle Big Data Appliance:
1. Power off the servers.
2. Turn off all 12 breakers on both PDUs.
Powering Off the Servers Use the Linux shutdown command to power off or restart the
servers. Enter this command as root to shut down a server immediately:
# shutdown -hP now
The following command restarts a server immediately:

# shutdown -r now
See Also: Linux SHUTDOWN manual page for details
Powering Off Multiple Servers at the Same Time Use the dcli utility to run the shutdown
command on multiple servers at the same time. Do not run the dcli utility from a
server that will be shut down. Set up passwordless SSH for root, as described in
"Setting Up Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1.
The following command shows the syntax of the command:
# dcli -l root -g group_name shutdown -hP now
In this command, group_name is a file that contains a list of servers.

The following example shuts down all Oracle Big Data Appliance servers listed in the
server_group file:
# dcli -l root -g server_group shutdown -hP now
See Also: Chapter 14, "Executing Commands Across a Cluster Using

the dcli Utility"
Powering On and Off Network Switches

The network switches do not have power switches. They power off when power is
removed by turning off a PDU or a breaker in the data center.
Emergency Power-Off Considerations

In an emergency, halt power to Oracle Big Data Appliance immediately. The following
emergencies may require powering off Oracle Big Data Appliance:
Natural disasters such as earthquake, flood, hurricane, tornado, or cyclone
Abnormal noise, smell, or smoke coming from the system
Threat to human safety
Emergency Power-Off Procedure

To perform an emergency power-off procedure for Oracle Big Data Appliance, turn off
power at the circuit breaker or pull the emergency power-off switch in the computer
room. After the emergency, contact Oracle Support Services to restore power to the
system.
Emergency Power-Off Switch

Emergency power-off (EPO) switches are required when computer equipment
contains batteries capable of supplying more than 750 volt-amperes for more than 5
minutes. Systems that have these batteries include internal EPO hardware for
connection to a site EPO switch or relay. Use of the EPO switch removes power from
Cautions and Warnings

The following cautions and warnings apply to Oracle Big Data Appliance:
WARNING: Do not touch the parts of this product that use

high-voltage power. Touching them might result in serious injury.

Caution:
Do not power off Oracle Big Data Appliance unless there is an
emergency. In that case, follow the "Emergency Power-Off
Procedure" on page 11-3.
Keep the front and rear cabinet doors closed. Failure to do so
might cause system failure or result in damage to hardware
components.
Keep the top, front, and back of the cabinets clear to allow proper
airflow and prevent overheating of components.
Use only the supplied hardware.

You can add memory to all servers in the cluster or to specific servers that need more
memory, such as the two NameNodes.
See Also: "Parts for Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers" on page B-5
Adding Memory to a Sun Server X4-2L or Sun Server X3-2L

Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 and X3-2 ship from the factory with 64 GB of memory
in each server. Eight of the 16 DIMM slots are populated with 8 GB DIMMs.
These appliances support 8 GB, 16 GB, and 32 GB DIMMs. You can expand the amount
of memory for a maximum of 512 GB (16 x 32 GB) in a server.
You can mix DIMM sizes, but they must be installed in order from largest to smallest.
You can achieve the best performance by preserving symmetry. For example, add four
of the same size DIMMs, one for each memory channel, to each processor, and ensure
that both processors have the same size DIMMs installed in the same order.
To add memory to a Sun Server X4-2L or Sun Server X3-2L:
1. If you are mixing DIMM sizes, then review the DIMM population rules in the Sun
Server X3-2L Service Manual at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23393_01/html/E27229/ceiehcdb.html#scrolltoc
2. Power down the server.
3. Install the new DIMMs. If you are installing 16 or 32 GB DIMMs, then replace the
existing 8 GB DIMMs first, and then replace the plastic fillers. You must install the
largest DIMMs first, then the next largest, and so forth. You can reinstall the
original 8 GB DIMMs last.
See the Sun Server X3-2L Service Manual at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23393_01/html/E27229/ceicjagi.html#scrolltoc
4. Power on the server.
Adding Memory to Sun Fire X4270 M2 Servers

Oracle Big Data Appliance ships from the factory with 48 GB of memory in each
server. Six of the 18 DIMM slots are populated with 8 GB DIMMs. You can populate
the empty slots with 8 GB DIMMs to bring the total memory to either 96 GB (12 x 8
GB) or 144 GB (18 x 8 GB). An upgrade to 144 GB may slightly reduce performance

because of lower memory bandwidth; memory frequency drops from 1333 MHz to 800
MHz.
To add memory to a Sun Fire X4270 M2 server:
1. Power down the server.
2. Replace the plastic fillers with the DIMMs. See the Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server
Service Manual at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19245-01/E21671/motherboard.html#50503715_
71311
3. Power on the server.

Repair of the physical disks does not require shutting down Oracle Big Data
Appliance. However, individual servers can be taken outside of the cluster
temporarily and require downtime.
See Also: "Parts for Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers" on page B-5
for the repair procedures
Verifying the Server Configuration

The 12 disk drives in each Oracle Big Data Appliance server are controlled by an LSI
MegaRAID SAS 92610-8i disk controller. Oracle recommends verifying the status of
the RAID devices to avoid possible performance degradation or an outage. The effect
on the server of validating the RAID devices is minimal. The corrective actions may
affect operation of the server and can range from simple reconfiguration to an outage,
depending on the specific issue uncovered.
Verifying Disk Controller Configuration

Enter this command to verify the disk controller configuration:
# MegaCli64 -AdpAllInfo -a0 | grep "Device Present" -A 8
The following is an example of the output from the command. There should be 12
virtual drives, no degraded or offline drives, and 14 physical devices. The 14 devices
are the controllers and the 12 disk drives.
Device Present
================
Virtual Drives : 12
Degraded : 0
Offline : 0
Physical Devices : 14
Disks : 12
Critical Disks : 0
Failed Disks : 0
If the output is different, then investigate and correct the problem.
Verifying Virtual Drive Configuration

Enter this command to verify the virtual drive configuration:
# MegaCli64 -LDInfo -lAll -a0

The following is an example of the output for Virtual Drive 0. Ensure that State is
Optimal.
Adapter 0 -- Virtual Drive Information:
Virtual Drive: 0 (Target Id: 0)
Name :
RAID Level : Primary-0, Secondary-0, RAID Level Qualifier-0
Size : 1.817 TB
Parity Size : 0
State : Optimal
Strip Size : 64 KB
Number Of Drives : 1
Span Depth : 1
Default Cache Policy: WriteBack, ReadAheadNone, Cached, No Write Cache if Bad BBU
Current Cache Policy: WriteBack, ReadAheadNone, Cached, No Write Cache if Bad BBU
Access Policy : Read/Write
Disk Cache Policy : Disk's Default
Encryption Type : None
Verifying Physical Drive Configuration

Use the following command to verify the physical drive configuration:
# MegaCli64 -PDList -a0 | grep Firmware
The following is an example of the output from the command. The 12 drives should be
Online, Spun Up. If the output is different, then investigate and correct the problem.
Firmware state: Online, Spun Up
Device Firmware Level: 061A
.
.
.

The InfiniBand network connects the servers through the bondib0 interface to the
InfiniBand switches in the rack. This section describes how to perform maintenance on
the InfiniBand switches.
This section contains the following topics:
Backing Up and Restoring Oracle ILOM Settings
Replacing a Failed InfiniBand Switch
Verifying InfiniBand Network Operation
Understanding the Network Subnet Manager Master
Backing Up and Restoring Oracle ILOM Settings

Oracle ILOM supports remote administration of the Oracle Big Data Appliance
servers. This section explains how to back up and restore the Oracle ILOM
configuration settings, which are set by the Mammoth utility.

See Also:
For Sun Server X4-2L and Sun Server X3-2L servers, the Oracle
Integrated Lights Out Manager 3.1 documentation library at
For Sun Fire X4270 M2 servers, the Oracle Integrated Lights Out
Manager 3.0 documentation library at
Backing Up the Oracle ILOM Configuration Settings

To back up the Oracle ILOM configuration settings on a Sun Server X4-2L or X3-2L
server:
1. Open your browser on any system that is on the same network as Oracle Big Data
Appliance, and navigate to the Oracle ILOM service processor. This example uses
the Oracle ILOM address of a server named node08:
http://bda1node08-ilom.example.com
To back up the Oracle ILOM for an InfiniBand switch, enter the switch address,
such as bda1sw-ib1.
2. Log in as the root user. The initial password is welcome1.
3. Navigate to the Backup/Restore page:
For Oracle ILOM 3.1, select the Maintenance tab, and then select the
Backup/Restore subtab.
For Oracle ILOM 3.0, expand the ILOM Administration folder in the
navigation tree, and select Configuration Management.
4. Select the Backup operation and the Browser transfer method, as shown in
Figure 111.
5. Enter a pass phrase. The phrase is used to encrypt sensitive information, such as
passwords, in the backup file.
6. Click Run to start the backup operation. The results are downloaded to your local
system in an XML file named config_backup.xml.
7. Save the file in a secure location.
8. Click the Log Out button.

Figure 111 Oracle ILOM 3.1 Configuration Backup
Restoring Oracle ILOM Configuration Settings

To restore the Oracle ILOM configuration settings:
1. Open your browser on any system on the same network as Oracle Big Data
Appliance and navigate to an Oracle ILOM service processor. This example uses
Oracle ILOM on node08:
http://bda1node08-ilom.us.example.com
2. Log in as the ilom_admin user. The default password is welcome1.
3. Select the Maintenance tab, and then select the Backup/Restore subtab.
4. Select the Restore operation and the Browser transfer method.
5. Click Choose File and select the config_backup.xml file saved previously in a
backup operation.
6. Enter the pass phrase that was set during the backup operation.
7. Click Run to restore the configuration.
Replacing a Failed InfiniBand Switch

Complete these steps to replace a Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switch or a
Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36.
See Also:
"In-Rack InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cable Connections" on
page D-7 for information about cabling
Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch Installation Guide at
01/html/E26706/gentextid-125.html#scrolltoc
Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 User's Guide at

To replace a failed InfiniBand switch:

1. Disconnect the cables from the switch. All InfiniBand cables have labels at both
ends indicating their locations. If any cables do not have labels, then label them.
2. Power off both power supplies on the switch by removing the power plugs.
3. Remove the switch from the rack.
4. Install the new switch in the rack.
5. Restore the switch settings using the backup file, as described in "Backing Up and
Restoring Oracle ILOM Settings" on page 11-6.
6. Connect to the switch as ilom_admin and open the Fabric Management shell:
The prompt changes from -> to FabMan@hostname->

7. Disable the Subnet Manager:
FabMan@bda1sw-02-> disablesm
8. Connect the cables to the new switch, being careful to connect each cable to the
correct port.
9. Verify that there are no errors on any links in the fabric:
FabMan@bda1sw-02-> ibdiagnet -c 1000 -r
10. Enable the Subnet Manager:

FabMan@bda1sw-02-> enablesm
Note: If the replaced switch was the Sun Datacenter InfiniBand

Switch 36 spine switch, then manually fail the master Subnet Manager
back to the switch by disabling the Subnet Managers on the other
switches until the spine switch becomes the master. Then reenable the
Subnet Manager on all the other switches.
Verifying InfiniBand Network Operation

If any component in the InfiniBand network has required maintenance, including
replacing an InfiniBand Host Channel Adapter (HCA) on a server, an InfiniBand
switch, or an InfiniBand cable, or if operation of the InfiniBand network is suspected
to be substandard, then verify that the InfiniBand network is operating properly. The
following procedure describes how to verify network operation:
Note: Use this procedure any time the InfiniBand network is

performing below expectations.
To verify InfiniBand network operation:

1. Enter the ibdiagnet command to verify InfiniBand network quality:
# ibdiagnet -c 1000
Investigate all errors reported by this command. It generates a small amount of

network traffic and can run during a normal workload.

See Also: Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch Command

Reference at
2. Report switch port error counters and port configuration information. The
LinkDowned, RcvSwRelayErrors, XmtDiscards, and XmtWait errors are ignored by
this command:
# ibqueryerrors.pl -rR -s LinkDowned,RcvSwRelayErrors,XmtDiscards,XmtWait
See Also: Linux man page for ibqueryerrors.S
3. Check the status of the hardware:

# bdacheckhw
The following is an example of the output:

[SUCCESS: Correct system model : SUN FIRE X4270 M2 SERVER
[SUCCESS: Correct processor info : Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU X5675 @ 3.07GHz
[SUCCESS: Correct number of types of CPU : 1
[SUCCESS: Correct number of CPU cores : 24
[SUCCESS: Sufficient GB of memory (>=48): 48
[SUCCESS: Correct GB of swap space : 24
[SUCCESS: Correct BIOS vendor : American Megatrends Inc.
[SUCCESS: Sufficient BIOS version (>=08080102): 08080102
[SUCCESS: Recent enough BIOS release date (>=05/23/2011) : 05/23/2011
[SUCCESS: Correct ILOM version : 3.0.16.10.a r68533
[SUCCESS: Correct number of fans : 6
[SUCCESS: Correct fan 0 status : ok
[SUCCESS: Correct number of power supplies : 2
[1m[34mINFO: Detected Santa Clara Factory, skipping power supply checks
[SUCCESS: Correct disk controller model : LSI MegaRAID SAS 9261-8i
[SUCCESS: Correct disk controller firmware version : 12.12.0-0048
[SUCCESS: Correct disk controller PCI address : 13:00.0
[SUCCESS: Correct disk controller PCI info : 0104: 1000:0079
[SUCCESS: Correct disk controller PCIe slot width : x8
[SUCCESS: Correct disk controller battery type : iBBU08
[SUCCESS: Correct disk controller battery state : Operational
[SUCCESS: Correct number of disks : 12
[SUCCESS: Correct disk 0 model : SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0
[SUCCESS: Sufficient disk 0 firmware (>=61A): 61A
[SUCCESS: Correct disk 1 model : SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0
[SUCCESS: Sufficient disk 1 firmware (>=61A): 61A
.
.
.
[SUCCESS: Correct disk 10 status : Online, Spun Up No alert
[SUCCESS: Correct disk 11 status : Online, Spun Up No alert
[SUCCESS: Correct Host Channel Adapter model : Mellanox Technologies MT26428
ConnectX VPI PCIe 2.0
[SUCCESS: Correct Host Channel Adapter firmware version : 2.9.1000
[SUCCESS: Correct Host Channel Adapter PCI address : 0d:00.0

[SUCCESS: Correct Host Channel Adapter PCI info : 0c06: 15b3:673c

[SUCCESS: Correct Host Channel Adapter PCIe slot width : x8
[SUCCESS: Big Data Appliance hardware validation checks succeeded
4. Check the status of the software:

# bdachecksw
[SUCCESS: Correct OS disk sda partition info : 1 ext3 raid 2 ext3 raid 3
linux-swap 4 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct OS disk sdb partition info : 1 ext3 raid 2 ext3 raid 3
linux-swap 4 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdc partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdd partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sde partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdf partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdg partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdh partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdi partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdj partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdk partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct data disk sdl partition info : 1 ext3 primary
[SUCCESS: Correct software RAID info : /dev/md2 level=raid1 num-devices=2
/dev/md0 level=raid1 num-devices=2
[SUCCESS: Correct mounted partitions : /dev/md0 /boot ext3 /dev/md2 / ext3
/dev/sda4 /u01 ext4 /dev/sdb4 /u02 ext4 /dev/sdc1 /u03 ext4 /dev/sdd1 /u04 ext4
/dev/sde1 /u05 ext4 /dev/sdf1 /u06 ext4 /dev/sdg1 /u07 ext4 /dev/sdh1 /u08 ext4
/dev/sdi1 /u09 ext4 /dev/sdj1 /u10 ext4 /dev/sdk1 /u11 ext4 /dev/sdl1 /u12 ext4
[SUCCESS: Correct swap partitions : /dev/sdb3 partition /dev/sda3 partition
[SUCCESS: Correct Linux kernel version : Linux 2.6.32-200.21.1.el5uek
[SUCCESS: Correct Java Virtual Machine version : HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server
1.6.0_29
[SUCCESS: Correct puppet version : 2.6.11
[SUCCESS: Correct MySQL version : 5.5.17
[SUCCESS: All required programs are accessible in $PATH
[SUCCESS: All required RPMs are installed and valid
[SUCCESS: Big Data Appliance software validation checks succeeded
Understanding the Network Subnet Manager Master

The Subnet Manager manages all operational characteristics of the InfiniBand
network, such as the ability to:
Discover the network topology
Assign a local identifier to all ports connected to the network
Calculate and program switch forwarding tables
Monitor changes in the fabric
The InfiniBand network can have multiple Subnet Managers, but only one Subnet
Manager is active at a time. The active Subnet Manager is the Master Subnet Manager.
The other Subnet Managers are the Standby Subnet Managers. If a Master Subnet
Manager is shut down or fails, then a Standby Subnet Manager automatically becomes
the Master Subnet Manager.
Each Subnet Manager has a configurable priority. When multiple Subnet Managers are
on the InfiniBand network, the Subnet Manager with the highest priority becomes the
master Subnet Manager. On Oracle Big Data Appliance, the Subnet Managers on the
leaf switches are configured as priority 5, and the Subnet Managers on the spine
switches are configured as priority 8.

The following guidelines determine where the Subnet Managers run on Oracle Big
Data Appliance:
Run the Subnet Managers only on the switches in Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Running a Subnet Manager on any other device is not supported.
When the InfiniBand network consists of one, two, or three racks cabled together,
all switches must run a Subnet Manager. The master Subnet Manager runs on a
spine switch.
When the InfiniBand network consists of four or more racks cabled together, then
only the spine switches run a Subnet Manager. The leaf switches must disable the
Subnet Manager.
See Also:
Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch library at
Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 library at

If you change the number of 10 GbE connections to a Sun Network QDR InfiniBand
Gateway switch, then you must run the bdaredoclientnet utility. See
"bdaredoclientnet" on page 13-27.
To re-create the VNICs in a rack:
1. Verify that /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json exists on all servers and correctly
describes the custom network settings. This command identifies files that are
missing or have different date stamps:
dcli ls -l /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json
2. Connect to node01 (bottom of rack) using the administrative network. The

bdaredoclientnet utility shuts down the client network, so you cannot use it in
this procedure.
3. Remove passwordless SSH:
/opt/oracle/bda/bin/remove-root-ssh
See "Setting Up Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1 for more information about this
command.
4. Change directories:
cd /opt/oracle/bda/network
5. Run the utility:

bdaredoclientnet
The output is similar to that shown in Example 72.

6. Restore passwordless SSH (optional):
/opt/oracle/bda/bin/setup-root-ssh

Changing the NTP Servers

The configuration information for Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers can be
changed after the initial setup. The following procedure describes how to change the
NTP configuration information for InfiniBand switches, Cisco switches, and Sun
servers. Oracle recommends changing each server individually.
To update the Oracle Big Data Appliance servers:
1. Stop NTP services on the server.
2. Update the /etc/ntp.conf file with the IP address of the new NTP server.
3. Repeat these steps for each server.
To update the InfiniBand switches:
1. Log in to the switch as the ilom-admin user.
2. Follow the instructions in "Setting the Time Zone and Clock on an InfiniBand
Switch" on page 7-14.
To update the Cisco Ethernet switch:
1. Use telnet to connect to the Cisco Ethernet switch.
2. Delete the current setting:
# configure terminal
(config)# no ntp server current_IPaddress
3. Enter the new IP address:

# configure terminal
(config)# ntp server new_IPaddress
4. Save the current configuration:

# copy running-config startup-config
5. Exit from the session:

# exit
See Also: "Configuring the Cisco Ethernet Switch" on page 7-4
Restart Oracle Big Data Appliance after changing the servers and switches.

The PDU current can be monitored directly. Configure threshold settings as a way to
monitor the PDUs. The configurable threshold values for each metering unit module
and phase are Info low, Pre Warning, and Alarm.
See Also: Sun Rack II Power Distribution Units User's Guide for
information about configuring and monitoring PDUs at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19844-01/index.html
Table 111 lists the threshold values for the Oracle Big Data Appliance rack using a
single-phase, low-voltage PDU.

Table 111 Threshold Values for Single-Phase, Low-Voltage PDU

Info Low Pre Warning Alarm
PDU Module/Phase Threshold Threshold Threshold
A Module 1, phase 1 0 18 23
B Module 1, phase 1 0 18 23
three-phase, low-voltage PDU.
Table 112 Threshold Values for Three-Phase, Low-Voltage PDU

A and B Module 1, phase 1 0 32 40
single-phase, high-voltage PDU.
Table 113 Threshold Values for Single-Phase, High-Voltage PDU

three-phase, high-voltage PDU.
Table 114 Threshold Values for Three-Phase, High-Voltage PDU


12
Replacing a Server Disk
12
The failure of a disk is never catastrophic on Oracle Big Data Appliance. No user data
is lost. Data stored in HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database is automatically replicated.
Overview of the Disk Replacement Process
About Disk Drive Identifiers
Prerequisites for Replacing a Failing Disk
What If a Server Fails to Restart?
Replacing a Disk Drive
Correcting a Mounted Partitions Error
Identifying the Function of a Disk Drive
Configuring an Operating System Disk
Configuring an HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database Disk
Verifying the Disk Configuration
See Also: My Oracle Support Doc ID 1581331.1
Overview of the Disk Replacement Process

The following are the basic steps for replacing a server disk drive:
1. Replace the failed disk drive.
2. Perform the basic configuration steps for the new disk.
3. Identify the dedicated function of the failed disk, as an operating system disk, or
as either an HDFS disk or an Oracle NoSQL Database disk.
4. Configure the disk for its dedicated function.
5. Verify that the configuration is correct.
6. Install the Oracle Big Data Appliance software.
Replacing a Server Disk 12-1

See Also:
"Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives" in the Sun Server X4-2L
Service Manual at
https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E36974_
01/html/E38145/z40000091011460.html#scrolltoc
"Servicing Storage Drives and Boot Drives" in the Sun Fire X4270M2
Server Service Manual at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19245-01/E21671/hotswap.html#5050
3714_61628

The Oracle Big Data Appliance servers contain a disk enclosure cage that is controlled
by the host bus adapter (HBA). The enclosure holds 12 disk drives that are identified
by slot numbers 0 to 11. The drives can be dedicated to specific functions, as shown in
Table 121.
Oracle Big Data Appliance uses symbolic links, which are defined in /dev/disk/by_
hba_slot, to identify the slot number of a disk. The links have the form snpm, where n
is the slot number and m is the partition number. For example, /dev/disk/by_hba_
slot/s0p1 initially corresponds to /dev/sda1.
When a disk is hot swapped, the operating system cannot reuse the kernel device
name. Instead, it allocates a new device name. For example, if you hot swap /dev/sda,
then the disk corresponding /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0 might link to /dev/sdn
instead of /dev/sda. Therefore, the links in /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/ are automatically
updated when devices are added or removed.
The command output lists device names as kernel device names instead of symbolic
link names. Thus, /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0 might be identified as /dev/sda in the
output of a command.
Standard Disk Drive Mappings

Table 121 shows typical initial mappings between the RAID logical drives and the
operating system identifiers. Nonetheless, you must use the mappings that exist for
your system, which might be different from the ones listed here. The table also
identifies the dedicated function of each drive in an Oracle Big Data Appliance server.
The server with the failed drive is part of either a CDH cluster (HDFS) or an Oracle
NoSQL Database cluster.
Table 121 Disk Drive Identifiers

Symbolic Link to Physical Typical Initial Kernel
Slot Device Name Dedicated Function
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0 /dev/sda Operating system
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1 /dev/sdb Operating system
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s2 /dev/sdc HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s3 /dev/sdd HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s4 /dev/sde HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s5 /dev/sdf HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s6 /dev/sdg HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database

Table 121 (Cont.) Disk Drive Identifiers

Symbolic Link to Physical Typical Initial Kernel
Slot Device Name Dedicated Function
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s7 /dev/sdh HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s8 /dev/sdi HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s9 /dev/sdj HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s10 /dev/sdk HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s11 /dev/sdl HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database
Standard Mount Points

Table 122 show the mappings between HDFS partitions and mount points.
Table 122 Mount Points

Symbolic Link to Physical Slot and Partition HDFS Partition Mount Point
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0p4 /dev/sda4 /u01
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1p4 /dev/sdb4 /u02
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s2p1 /dev/sdc1 /u03
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s3p1 /dev/sdd1 /u04
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s4p1 /dev/sde1 /u05
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s5p1 /dev/sdf1 /u06
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s6p1 /dev/sdg1 /u07
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s7p1 /dev/sdh1 /u08
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s8p1 /dev/sdi1 /u09
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s9p1 /dev/sdj1 /u10
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s10p1 /dev/sdk1 /u11
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s11p1 /dev/sdl1 /u12
Obtaining the Physical Slot Number of a Disk Drive

Use the following MegaCli64 command to verify the mapping of virtual drive
numbers to physical slot numbers. See "Replacing a Disk Drive" on page 12-6.
# MegaCli64 LdPdInfo a0 | more

To replace an HDFS disk or an operating system disk that is in a state of predictive
failure, you must first dismount the HDFS partitions. You must also turn off swapping
before replacing an operating system disk.
Note: Only dismount HDFS partitions. For an operating system disk,

ensure that you do not dismount operating system partitions. Only
partition 4 (sda4 or sdb4) of an operating system disk is used for
HDFS.
To dismount HDFS partitions:

1. Log in to the server with the failing drive.

2. If the failing drive supported the operating system, then turn off swapping:
# bdaswapoff
Removing a disk with active swapping crashes the kernel.

3. List the mounted HDFS partitions:
# mount -l
/dev/md2 on / type ext4 (rw,noatime)

proc on /proc type proc (rw)
sysfs on /sys type sysfs (rw)
devpts on /dev/pts type devpts (rw,gid=5,mode=620)
/dev/md0 on /boot type ext4 (rw)
tmpfs on /dev/shm type tmpfs (rw)
/dev/sda4 on /u01 type ext4 (rw,nodev,noatime) [/u01]
/dev/sdb4 on /u02 type ext4 (rw,nodev,noatime) [/u02]
/dev/sdc1 on /u03 type ext4 (rw,nodev,noatime) [/u03]
/dev/sdd1 on /u04 type ext4 (rw,nodev,noatime) [/u04]
.
.
.
4. Check the list of mounted partitions for the failing disk. If the disk has no
partitions listed, then proceed to "Replacing a Disk Drive" on page 12-6.
Otherwise, continue to the next step.
Caution: For operating system disks, look for partition 4 (sda4 or

sdb4). Do not dismount an operating system partition.
5. Dismount the HDFS mount points for the failed disk:

# umount mountpoint
For example, umount /u11 removes the mount point for partition /dev/sdk1.
If the umount commands succeed, then proceed to "Replacing a Disk Drive" on
page 12-6. If a umount command fails with a device busy message, then the
partition is still in use. Continue to the next step.
6. Open a browser window to Cloudera Manager. For example:
7. Complete these steps in Cloudera Manager:
a. Log in as admin.
b. On the Services page, click hdfs
c. Click the Instances subtab.
d. In the Host column, locate the server with the failing disk. Then click the
service in the Name column, such as datanode, to open its page.
e. Click the Configuration subtab.
f. Remove the mount point from the Directory field.
g. Click Save Changes.

h. From the Actions list, choose Restart this DataNode.
Note: If you removed the mount point in Cloudera Manager, then

you must restore the mount point in Cloudera Manager after finishing
all other configuration procedures.
8. Return to your session on the server with the failed drive.

9. Reissue the umount command:
# umount mountpoint
10. Bring the disk offline:

# MegaCli64 PDoffline "physdrv[enclosure:slot]" a0
For example, "physdrv[20:10]" identifies disk s11, which is located in slot 10 of

enclosure 20.
11. Delete the disk from the controller configuration table:
MegaCli64 CfgLDDel Lslot a0
For example, L10 identifies slot 10.

12. Complete the steps in "Replacing a Disk Drive" on page 12-6.

The server may restart during the disk replacement procedures, either because you
issued a reboot command or made an error in a MegaCli64 command. In most cases,
the server restarts successfully, and you can continue working. However, in other
cases, an error occurs so that you cannot reconnect using ssh. In this case, you must
complete the reboot using Oracle ILOM.
To restart a server using Oracle ILOM:
1. Use your browser to open a connection to the server using Oracle ILOM. For
example:
http://bda1node12-c.example.com
Note: Your browser must have a JDK plug-in installed. If you do not
see the Java coffee cup on the log-in page, then you must install the
plug-in before continuing.
2. Log in using your Oracle ILOM credentials.

3. Select the Remote Control tab.
4. Click the Launch Remote Console button.
5. Enter Ctrl+d to continue rebooting.
6. If the reboot fails, then enter the server root password at the prompt and attempt
to fix the problem.
7. After the server restarts successfully, open the Redirection menu and choose Quit
to close the console window.

See Also: Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.0

documentation at

Complete this procedure to replace a failed or failing disk drives.
1. Before replacing a failing disk, see "Prerequisites for Replacing a Failing Disk" on
page 12-3.
2. Replace the failed disk drive.
See "Parts for Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers" on page B-5.
3. Power on the server if you powered it off to replace the failed disk.
4. Connect to the server as root using either the KVM or an SSL connection to a
laptop.
5. Store the physical drive information in a file:
# MegaCli64 pdlist a0 > pdinfo.tmp
Note: This command redirects the output to a file so that you can perform several
searches using a text editor. If you prefer, you can pipe the output through the
more or grep commands.
The utility returns the following information for each slot. This example shows a
Firmware State of Unconfigured(good), Spun Up.
Enclosure Device ID: 20
Slot Number: 8
Drive's postion: DiskGroup: 8, Span: 0, Arm: 0
Enclosure position: 0
Device Id: 11
WWN: 5000C5003487075C
Sequence Number: 2
Media Error Count: 0
Other Error Count: 0
Predictive Failure Count: 0
Last Predictive Failure Event Seq Number: 0
PD Type: SAS
Raw Size: 1.819 TB [0xe8e088b0 Sectors]
Non Coerced Size: 1.818 TB [0xe8d088b0 Sectors]
Coerced Size: 1.817 TB [0xe8b6d000 Sectors]
Firmware state: Unconfigured(good), Spun Up
Is Commissioned Spare : NO
Shield Counter: 0
Successful diagnostics completion on : N/A
SAS Address(0): 0x5000c5003487075d
SAS Address(1): 0x0
Connected Port Number: 0(path0)
Inquiry Data: SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1126L6M3WX
FDE Enable: Disable
Secured: Unsecured
Locked: Unlocked
Needs EKM Attention: No
Foreign State: None
Device Speed: 6.0Gb/s
Link Speed: 6.0Gb/s

Media Type: Hard Disk Device

.
.
.
6. Open the file you created in Step 5 in a text editor and search for the following:
Disks that have a Foreign State of Foreign
Disks that have a Firmware State of Unconfigured
7. For disks that have a Foreign State of Foreign, clear that status:
# MegaCli64 CfgForeign clear a0
A foreign disk is one that the controller saw previously, such as a reinserted disk.
8. For disks that have a Firmware State of Unconfigured (Bad), complete these steps:
a. Note the enclosure device ID number and the slot number.
b. Enter a command in this format:
# MegaCli64 pdmakegood physdrv[enclosure:slot] a0
For example, [20:10] repairs the disk identified by enclosure 20 in slot 10.
c. Check the current status of Foreign State again:
# MegaCli64 pdlist a0 | grep foreign
d. If the Foreign State is still Foreign, then repeat the clear command:
# MegaCli64 CfgForeign clear a0
9. For disks that have a Firmware State of Unconfigured (Good), use the following
command. If multiple disks are unconfigured, then configure them in order from
the lowest to the highest slot number:
# MegaCli64 CfgLdAdd r0[enclosure:slot] a0
Adapter 0: Created VD 1
Adapter 0: Configured the Adapter!!
Exit Code: 0x00
For example, [20:5] repairs the disk identified by enclosure 20 in slot 5.

10. If the CfgLdAdd command in Step 9 fails because of cached data, then clear the
cache:
# MegaCli64 discardpreservedcache l1 a0
11. Verify that the disk is recognized by the operating system:

# lsscsi
The disk may appear with its original device name (such as /dev/sdc) or under a
new device name (such as /dev/sdn). If the operating system does not recognize
the disk, then the disk is missing from the list generated by the lsscsi command.
The lssci output might not show the correct order, but you can continue with the
configuration. While the same physical to logical disk mapping is required, the

same disk to device mapping for the kernel is not required. The disk configuration
is based on /dev/disks/by-hba-slot device names.
This example output shows two disks with new device names: /dev/sdn in slot 5,
and /dev/sdo in slot 10.
[0:0:20:0] enclosu ORACLE CONCORD14 0960 -
[0:2:0:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sda
[0:2:1:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdb
[0:2:2:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdc
[0:2:3:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdd
[0:2:4:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sde
[0:2:5:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdn
[0:2:6:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdg
[0:2:7:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdh
[0:2:8:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdi
[0:2:9:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdj
[0:2:10:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdo
[0:2:11:0] disk LSI MR9261-8i 2.12 /dev/sdl
[7:0:0:0] disk ORACLE UNIGEN-UFD PMAP /dev/sdm
[
12. Check the hardware profile of the server, and correct any errors:
# bdacheckhw
13. Check the software profile of the server, and correct any errors:
# bdachecksw
If you see a "Wrong mounted partitions" error and the device is missing from the
list, then you can ignore the error and continue. However, if you see a "Duplicate
mount points" error or the slot numbers are switched, then see "Correcting a
Mounted Partitions Error" on page 12-8..
14. Identify the function of the drive, so you configure it properly. See "Identifying the
Function of a Disk Drive" on page 12-9.

When the bdachecksw utility finds a problem, it typically concerns the mounted
partitions.
An old mount point might appear in the mount command output, so that the same
mount point, such as /u03, appears twice.
To fix duplicate mount points:
1. Dismount both mount points by using the umount command twice. This example
dismounts two instances of/u03:
# umount /u03
# umount /u03
2. Remount the mount point. This example remounts /u03:

# mount /u03
If a disk is in the wrong slot (that is, the virtual drive number), then you can switch
two drives.
To switch slots:

1. Remove the mappings for both drives. This example removes the drives from slots
4 and 10:
# MegaCli64 cfgLdDel L4 a0
# MegaCli64 cfgLdDel L10 a0
2. Add the drives in the order you want them to appear; the first command obtains
the first available slot number:
# MegaCli64 cfgLdAdd [20:4] a0
# MegaCli64 cfgLdAdd [20:5] a0
3. If mount errors persist even when the slot numbers are correct, then you can
restart the server.
Identifying the Function of a Disk Drive

The server with the failed disk is configured to support either HDFS or Oracle NoSQL
Database, and most disks are dedicated to that purpose. However, two disks are
dedicated to the operating system. Before configuring the new disk, find out how the
failed disk was configured.
Oracle Big Data Appliance is configured with the operating system on the first two
disks.
To confirm that a failed disk supported the operating system:
1. Check whether the replacement disk corresponds to /dev/sda or /dev/sdb, which
are the operating system disks.
# lsscsi
See the output from Step 11 of "Replacing a Disk Drive" on page 12-6.
2. Verify that /dev/sda and /dev/sdb are the operating system mirrored partitioned
disks:
# mdadm -Q -detail /dev/md2
/dev/md2:
Version : 0.90
Creation Time : Mon Jul 22 22:56:19 2013
Raid Level : raid1
.
.
.
Number Major Minor RaidDevice State
0 8 2 0 active sync /dev/sda2
1 8 18 1 active sync /dev/sdb2
3. If the previous steps indicate that the failed disk is an operating system disk, then
proceed to "Configuring an Operating System Disk" on page 12-9.

The first two disks support the Linux operating system. These disks store a copy of the
mirrored operating system, a swap partition, a mirrored boot partition, and an HDFS
data partition.
To configure an operating system disk, you must copy the partition table from the
surviving disk, create an HDFS partition (ext4 file system), and add the software raid
partitions and boot partitions for the operating system.

Complete these procedures after replacing the disk in either slot 0 or slot 1.
Partitioning the Operating System Disk
Repairing the RAID Arrays
Formatting the HDFS Partition of an Operating System Disk
Restoring the Swap Partition
Restoring the GRUB Master Boot Records and HBA Boot Order
Partitioning the Operating System Disk

The partitioning procedure differs slightly between Oracle Linux versions 5 and 6.
Follow the appropriate procedure for your system:
Partitioning for Oracle Linux 6
Note: Replace /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn in the following

commands with the appropriate symbolic link, either
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0 or /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1.

To partition a logical drive for Oracle Linux 6:
2. Confirm that the new disk does not have a partition table:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s print
You should see a message about a missing partition table.

3. If the parted command displays a partition table, then clear it:
# dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn bs=1M count=100
Tip: You can use this command to restart an operating system disk
configuration, if you make a mistake.
4. Create the partition table:

# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mklabel gpt print
5. List the Cylinder, Head, Sector (CHS) partition information of the surviving disk.
Thus, if you are partitioning /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0, then enter
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1 for /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sm in the following
command:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sm -s unit chs print
Model: LSI MR9261-8i (scsi)

Disk /dev/sda: 243031,30,6
Sector size (logical/physical): 512B/512B
BIOS cylinder,head,sector geometry: 243031,255,63. Each cylinder is 8225kB.
Partition Table: gpt
Number Start End File system Name Flags

1 0,0,34 25,127,7 ext4 primary boot

2 25,127,8 21697,116,20 primary raid
3 21697,116,21 23227,61,35 linux-swap(v1) primary
4 23227,61,36 243031,29,36 ext4 primary
6. Create partitions 1 to 3 on the new drive by duplicating the partitions of the

surviving disk. Issue three commands in this format:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart primary file_system start end
Use the start and end addresses that you obtained in Step 5 instead of the
addresses shown in the following example:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart primary ext4 0,0,34 25,127,7
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart primary ext4 25,127,8 21697,116,20
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart primary linux-swap 21697,116,21
23227,61,35
7. Create primary partition 4 using the start address obtained in Step 5 and an end
address of 100%:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart primary ext4 23227,61,36 100%
Partition 4 stores HDFS data, and this syntax makes the partition as large as
possible.
8. Set the boot flag:
# parted -s /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn set 1 boot
9. Set the RAID flags:

# parted -s /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn set 1 raid
10. Clear the names, using parted in interactive mode:

# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn
GNU Parted 1.8.1

Using /dev/sdn
Welcome to GNU Parted! Type 'help' to view a list of commands.
(parted) name 1 " "
(parted) name 2 " "
(parted) name 3 " "
(parted) quit
11. Complete the steps in "Repairing the RAID Arrays" on page 12-13.

To partition a logical drive for Oracle Linux 5:
2. Confirm that the new disk does not have a partition table:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s print
You should see a message about a missing partition table.

3. If the parted command displays a partition table, then clear it:
# dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn bs=1M count=100

Tip: You can use this command to restart an operating system disk
configuration, if you make a mistake.
4. Create the partition table:

# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mklabel gpt print
5. List the Cylinder, Head, Sector (CHS) partition information of the surviving disk.
Thus, if you are partitioning /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0, then enter
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1 for /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sm in the following
command:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sm -s unit chs print
Model: LSI MR9261-8i (scsi)

Disk /dev/sda: 243031,30,6
Sector size (logical/physical): 512B/512B
BIOS cylinder,head,sector geometry: 243031,255,63. Each cylinder is 8225kB.
Partition Table: gpt
Number Start End File system Name Flags

1 0,0,34 25,127,7 ext3 raid
2 25,127,8 21697,116,20 ext3 raid
3 21697,116,21 23227,61,35 linux-swap
4 23227,61,36 243031,29,36 ext3 primary
6. Create partitions 1 to 3 on the new drive by duplicating the partitions of the

surviving disk. Issue three commands in this format:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart file_system start end
Use the start and end addresses that you obtained in Step 5 instead of the
addresses shown in the following example:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart ext3 0,0,34 25,127,7
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart ext3 25,127,8 21697,116,20
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart linux-swap 21697,116,21 23227,61,35
7. Create primary partition 4 using the start address obtained in Step 5 and an end
address of 100%:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mkpart primary ext3 23227,61,36 100%
Partition 4 stores HDFS data, and this syntax makes the partition as large as
possible.
8. Set the RAID flags:
9. Clear the names, using parted in interactive mode:

# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn
GNU Parted 1.8.1

Using /dev/sdn
Welcome to GNU Parted! Type 'help' to view a list of commands.
(parted) name 1 " "
(parted) name 2 " "

(parted) name 3 " "

(parted) quit
10. Complete the steps in "Repairing the RAID Arrays" on page 12-13.
Repairing the RAID Arrays

After partitioning the disks, you can repair the two logical RAID arrays:
/dev/md0 contains /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0p1 and
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1p1. It is mounted as /boot.
/dev/md2 contains /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s0p2 and
/dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1p2. It is mounted as / (root).
Caution: Do not dismount the /dev/md devices, because that action

shuts down the system.
To repair the RAID arrays:

1. Remove the partitions from the RAID arrays:
# mdadm /dev/md0 -r detached
# mdadm /dev/md2 -r detached
2. Verify that the RAID arrays are degraded:

3. Verify that the degraded file for each array is set to 1:

# cat /sys/block/md0/md/degraded
1
# cat /sys/block/md2/md/degraded
1
4. Restore the partitions to the RAID arrays:

# mdadm -add /dev/md0 /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/snp1
# mdadm -add /dev/md2 /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/snp2
5. Check that resynchronization is started, so that /dev/md2 is in a state of recovery

and not idle:
# cat /sys/block/md2/md/sync_action
repair
6. To verify that resynchronization is proceeding, you can monitor the mdstat file. A
counter identifies the percentage complete.
# cat /proc/mdstat
Personalities : [raid1]
md0 : active raid1 sdb1[1] sda1[0]
204736 blocks [2/2] [UU]

174079936 blocks [2/1] [U_]
[============>........] recovery = 61.6% (107273216/174079936)
finish=18.4min speed=60200K/sec

The following output shows that synchronization is complete:

Personalities : [raid1]
204736 blocks [2/2] [UU]

174079936 blocks [2/2] [UU]
unused devices: <none>
7. Display the content of /etc/mdadm.conf:

# cat /etc/mdadm.conf
# mdadm.conf written out by anaconda

DEVICE partitions
MAILADDR root
ARRAY /dev/md0 level=raid1 num-devices=2 UUID=df1bd885:c1f0f9c2:25d6...
ARRAY /dev/md2 level=raid1 num-devices=2 UUID=6c949a1a:1d45b778:a6da...
8. Compare the output of the following command with the content of

/etc/mdadm.conf from Step 7:
# mdadm --examine --brief --scan --config=partitions
9. If the UUIDs in the file are different from UUIDs in the output of the mdadm
command:
a. Open /etc/mdadm.conf in a text editor.
b. Select from ARRAY to the end of the file, and delete the selected lines.
c. Copy the output of the command into the file where you deleted the old lines.
d. Save the modified file and exit.
10. Complete the steps in "Formatting the HDFS Partition of an Operating System
Disk" on page 12-14.
Formatting the HDFS Partition of an Operating System Disk

Partition 4 (sda4) on an operating system disk is used for HDFS. After you format the
partition and set the correct label, HDFS rebalances the job load to use the partition if
the disk space is needed.
To format the HDFS partition:
1. Format the HDFS partition as an ext4 file system:
# mkfs -t ext4 /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/snp4
Note: If this command fails because the device is mounted, then

dismount the drive now and skip step 3. See "Prerequisites for
Replacing a Failing Disk" on page 12-3 for dismounting instructions.
2. Verify that the partition label (such as /u01 for s0p4) is missing:
# ls -l /dev/disk/by-label

3. Dismount the appropriate HDFS partition, either /u01 for /dev/sda, or /u02 for
/dev/sdb:
# umount /u0n
4. Reset the partition label:

# tune2fs -c -1 -i 0 -m 0.2 -L /u0n /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/snp4
5. Mount the HDFS partition:

# mount /u0n
6. Complete the steps in "Restoring the Swap Partition" on page 12-15.
Restoring the Swap Partition

After formatting the HDFS partition, you can restore the swap partition.
To restore the swap partition:
1. Set the swap label:
# mkswap -L SWAP-sdn3 /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/snp3
Setting up swapspace version 1, size = 12582907 kB
LABEL=SWAP-sdn3, no uuid
2. Verify that the swap partition is restored:

# bdaswapon; bdaswapoff
Filename Type Size Used Priority
/dev/sda3 partition 12287992 0 1
/dev/sdb3 partition 12287992 0 1
3. Verify that the replaced disk is recognized by the operating system:

$ ls -l /dev/disk/by-label
total 0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 BDAUSB -> ../../sdn1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 BDAUSBBOOT -> ../../sdm1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 SWAP-sda3 -> ../../sda3
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 SWAP-sdb3 -> ../../sdb3
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 u01 -> ../../sda4
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 u02 -> ../../sdb4
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 u03 -> ../../sdc1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 u04 -> ../../sdd1
.
.
.
4. If the output does not list the replaced disk:

On Linux 5, run udevtrigger.
On Linux 6, run udevadm trigger.
Then repeat step 3. The lsscsi command should also report the correct order of
the disks.
5. Complete the steps in "Restoring the GRUB Master Boot Records and HBA Boot
Order" on page 12-16.

Restoring the GRUB Master Boot Records and HBA Boot Order
After restoring the swap partition, you can restore the Grand Unified Bootloader
(GRUB) master boot record.
The device.map file maps the BIOS drives to operating system devices. The following
is an example of a device map file:
# this device map was generated by anaconda
(hd0) /dev/sda
(hd1) /dev/sdb
However, the GRUB device map does not support symbolic links, and the mappings in
the device map might not correspond to those used by /dev/disk/by-hba-slot. The
following procedure explains how you can correct the device map if necessary.
To restore the GRUB boot record:
1. Check which kernel device the drive is using in slot1
# ls -ld /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 9 Apr 22 12:54 /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s1 -> ../../sdb
2. If the output displays/dev/sdb as shown in step 1, then proceed to the next step
(open GRUB).
If another device is displayed, such as /dev/sdn, then you must first set hd1 to
point to the correct device:
a. Make a copy of the device.map file:
# cd /boot/grub
# cp device.map mydevice.map
# ls -l *device*
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 85 Apr 22 14:50 device.map
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 85 Apr 24 09:24 mydevice.map
b. Edit mydevice.map to point hd1 to the new device. In this example, s1 pointed
to /deb/sdn in step 1.
# more /boot/grub/mydevice.map
# this device map was generated by bda install
(hd0) /dev/sda
(hd1) /dev/sdn
c. Use the edited device map (mydevice.map) in the remaining steps.

3. Open GRUB, using either device.map as shown, or the edited mydevice.map:
# grub --device-map=/boot/grub/device.map
GNU GRUB version 0.97 (640K lower / 3072K upper memory)
[ Minimal BASH-like line editing is supported. For the first word, TAB
lists possible command completions. Anywhere else TAB lists the possible
completions of a device/filename.
]
4. Set the root device, entering hd0 for /dev/sda, or hd1 for /dev/sdb:
grub> root (hdn,0)
root (hdn,0)
Filesystem type is ext2fs, partition type 0x83

5. Install GRUB, entering hd0 for /dev/sda, or hd1 for /dev/sdb:

grub> setup (hdn)
setup (hdn)
Checking if "/boot/grub/stage1" exists... no
Checking if "/grub/stage1" exists... yes
Checking if "/grub/stage2" exists... yes
Checking if "/grub/e2fs_stage1_5" exists... yes
Running "embed /grub/e2fs_stage1_5 (hdn)"... failed (this is not fatal)
Running "embed /grub/e2fs_stage1_5 (hdn,0)"... failed (this is not fatal)
Running "install /grub/stage1 (hdn) /grub/stage2 p /grub/grub.conf "...
succeeded
Done.
6. Close the GRUB command-line interface:

grub> quit
7. Ensure that logical drive L0 (L + zero) is set as the boot drive in the HBA:
# MegaCli64 -AdpBootDrive -get a0
Adapter 0: Boot Virtual Drive - #0 (target id - 0).
8. If the previous command does not report L0 or virtual drive 0 target 0, then enter:
# MegaCli64 AdpBootDrive set L0 a0
9. Ensure that the auto-select boot drive feature is enabled:

# MegaCli64 adpBIOS EnblAutoSelectBootLd a0
Auto select Boot is already Enabled on Adapter 0.
10. Check the configuration. See "Verifying the Disk Configuration" on page 12-19.

Complete the following instructions for any disk that is not used by the operating
system. See "Identifying the Function of a Disk Drive" on page 12-9.
To configure a disk, you must partition and format it.
Note: Replace snp1 in the following commands with the appropriate

symbolic name, such as s4p1.
To format a disk for use by HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database:

1. Complete the steps in "Replacing a Disk Drive" on page 12-6, if you have not done
so already.
2. Partition the drive:
# parted /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/sn -s mklabel gpt mkpart primary ext4 0% 100%
3. Format the partition for an ext4 file system:

# mkfs -t ext4 /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/snp1
4. Reset the appropriate partition label to the missing device. See Table 122.
# tune2fs -c -1 -i 0 -m 0.2 -L /unn /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/snp1

For example, this command resets the label for /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s2p1 to

/u03:
# tune2fs -c -1 -i 0 -m 0.2 -L /u03 /dev/disk/by-hba-slot/s2p1
Setting maximal mount count to -1
Setting interval between checks to 0 seconds
Setting reserved blocks percentage to 0.2% (976073 blocks)
5. Verify that the replaced disk is recognized by the operating system:

$ ls -l /dev/disk/by-label
total 0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 BDAUSB -> ../../sdn1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 BDAUSBBOOT -> ../../sdm1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 SWAP-sda3 -> ../../sda3
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 SWAP-sdb3 -> ../../sdb3
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 u01 -> ../../sda4
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 u02 -> ../../sdb4
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 u03 -> ../../sdc1
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 10 Aug 3 01:22 u04 -> ../../sdd1
.
.
.
6. If the output does not list the replaced disk:

On Linux 5, run udevtrigger.
On Linux 6, run udevadm trigger.
Then repeat step 5. The lsscsi command should also report the correct order of
the disks.
7. Mount the HDFS partition, entering the appropriate mount point:
# mount /unn
For example, mount /u03.

8. If you are configuring multiple drives, then repeat the previous steps.
9. If you previously removed a mount point in Cloudera Manager for an HDFS
drive, then restore it to the list.
a. Open a browser window to Cloudera Manager. For example:
b. Open Cloudera Manager and log in as admin.
c. On the Services page, click hdfs
d. Click the Instances subtab.
e. In the Host column, locate the server with the replaced disk. Then click the
service in the Name column, such as datanode, to open its page.
f. Click the Configuration subtab.
g. If the mount point is missing from the Directory field, then add it to the list.
h. Click Save Changes.
i. From the Actions list, choose Restart.
10. Check the configuration. See "Verifying the Disk Configuration" on page 12-19.


Before you can reinstall the Oracle Big Data Appliance software on the server, you
must verify that the configuration is correct on the new disk drive.
To verify the disk configuration:
1. Check the software configuration:
# bdachecksw
2. If there are errors, then redo the configuration steps as necessary to correct the
problem.
3. Check the /root directory for a file named BDA_REBOOT_SUCCEEDED.
4. If you find a file named BDA_REBOOT_FAILED, then read the file to identify and fix
any additional problems.
5. Use this script to generate a BDA_REBOOT_SUCCEEDED file:
# /opt/oracle/bda/lib/bdastartup.sh
6. Verify that BDA_REBOOT_SUCCEEDED exists. If you still find a BDA_REBOOT_FAILED

file, then redo the previous steps.


13
Oracle Big Data Appliance Utilities
13
This chapter describes the utilities available on Oracle Big Data Appliance. Most of the
utilities are for monitoring the health of the hardware and the network.
bdacheckcluster
bdacheckhw
bdacheckib
bdachecknet
bdachecksw
bdaclustersynctime
bdacli
bdaclustersynctime
bdadiag
bdadiagcluster
bdagetclientconfig
bdaid
bdaimagevalidate
bdanodedesc
bdaredoclientnet
bdaserials
bdaswapoff
bdaswapon
bdaupdatefw
iblinkinfo
imagehistory
imageinfo
listlinkup
mount_hadoop_dirs
remove-root-ssh
reset-boot-order
Oracle Big Data Appliance Utilities 13-1

setup-root-ssh
showusb
showvlan
showvnics

bdacheckcluster
bdacheckcluster
Checks the health of a CDH cluster, including the software, hardware, and network,
and logs the results in a file in the /tmp directory.
To also run the CDH cluster health checks, enter the Cloudera Manager admin
password in response to the prompt. If you do not enter the password, then these
checks are skipped.
Syntax
13
bdacheckcluster
Notes13
If the cluster is protected by Kerberos authentication, then you must obtain a ticket for
the hdfs user before running bdacheckcluster.
To obtain a ticket for hdfs:
1. Add the hdfs user to the key distribution center (KDC), using this kadmin
command:
addprinc hdfs@REALM_NAME
2. Request the ticket as hdfs:

$ su hdfs -c "kinit hdfs@REALM_NAME"
Example 13
This example shows the output from the utility:

# bdacheckcluster
INFO: Logging results to /tmp/bdacheckcluster_1373393815/
Enter CM admin password to enable check for CM services and hosts
SUCCESS: Mammoth configuration file is valid.
SUCCESS: hdfs is in good health
SUCCESS: mapreduce is in good health
SUCCESS: oozie is in good health
SUCCESS: zookeeper is in good health
SUCCESS: hive is in good health
SUCCESS: hue is in good health
SUCCESS: Cluster passed checks on all hadoop services health check
SUCCESS: bda1node01.example.com is in good health
.
.
.
SUCCESS: Cluster passed checks on all hosts health check
SUCCESS: All cluster host names are pingable
SUCCESS: All cluster hosts passed checks on last reboot
INFO: Starting cluster host hardware checks
SUCCESS: All cluster hosts pass hardware checks
INFO: Starting cluster host software checks
SUCCESS: All cluster hosts pass software checks

bdacheckcluster
SUCCESS: All ILOM hosts are pingable

SUCCESS: All client interface IPs are pingable
SUCCESS: All admin eth0 interface IPs are pingable
SUCCESS: All private Infiniband interface IPs are pingable
SUCCESS: All cluster hosts resolve public hostnames to private IPs
.
.
.
INFO: Checking local reverse DNS resolve of private IPs on all cluster hosts
SUCCESS: All cluster hosts resolve private IPs to public hostnames
SUCCESS: 2 virtual NICs available on all cluster hosts
SUCCESS: NTP service running on all cluster hosts
SUCCESS: At least one valid NTP server accessible from all cluster servers.
SUCCESS: Max clock drift of 0 seconds is within limits
SUCCESS: Big Data Appliance cluster health checks succeeded

bdacheckhw
bdacheckhw
Checks the hardware profile of the server.
Syntax
13
bdacheckhw
Usage Notes
13
See "Configuring the Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers" on page 7-19 for tips about
using this utility.
Example 13

# bdacheckhw
SUCCESS: Found BDA v2 server : SUN FIRE X4270 M3
SUCCESS: Correct processor info : Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU E5-2660 0 @ 2.20GHz
SUCCESS: Correct number of types of CPU : 1
SUCCESS: Correct number of CPU cores : 32
SUCCESS: Sufficient GB of memory (>=63): 63
SUCCESS: Correct BIOS vendor : American Megatrends Inc.
SUCCESS: Sufficient BIOS version (>=08080102): 18021300
SUCCESS: Recent enough BIOS release date (>=05/23/2011):06/19/2012
SUCCESS: Correct ILOM major version : 3.1.2.12
SUCCESS: Sufficient ILOM minor version (>=74388): 74388
SUCCESS: Correct number of fans : 4
SUCCESS: Correct fan 0 status : ok
SUCCESS: Correct fan 1 status : ok
.
.
.
SUCCESS: Big Data Appliance hardware validation checks succeeded

bdacheckib
bdacheckib
Checks the InfiniBand cabling between the servers and switches of a single rack, when
entered with no options.
Run this command after connecting as root to any server.
Syntax
13
bdacheckib [parameter]
Parameters
13
-s
The same as running without options except that the network must still be configured
with the factory default settings. You can use this option as soon as Oracle Big Data
Appliance arrives at the site, even before the switches are configured.
-m json_file
Verifies that the InfiniBand switch-to-switch cabling among multiple ranks is correct.
To create json_file, see the -g option.
-g
Generates a sample JSON file named sample-multi-rack.json. Use this file as an
example of the format required by the -m option.
Usage Notes
13
The network must be configured with custom settings as described by

/opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json.
Examples 13
This example checks the switch-to-server InfiniBand cables:

[root@node01 network]# bdacheckib
LINK bda1sw-ib3.15A ... bda1node02.HCA-1.2 UP
LINK bda1sw-ib3.15B ... bda1node01.HCA-1.2 UP
LINK bda1sw-ib3.14A ... bda1node04.HCA-1.2 UP
LINK bda1sw-ib3.14B ... bda1node03.HCA-1.2 UP
.
.
.
The next example generates the JSON file and shows the output.
[root@bda1node01 bda]# bdacheckib -g
[root@bda1node01 bda]# cat sample-multi-rack.json
# This json multirack spec is generated. The array elements are sorted
# alphabetically. A properly arranged json spec representing racks from left to right
# can be used as input to bdacheckib (bdacheckib -m multi-rack.json)
# Note commas separating rack elements are optional.
[
{"SPINE_NAME": "bda1sw-ib1", "LEAF1_NAME": "bda1sw-ib2", "LEAF2_NAME": "bda1sw-ib3"}
{"SPINE_NAME": "bda2sw-ib1", "LEAF1_NAME": "bda2sw-ib2", "LEAF2_NAME": "bda2sw-ib3"}
{"SPINE_NAME": "dm01sw-ib1", "LEAF1_NAME": "dm01sw-ib2", "LEAF2_NAME": "dm01sw-ib3"}

bdacheckib
The final example checks all the racks on the InfiniBand network using the edited
JSON file created in the previous example:
# bdacheckib -m sample-multi-rack.json
Rack #1 leaf to spines topology check

leaf: bda1sw-ib2
expected 2 links to rack 1, found 4 OK
leaf: bda1sw-ib3
.
.
.
Rack #1 cabling details

leaf: bda1sw-ib2
LINK ... to rack2 ......... UP
.
.
.

bdachecknet
bdachecknet
Checks whether the network configuration is working properly.
Syntax
13
bdachecknet
Usage Notes
13
Run this command after connecting as root to any server.
Example 13

[root@node01 network]# bdachecknet
bdachecknet: analyse /opt/oracle/bda/BdaDeploy.json
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: checking for BdaExpansion.json
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test admin network resolve and reverse resolve
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test admin name array matches ip array
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test client network (eoib) resolve and reverse resolve
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test client name array matches ip array
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test ntp servers
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: ping client gateway
bdachecknet: passed
bdachecknet: test arp -a
bdachecknet: passed

bdachecksw
bdachecksw
Checks the software profile of a server.
Syntax
13
bdachecksw
Usage Notes
13
See "Configuring the Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers" on page 7-19 for tips about
using this utility.
Example 13

# bdachecksw
SUCCESS: Correct OS disk s0 partition info : 1 ext3 raid 2 ext3 raid 3 linux-swap
4 ext3 primary
SUCCESS: Correct OS disk s1 partition info : 1 ext3 raid 2 ext3 raid 3 linux-swap
4 ext3 primary
SUCCESS: Correct data disk s2 partition info : 1 ext3 primary
SUCCESS: Correct data disk s10 partition info : 1 primary
SUCCESS: Correct data disk s11 partition info : 1 primary
SUCCESS: Correct software RAID info : /dev/md2 level=raid1 num-devices=2 /dev/md0
level=raid1 num-devices=2
SUCCESS: Correct mounted partitions : /dev/mapper/lvg1-lv1 /lv1 ext4 /dev/md0
/boot ext3 /dev/md2 / ext3 /dev/sd4 /u01 ext4 /dev/sd4 /u02 ext4 /dev/sd1 /u03
ext4 /dev/sd1 /u04 ext4 /dev/sd1 /u05 ext4 /dev/sd1 /u06 ext4 /dev/sd1 /u07 ext4
/dev/sd1 /u08 ext4 /dev/sd1 /u09 ext4 /dev/sd1 /u10 ext4
SUCCESS: Correct matching label and slot : symbolic link to `../../sda4'
SUCCESS: Correct matching label and slot : symbolic link to `../../sdb4'
.
.
.
SUCCESS: Correct Linux kernel version 2.6-39-400.200 series : Linux 2.6.39-400.2
14.3.el6uek.x86_64
SUCCESS: Correct Java Virtual Machine version : HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server 1.7.0_
25
SUCCESS: Correct puppet version : 2.6.11
SUCCESS: Correct MySQL version : 5.5.35
SUCCESS: All required programs are accessible in $PATH
SUCCESS: All required RPMs are installed and valid
SUCCESS: Correct bda-monitor status : bda monitor is running
SUCCESS: Big Data Appliance software validation checks succeeded

bdaclustersynctime
bdaclustersynctime
Synchronizes the time of all servers in a cluster.
Syntax
13
bdaclustersynctime
Usage Notes
13
To use this utility, you must log in as root to the first server in the node. Passwordless
ssh must also be set up for the cluster. See the -C parameter for "setup-root-ssh" on
page 13-42.
This utility creates a log file named bdaclustersynctime.log in the directory
identified in the output.
Example 13
The following example successfully runs bdaclustersynctime:

# bdaclustersynctime
INFO: Logging results to /tmp/bdacluster_1373485952/
SUCCESS: At least one valid NTP server found
SUCCESS: No errors found syncing date and time on all nodes
SUCCESS: Sync date and time of cluster succeeded

bdacli
bdacli
The Oracle Big Data Appliance Command-Line Interface (bdacli) queries various
configuration files to return information about the rack, cluster, server, InfiniBand
network, and software patches.
The bdacli utility also adds and removes patches and optional services. It can migrate
critical services between critical nodes, and add and remove servers from a cluster.
The bdacli utility displays usage information if no parameters are included on the
command line or the values are undefined.
Syntax
13
bdacli action [parameters]
Actions
13
help
Displays general usage information for bdacli, a list of actions, and a list of supported
parameters for the getinfo action.
{add | remove} patch patch_number

Adds or removes a software patch on Oracle Big Data Appliance that matches patch_
number. You must log in as root to use add or remove.
admin_cluster parameter node_name

Enables you to administer the nodes in a cluster in response to a failing server.
Table 131 describes the parameters.
Table 131 bdacli admin_cluster parameters

Parameter Description
decommission Removes the specified node from the cluster and decommissions the
server in Cloudera Manager. It also updates the Mammoth files.
You can decommission a failing, noncritical node.
recommission Removes the node from the list of decommissioned nodes, and
recommissions the server in Cloudera Manager. Use this command after
decommissioning and repairing a failing server.
migrate Moves the services from a critical node to a noncritical node, and
decommissions the failing server in Cloudera Manager. You specify the
name of the failing critical node, and the utility selects the noncritical
node for the migration. When migration is complete, the new node has
all of the functionality of the original critical node.
You can only migrate a critical node, and should do so only when it is
failing.
reprovision Restores a server to the cluster as a noncritical node, and recommissions
the server in Cloudera Manager. Use this command after migrating the
services of a critical node and repairing the failing server.
{enable | disable} service

Enables or disables an optional software component on Oracle Big Data Appliance.
You must log in as root to use enable or disable.

bdacli
The bdacli command runs either mammoth or mammoth-reconfig, and so the results of
using bdacli are identical to using those utilities.
Table 132 describes the component parameters.
Table 132 bdacli enable or disable Service Parameters

asr Auto Service Request
auditvault Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall plugin
bdc Oracle Big Data Connectors
big_data_sql Oracle Big Data SQL
disk_encryption Automatically encrypts and decrypts data on disk and at rest
em Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control agent
kerberos Kerberos authentication; manual removal only
network_encryption Automatically encrypts data as it travels over the network. The
cluster must already be set up with Kerberos authentication.
sentry Apache Sentry authorization
{start | stop | restart | status} service

Starts, stops, restarts, or returns the current status of a service on a cluster or a specific
node.
Table 133 describes the service parameters.
Table 133 BDACLI start, stop, and restart Parameters

big_data_sql_cluster Oracle Big Data SQL on all nodes of the cluster
big_data_sql_server node_name Oracle Big Data SQL on a specified node of the
cluster.
Use bdacli with this parameter only from the first
node of the cluster, where the current config.json
file is stored.
getinfo [parameter]
Returns a list of getinfo parameters. If you include a parameter name in the
command, then getinfo returns information about that system component:
InfiniBand parameters: The bdacli command queries the InfiniBand fabric. See
"InfiniBand Parameters" on page 13-13.
Rack parameters: Describes a physical Oracle Big Data Appliance rack. The
bdacli command queries the current BdaDeploy.json configuration file for the
rack where the command executes. See "Rack Parameters" on page 13-13.
Cluster parameters: Describes a logical Oracle Big Data Appliance cluster. The
bdacli command queries the current config.json file for the Hadoop cluster
where the command executes. See "Cluster Parameters" on page 13-14.
Server parameters: Describes a server. The bdacli command queries the operating
system of the server where the bdacli command executes. See "Server Parameters"
on page 13-16.

bdacli
One-off patch parameters: Provides information about one-off patches. See

"One-Off Patch Parameters" on page 13-17
Parameter names that end with an "s" return lists. Boolean parameters return a string
of either true or false.
InfiniBand
13 Parameters
Table 134 describes the InfiniBand parameters for bdacli getinfo.
Table 134 InfiniBand Parameters

Parameter Returns
ib_bda_servers A list of all Oracle Big Data Appliance servers on the InfiniBand
fabric. The list contains the unqualified client host names, which
are sorted alphabetically. The list can include servers in multiple
racks that are cabled together.
ib_switches Lists the switches on the InfiniBand fabric, including the switch
name, Globally Unique Identifier (GUID), and type (GTW for a
gateway switch, or 36P for a spine switch). The list contains the
unqualified administration names, which are sorted
alphabetically by switch name. See "Examples" on page 13-17.
Rack
13 Parameters
Table 135 describes the rack parameters for bdacli getinfo.
Table 135 Rack Parameters

Parameter Returns
rack_admin_domain_name The administrative network domain name for the rack, such as
example.com. Because all cluster nodes must have the same
administrative domain name, the return value is also the
administrative network domain for all nodes in the cluster.
rack_domain_name The client network domain name for the rack, such as
example.com. Because all cluster nodes must have the same
client domain name, the return value is also the client network
domain for all nodes in the cluster.
rack_ib_switch_ips The IP addresses of the three InfiniBand switches in the rack in
this order: spine switch, first leaf switch (upper), second leaf
switch (lower)
rack_ib_switch_names The unqualified names of the three InfiniBand switches in the
rack in this order: spine switch, first leaf switch (upper), second
leaf switch (lower). For example, bda1sw-ib1, bda1sw-ib2, and
bda1sw-ib3.
rack_ilom_ips An ordered list of IP addresses of all Oracle ILOMs in the rack,
starting with the lowest server
rack_ilom_names An ordered list of host names of all Oracle ILOMs in the rack,
such as bda1node01-ilom and bda1node02-ilom, starting with
the lowest server
rack_ip_switch_ip The IP address of the Cisco Ethernet switch
rack_ip_switch_name The host name of the Cisco Ethernet switch, such as bda1sw-ip
rack_name The name of this rack, such as bda1
rack_pdu_ips An ordered list of IP addresses of PDUs in the rack, starting
with PDU-A

bdacli
Table 135 (Cont.) Rack Parameters

Parameter Returns
rack_pdu_names An ordered list of unqualified names of PDUs in the rack,
starting with PDU-A (such as bda1-pdua and bda1-pdub)
rack_serial_number The rack serial number
rack_server_admin_ips An ordered list of IP addresses on the administrative network of
all servers in the rack, starting with the lowest server
rack_server_admin_names An ordered list of host names on the administrative network of
all servers in the rack (such as bda1node01-adm,
bda1node02-adm, and so forth) starting with the lowest server
rack_server_ips An ordered list of IP addresses on the client network of all
servers in the rack, starting with the lowest server
rack_server_names An ordered list of host names on the client network of all
servers in the rack (such as bda1node01, bda1node02, and so
forth) starting with the lowest server
rack_server_priv_ips A list of IP addresses for ILOM devices in the rack
rack_server_priv_names The unqualified names of the ILOM devices in the rack (such as
bda1node01-priv, bda1node02-priv, and so forth)
Cluster
13 Parameters
The following tables describe the cluster parameters:
Table 136, " General Cluster Parameters"
Table 137, " Oracle Big Data Connectors Status Parameters"
Table 138, " Cluster Network Parameters"
Table 139, " Cluster Security Parameters"
Table 136 describes the general cluster parameters for bdacli getinfo.
Table 136 General Cluster Parameters

Parameter Returns
cluster_asr_installed true if Auto Service Request is configured for this cluster;
false otherwise
cluster_big_data_sql_ true if Oracle Big Data SQL is enabled for this cluster; false
enabled otherwise.
cluster_cdh_version The version of Cloudera's Distribution including Apache
Hadoop installed on this cluster, such as 4.5.0-ol6.
cluster_cm_server The Cloudera Manager address, including the server name
and port number, such as bda1node03.example.com:7180.
cluster_cm_version The version of Cloudera Manager running on this cluster,
such as 4.8.0-ol6.
cluster_em_enabled true if Oracle Enterprise Manger is configured for this
cluster; false otherwise
cluster_name The name of the cluster, such as cluster-c.
cluster_nosqldb_type The edition of Oracle NoSQL Database installed on this
cluster (community edition or enterprise edition), or
none if Oracle NoSQL Database is not installed.
cluster_nosqldb_version The version of Oracle NoSQL Database installed on the
cluster.

bdacli
Table 136 (Cont.) General Cluster Parameters

Parameter Returns
cluster_primary_host The unqualified host name of the server that hosts the
puppet master. The Mammoth utility was deployed from
this host, and any reconfiguration of the cluster must be
done while logged in to that server.
cluster_type The type of cluster, either hadoop or nosqldb.
cluster_version The software version installed on this cluster by the
Mammoth utility, such as 3.1.0.
Table 137 describes the cluster parameters related to Oracle Big Data Connectors for
bdacli getinfo.
Table 137 Oracle Big Data Connectors Status Parameters

Parameter Returns
cluster_bdc_installed true if Oracle Big Data Connectors is installed; false
otherwise
cluster_odi_enabled true if the Oracle Data Integrator agent is enabled; false
otherwise.
cluster_odi_version The version of Oracle Data Integrator agent installed on the
cluster.
cluster_oraah_version The version of Oracle R Advanced Analytics for Hadoop
installed on the cluster
cluster_oraloader_version The version of Oracle Loader for Hadoop installed on the
cluster
cluster_osch_version The version of Oracle SQL Connector for HDFS installed on
the cluster
cluster_oxh_version The version of Oracle XQuery for Hadoop installed on the
cluster
Table 138 describes the cluster network parameters for bdacli getinfo.
Table 138 Cluster Network Parameters

Parameter Returns
cluster_hosts_entries A list of /etc/hosts entries that you can append to the
/etc/hosts file on any device on the same InfiniBand fabric
as the Oracle Big Data Appliance cluster, to ensure that
Hadoop traffic uses the InfiniBand network. Do not add
these entries to a device on a different fabric.
Each entry is on a separate line with three parts: the
InfiniBand IP address, the full client host name, and the
short client host name.
cluster_ilom_ips An ordered list of IP addresses for the Oracle ILOMs in the
servers, starting with the first node in the cluster
cluster_ilom_names A list of unqualified host names on the administrative
network for the Oracle ILOMs in the servers, in order
starting with the first server in the cluster
cluster_node_ips The IP addresses on the client network of all nodes in this
cluster

bdacli
Table 138 (Cont.) Cluster Network Parameters

Parameter Returns
cluster_node_names The host names on the client network of all nodes in the
cluster, such as bda1node01
Table 139 describes the cluster security parameters for bdacli getinfo.
Table 139 Cluster Security Parameters

Parameter Returns
cluster_av_admin The name of the Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall
administration user. Returns an error if Audit Vault is not
configured for this cluster.
cluster_av_enabled true if Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall auditing is
enabled; false otherwise
cluster_av_port The port number that the Audit Vault server listens on.
Returns an error if Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall
is not configured on this cluster.
cluster_av_server The IP address of the Audit Vault server. Returns an error if
Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall is not configured
on this cluster.
cluster_av_service The database service name for the Audit Vault server.
Returns an error if Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall
is not configured on this cluster.
cluster_disk_encryption_ true if on-disk encryption of Hadoop data is enabled for
enabled this cluster; false otherwise
cluster_disk_encryption_ The type of on-disk encryption in use on the cluster. In this
type release, the only supported type is password.
cluster_hdfs_encryption_ true if network encryption of Hadoop data is enabled for
enabled this cluster; false otherwise
cluster_kerberos_enabled true if Kerberos security is enabled; false otherwise.
cluster_kerberos_kdc_hosts A list of key distribution center (KDC) hosts external to
Oracle Big Data Appliance. Returns an error if Kerberos is
not enabled.
cluster_kerberos_kdc_on_bda true if the Kerberos KDC is on Oracle Big Data Appliance;
false otherwise. Returns an error if Kerberos is not enabled.
cluster_kerberos_realm The Kerberos realm for the cluster. Returns an error if
Kerberos is not enabled.
cluster_sentry_enabled true if Sentry is configured on the cluster; false otherwise.
Server
13 Parameters
Table 1310 describes the server parameters for bdacli getinfo.
Table 1310 Server Parameters

Parameter Returns
server_mammoth_installed true if the Mammoth utility has deployed the Oracle Big Data
Appliance software on this server; false otherwise.
server_name The name of this server on the client network, such as
bda1node01.
server_os_version The version of Oracle Linux on this server, such as 6.4.

bdacli
One-Off
13 Patch Parameters
Table 1311 describes the one-off patch parameters for bdacli getinfo.
Table 1311 One-Off Patch Parameters

Parameter Returns
available_patches A list of valid patches available for installation. A valid patch
has a directory under /opt/oracle/bda/patches or
/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/patches that contains a file named
inventory.
installed_patches A list of patches already installed. An installed patch has a
directory in both /opt/oracle/bda/patches and
/opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/patches.
See Also
13
"Changing the Configuration of Optional Software" on page 10-10 for more

information about the optional services.
Examples
13
The following commands provide information about the optional software on the
cluster:
# bdacli getinfo cluster_bdc_installed
true
# bdacli getinfo cluster_odi_version
11.1.1.7.0
# bdacli getinfo cluster_disk_encryption_enabled

true
# bdacli getinfo cluster_disk_encryption_type
password
The following command lists all switches on the current InfiniBand fabric. In this
example, three Oracle Big Data Appliance racks are on the fabric with the standard
hardware configuration of one spine switch and two gateway switches each.
$ bdacli getinfo ib_switches
bda1sw-iba0 00:21:28:6c:c8:af:a0:a0 36P
bda1sw-ibb0 00:21:28:46:9e:3b:a0:a0 36P
bda1sw-ibs0 00:21:28:6c:c8:ae:a0:a0 36P
bda2sw-ib1 00:21:28:46:98:d3:a0:a0 36P
bda2sw-ib2 00:21:28:de:ae:4a:c0:a0 GTW
bda2sw-ib3 00:21:28:c3:70:9a:c0:a0 GTW
bda3sw-ib1 00:21:28:46:90:ee:a0:a0 36P
bda3sw-ib2 00:21:28:df:34:8a:c0:a0 GTW
bda3sw-ib3 00:21:28:df:0f:0a:c0:a0 GTW
bda4sw-ib1 00:21:28:e8:af:23:a0:a0 36P
bda4sw-ib2 00:10:e0:0c:48:a0:c0:a0 GTW
bda4sw-ib3 00:21:28:f4:82:ce:c0:a0 GTW
This example installs patch 1234:

$ bdacli add patch 1234

bdaclustersynctime
bdaclustersynctime
Uses network time protocol (NTP) to synchronize the time of all units in the cluster.
Syntax
13
bdaclustersynctime
Usage Notes
13
You must be logged in as the root user.
Example 13
The following example shows that the cluster is synchronized.

# bdaclustersynctime
INFO: Logging results to /tmp/bdacluster_1399300113/
SUCCESS: At least one valid NTP server found
SUCCESS: No errors found syncing date and time on all nodes
SUCCESS: Sync date and time of cluster succeeded

bdadiag
bdadiag
Collects diagnostic information about an individual server for Oracle Support.
Syntax
13
bdadiag [parameter]
Parameters
13
cm
Downloads diagnostics from Cloudera Manager. You must know the Cloudera
Manager admin password to use this parameter.
hadoop
Collects the CDH cluster logs from /var/log.
hdfs
Collects the output of a complete Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS) fsck check.
ilom
Gathers ILOM data using ipmitool. You cannot use ilom in the same command as
snapshot.
osw
Collects Oracle OS Watcher logs, which include historical operating system
performance and monitoring data. The output can consume several hundred
megabytes of disk space.
snapshot
Collects ILOM snapshot data over the network, and provides most useful output than
the ilom option. You must know the server root password to use this parameter. You
cannot use snapshot in the same command as ilom.
Return Value
13
The name of the compressed file in the /tmp directory where bdadiag stored the data.
The file name has the form bdadiag_server-name_server-serial-number_
date.tar.bz2.
The logs are organized in subdirectories, including the following:
asr
ilom
install
messages
net
raid
sysconfig
Usage Notes 13
You must be connected to the server as root.

The optional parameters instruct bdadiag to collect additional diagnostics. You can
enter the options together on the command line to collect the most information.

bdadiag
You run bdadiag at the request of Oracle Support and associate it with an open Service
Request (SR). See the Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide for details about
providing diagnostics to Oracle Support.
Example
13
This example shows the basic output from the utility:

# bdadiag
Big Data Appliance Diagnostics Collection Tool v4.0.0
Gathering Linux information
Skipping ILOM collection. Use the ilom or snapshot options, or login to

ILOM over the network and run Snapshot separately if necessary.
Generating diagnostics tarball and removing temp directory
===========================================================================
Done. The report files are bzip2 compressed in /tmp/bdadiag_bda1node0101_12
16FM5497_2014_01_18_06_49.tar.bz2
===========================================================================
The next example shows the additional output from the cm option.
# bdadiag cm
Getting Cloudera Manager Diagnostics

Password for the Cloudera Manager admin user is needed
Passwords match
Waiting for Cloudera Manager ...
Succeeded. Output in : /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/cm_commands.out
Collecting diagnostic data ...
{ "startTime" : "2014-09-07T14:18", "endTime" : "2014-09-06T14:18" }
Succeeded. Output in : /opt/oracle/BDAMammoth/bdaconfig/tmp/cm_commands_collectD
iagnosticData.out
Command ID is 526
.....
Command 526 finished after 30 seconds
Operation completed successfully
Diagnostic data successfully collected
Can be downloaded from URL
http://bda1node03.example.com:7180/cmf/command/526/download
Downloading diagnostic data ...
Original Cloudera Manager Diagnostics Bundle Name :
3609df48-4930-11e1-9006-b8ac6f8061c1.cluster1.20140907-18-59.support-bundle.zip
Data successfully downloaded and placed in /tmp/bdadiag_bda2node01_1408NM50AE_
2014_09_07_14_
18/3609df48-4930-11e1-9006-b8ac6f8061c1.AK00198532.cluster1.20140907-18-59.support
-bundle.zip
.
.
.
The next example shows the additional output from the snapshot option:

bdadiag
# bdadiag snapshot
Please enter Host OS root password required for snapshot: password
Gathering ILOM Snapshot data - please be patient, this may take a long time
snapshot running: Tue Sep 2 13:42:28 PDT 2014

Snapshot Collection completed.
Generating diagnostics tarball and removing temp directory
==============================================================================
Done. The report files are bzip2 compressed in /tmp/bdadiag_bda1node01_1143FMM06E_
2014_09_02_14_40.tar.bz2
==============================================================================

bdadiagcluster
bdadiagcluster
Creates a diagnostic bundle for the cluster.
Syntax
13
bdadiagcluster
Usage Notes
13
You must be logged in as the root user. To include the diagnostics provided by
Cloudera Manager, you must provide the Cloudera Manager password twice when
prompted for it.
Example 13
The following example creates a bundled zip file from the diagnostic zip files creates
on the servers in a six-node cluster. It does not include the Cloudera Manager
diagnostics.
# bdadiagcluster
Enter CM admin password to run dumpcluster
Enter password: Enter
Enter password again: Enter
INFO: Starting Big Data Appliance diagnose cluster at Mon May 5 07:34:03 2014
INFO: Logging results to /tmp/bdadiagcluster_1399300440.log
SUCCESS: Created BDA diagcluster zipfile on node bda01node01
SUCCESS: bdadiagcluster_1399300440.zip created
INFO: Big Data Appliance diagnose cluster complete at Mon May 5 07:34:48 2014
INFO: Please get the Big Data Appliance cluster diagnostic bundle at
/tmp/bdadiagcluster_1399300440.zip

bdagetclientconfig
bdagetclientconfig
Deploys the HDFS, MapReduce, and Hive client configuration files from Cloudera
Manager.
Syntax
13
bdagetclientconfig
Usage Notes
13

To deploy a new client configuration to all nodes of the cluster, use the dcli -C
command.
Example 13
This example shows the output from one node in the cluster:
# bdagetclientconfig
bdagetclientconfig : Download and deploy HDFS, Map-Reduce and Hive client

configuration files
Logging to /tmp/bdagetclientconfig-1368541073.out
Downloading HDFS and Map-Reduce client configuration zipfile
Downloading Hive client configuration zipfile
Deploying HDFS, Map-Reduce and Hive client configurations
Successfully downloaded and deployed HDFS, Map-Reduce and Hive client

configurations !

bdaid
bdaid
Returns information about an individual server.
If you need to contact Oracle Support about an issue with Cloudera's Distribution
including Apache Hadoop, then run this command first.
Syntax
13
bdaid
Usage Notes
13
Example 13

# bdaid
Server Hostname : bda1node09
Rack Serial Number : AK00023713
Server Serial Number : 1137FMM06Y
Appliance Name : bda1

bdaimagevalidate
bdaimagevalidate
Validates the hardware and software on a server by running bdacheckhw, and then
bdachecksw.
Syntax
13
bdaimagevalidate [startup]
Parameters
13
startup
Regenerates the bda_reboot_status and BDA_REBOOT_* files in /root, in addition to
performing the validation checks. Use this parameter if the checks fail after restarting
the server, such that either BDA_REBOOT_FAILED or BDA_REBOOT_WARNINGS exist, and the
issue is resolved. Do not use this parameter for the initial set of checks, that is, if
/root/bda_reboot_status does not exist.
Example 13
# bdaimagevalidate
SUCCESS: Found BDA v3 server : SUN SERVER X4-2L
SUCCESS: Correct processor info : Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU E5-2650 v2 @ 2.60GHz
SUCCESS: Correct number of types of CPU : 1
SUCCESS: Correct number of CPU cores : 32
SUCCESS: Sufficient GB of memory (>=63): 63
SUCCESS: Correct BIOS vendor : American Megatrends Inc.
SUCCESS: Sufficient BIOS version (>=08080102): 26010600
SUCCESS: Recent enough BIOS release date (>=05/23/2011):07/08/2013
SUCCESS: Correct ILOM major version : 3.1.2.32
SUCCESS: Sufficient ILOM minor version (>=82440): 82440
.
.
.
SUCCESS: Correct bda-monitor status : bda monitor is running
SUCCESS: Big Data Appliance software validation checks succeeded
SUCCESS: All Big Data Appliance validation checks succeeded

bdanodedesc
bdanodedesc
Displays the server name and IP address.
Syntax
13
bdanodedesc
Example
13
This example shows that the user is logged in to a BDA server named bda1node03
with an IP address of 192.168.40.61:
$ bdanodedesc
bda1node03 BDA 192.168.40.61 HCA-

bdaredoclientnet
bdaredoclientnet
Re-creates the virtual network interface cards (VNICs) for all servers in the rack and
spreads them across the available 10 GbE ports.
Syntax
13
bdaredoclientnet
Usage Notes
13
Log in to server 1 and change to the /opt/oracle/bda/network directory to run this

utility.
You must run this utility after changing the number of 10 GbE connections to a Sun
Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switch. See "Changing the Number of Connections
to a Gateway Switch" on page 11-12.
The bdaredoclientnet utility performs the following subset of tasks done by the
networksetup-two script during the initial configuration of Oracle Big Data Appliance:
Verifies that the administrative network is working, the InfiniBand cabling is
correct, and the InfiniBand switches are available
Determines how many 10 GbE connections are available and connects them to the
InfiniBand Gateway switches
Deletes all VNICs and re-creates them
Connects to each server and updates the configuration files
Restarts the client network and verifies that it can connect to each server using the
newly configured client network
Example 13
The following example shows the output from the bdaredoclientnet utility:
# cd /opt/oracle/bda/network
# bdaredoclientnet
bdaredoclientnet: check syntax and static semantics of
bdaredoclientnet: passed
bdaredoclientnet: ping servers by name on admin network
bdaredoclientnet: verify infiniband topology
bdaredoclientnet: start setup client network (10gigE over Infiniband)
bdaredoclientnet: ping both gtw leaf switches
bdaredoclientnet: verify existence of gateway ports
bdaredoclientnet: removing existing eoib setup for this server
Shutting down interface bondeth0: [ OK ]
Shutting down interface bondib0: [ OK ]
Shutting down interface eth0: [ OK ]
Shutting down loopback interface: [ OK ]
Disabling IPv4 packet forwarding: net.ipv4.ip_forward = 0
[ OK ]
Bringing up loopback interface: [ OK ]

bdaredoclientnet
Bringing up interface bondib0: [ OK ]

Bringing up interface eth0: [ OK ]
bdaredoclientnet: ping server ips on admin network
bdaredoclientnet: ping servers by name on admin network
bdaredoclientnet: test ssh server ips on admin network
.
.
.
bdaredoclientnet: check existence of default vlan for port 0A-ETH-1 on bda1sw-ib2
bdaredoclientnet: use existing default vlan for port 0A-ETH-1 on bda1sw-ib2
bdaredoclientnet: check existence of default vlan for port 0A-ETH-1 on bda1sw-ib3
bdaredoclientnet: use existing default vlan for port 0A-ETH-1 on bda1sw-ib3
bdaredoclientnet: apply eoib on each server
bdaredoclientnet: wait a few seconds for the network to restart on 10.111.22.001
bdaredoclientnet: wait a few seconds for the network to restart on 10.111.22.002
.
.
.
check and delete vNIC for bda1node02 on switch bda1sw-ib2
vNIC ID 757 deleted
IO Adapter for vNIC deleted
vNIC ID 707 deleted
IO Adapter for vNIC deleted
create vNIC eth9 bda1node02 on switch bda1sw-ib3
vNIC created
create vNIC eth8 bda1node02 on switch bda1sw-ib2
vNIC created
.
.
.
bdaredoclientnet: ping server ips on client network
bdaredoclientnet: test ssh server ips on client network
.
.
.
bdaredoclientnet: end setup client network

bdaserials
bdaserials
Returns the serial numbers and media access control (MAC) addresses for most
components of the Oracle Big Data Appliance server that you are connected to.
Syntax
13
bdaserials
Example
13

# bdaserials
Rack serial number : AK00023713
System serial number : 1137FMM0BY
System UUID : 080020FF-FFFF-FFFF-FFFF-7E97D6282100
Motherboard serial number : 0338MSL-1131BA2194
Chassis serial number : 1137FMM0BY
Memory serial numbers : 87948175 87949173 87948163 8794816B 87948130 87948176
Infiniband HCA serial number : 1388FMH-1122501437
Disk controller serial number : SV11713731
Hard disk serial numbers :
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1125L6M89X
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1125L6LFH0
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1125L6M94J
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1125L6LLEZ
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1125L6M5S2
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1125L6LSD4
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1127L6M58L
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1127L6R40S
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1125L6M3WX
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1125L6M65D
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1127L6NW3K
SEAGATE ST32000SSSUN2.0T061A1127L6N4G1
MAC addresses :
bondeth0 Ethernet : CE:1B:4B:85:2A:63
bondib0 InfiniBand : 80:00:00:4A:FE:80:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00
bond0 Ethernet : 00:00:00:00:00:00
eth0 Ethernet : 00:21:28:E7:97:7E
eth1 Ethernet : 00:21:28:E7:97:7F
eth2 Ethernet : 00:21:28:E7:97:80
eth3 Ethernet : 00:21:28:E7:97:81
eth8 Ethernet : CE:1B:4B:85:2A:63
eth9 Ethernet : CE:1B:4C:85:2A:63
ib0 InfiniBand : 80:00:00:4A:FE:80:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00
ib1 InfiniBand : 80:00:00:4B:FE:80:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00

bdaswapoff
bdaswapoff
Turns off swapping by the operating system.
Syntax
13
bdaswapoff
Usage Notes
13
The bdaswapoff utility disables both swap partitions on a server, which disables all
swapping by the operating system. This state persists when the server restarts; you
must run bdaswapon to restore swapping. Swapping is turned off by default to
improve performance and to allow high availability if a disk fails.
Use bdaswapoff instead of the Linux swapoff utility.
See Also 13
"bdaswapon" on page 13-31
Example 13
This example turns off swapping:

# bdaswapoff
#

bdaswapon
bdaswapon
Turns on paging and swapping by the operating system.
Syntax
13
bdaswapon
Usage Notes
13
Swapping is turned off by default to improve performance and the ability to recover
from disk failure.
Use bdaswapon instead of the Linux swapon utility.
See Also 13
"bdaswapoff" on page 13-30
Example 13
This example turns on swapping:

# bdaswapon
Filename Type Size Used Priority
/dev/sda3 partition 12287992 0 1
/dev/sdb3 partition 12287992 0 1

bdaupdatefw
bdaupdatefw
Updates the firmware of a particular component of a server, such as a replacement
disk drive.
Syntax
13
bdaupdatefw parameter
Parameters
13
-d N
Updates the LSI disk firmware for the specified disk (N). Each server has 12 disks,
which are numbered from 0 to 11.
-f
Specifies the file path to the firmware. If the path is omitted, then bdaupdatefw uses
the default firmware for the specified component from /opt/oracle/bda/firmware.
-h
Displays syntax and usage information for bdaupdatefw.
-i
Updates the Oracle ILOM firmware.
-l
Updates the LSI disk controller firmware.
-m
Updates the firmware for the Mellanox host channel adapter (InfiniBand card).
Usage 13
This utility is typically run by Oracle field engineers when installing or replacing
hardware components, which may not be factory-installed with a supported firmware
version. During a software installation, Mammoth copies the currently supported
firmware to Oracle Big Data Appliance. The bdaupdatefw command uses those files
when they are needed to update the firmware of a server component.
You can update one firmware package in a single command. Thus, you can specify
only one of the following parameters: -d, -i, -l, or -m.
Caution: Only use the firmware provided in a Mammoth bundle.

Do not attempt to install firmware downloaded from a third-party
site. Doing so may result in result in the loss of warranty and support.
See "Oracle Big Data Appliance Restrictions on Use" on page 1-4.
Examples 13
This example shows the output from a command to update the Oracle ILOM
firmware. To perform the update, you must execute the ipmiflash command provided
in the output.
# bdaupdatefw -i
[INFO:GENERAL] No firmware file specified. Using default firmware file - /opt/or

bdaupdatefw
acle/bda/firmware/ILOM-3_2_0_r74388-Sun_Fire_X4270_M3.pkg
[INFO:GENERAL] Updating ILOM firmware with the firmware file /opt/oracle/bda/fir
mware/ILOM-3_2_0_r74388-Sun_Fire_X4270_M3.pkg
[INFO:GENERAL] Original version is: 3.1.2.12 r74388
[INFO:GENERAL]
[INFO:GENERAL] Please run the following command and enter the root password
[INFO:GENERAL] for the ILOM when requested
[INFO:GENERAL]
[INFO:GENERAL] Note that this command will shutdown the server after flashing.
[INFO:GENERAL] You will need to login to the ILOM to power on the server afterwa
rds.
[INFO:GENERAL]
[INFO:GENERAL] ipmiflash -v -I lanplus -H 10.133.46.218 -U root write /opt/oracl
e/bda/firmware/ILOM-3_1_2_12_r74388-Sun_Fire_X4270_M3.pkg
[INFO:GENERAL]

iblinkinfo
iblinkinfo
Lists all InfiniBand connections in the InfiniBand network.
Syntax
13
iblinkinfo
Usage Notes
13
Run this command as root from any server.
Example 13
This example shows two Oracle Big Data Appliances and one Oracle Exadata
Database Machine on the InfiniBand network:
[root@bda1node01 network]# iblinkinfo
Switch 0x002128df348ac0a0 SUN IB QDR GW switch bda1sw-ib2 10.133.43.36:
149 1[ ] ==( 4X 10.0 Gbps Active/ LinkUp)==> 130 2[ ] "SUN IB QDR GW switch bda1sw-ib2 10.133...
149 5[ ] ==( 4X 10.0 Gbps Active/ LinkUp)==> 143 1[ ] "bda1node02 BDA 192.168.41.20 HCA-1" ( )
149 12[ ] ==( Down/Disabled)==> [ ] "" ( )
149 13[ ] ==( Down/Disabled)==> [ ] "" ( )
149 14[ ] ==( 4X 10.0 Gbps Active/ LinkUp)==> 85 9[ ] "SUN DCS 36P QDR dm01sw-ib1 10.133.40.203" ( )
149 15[ ] ==( Down/Disabled)==> [ ] "" ( )
.
.
.

imagehistory
imagehistory
Displays a history of operating system upgrades.
Syntax
13
imagehistory
Example
13
This example shows that the appliance was imaged with version 3.1.0 with an upgrade
to 4.0.0
$ imagehistory
Big Data Appliance Image History
IMAGE_VERSION : 3.1.0
IMAGE_CREATION_DATE : Tue Jun 24 06:44:22 UTC 2014
IMAGING_START_DATE : Sat Aug 30 18:15:01 UTC 2014
IMAGING_END_DATE : Sat Aug 30 14:59:39 EDT 2014
DEPLOYMENT_VERSION : 4.0.0
DEPLOYMENT_START_DATE : Sat Aug 30 15:18:07 EDT 2014
DEPLOYMENT_END_DATE : Sat Aug 30 16:39:07 EDT 2014

imageinfo
imageinfo
Displays information about the Oracle Big Data Appliance operating system image
currently running.
Syntax
13
imageinfo
Example
13
This example identifies the 4.0.0 image:

$ imageinfo
Big Data Appliance Image Info
IMAGE_CREATION_DATE : Sat Aug 30 13:55:26 EDT 2014

IMAGE_LABEL : BDA_MAIN_LINUX.X64_140829
IMAGE_VERSION : 4.0.0
LINUX_VERSION : Oracle Linux Server release 5.8
KERNEL_VERSION : 2.6.39-400.215.9.el5uek
BDA_RPM_VERSION : bda-4.0.0-1.el5
OFED_VERSION : OFED-IOV-1.5.5-2.0.0088
JDK_VERSION : jdk-1.7.0_65-fcs
HADOOP_VERSION : 2.3.0-cdh5.1.0

listlinkup
listlinkup
Shows the Ethernet bridge ports with active links.
Syntax
13
listlinkup
Usage Notes
13
Run this command after connecting as root to a Sun Network QDR InfiniBand
Gateway switch.
Example 13
This example shows three active ports (0A-ETH-1, 0A-ETH-3, and 0A-ETH-4) out of
the eight available ports on switch bda1sw-ib3:
[root@bda1sw-ib3 ~]# listlinkup | grep Bridge

mount_hadoop_dirs
mount_hadoop_dirs
Makes password-encrypted data accessible after the server is restarted. Until you run
this utility and enter the correct password, the data is unreadable.
Syntax
13
mount_hadoop_dirs
Example
13
This example shows the prompt for entering the password:

$ mount_hadoop_dirs
Enter password to mount Hadoop directories: password

remove-root-ssh
remove-root-ssh
Removes passwordless SSH previously established by the setup-root-ssh command.
Syntax
13
remove-root-ssh [-C | -c | -g | -j] [-p]
remove-root-ssh -h
Parameters
13
-C
Targets all servers in the cluster, using the list of servers in
/opt/oracle/bda/cluster-hosts-infiniband.
-c host1, host2,...
Targets the servers specified as host1, host2, and so forth, on the command line.
-g groupfile
Targets a user-defined set of servers listed in groupfile. You can enter either server
names or IP addresses in the file, one per line.
-j "etho0_ips[range]"
Specifies the range of servers in a starter rack [1-6] or a starter rack and expansion kit
[1-12]. This parameter is required in the 2.2.x base image when the utility is used
before network configuration.
-h
Displays Help.
-p password
Specifies the root password on the command line.
Oracle recommends that you omit this parameter. You will be prompted to enter the
password, which the utility does not display on your screen.
Usage Notes
13
You must know the root password to use this command.

If you do not specify the target servers, then remove-root-ssh uses all servers in the
rack.
See Also 13
"setup-root-ssh" on page 13-42, "Setting Up Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1
Example 13
This example shows passwordless SSH being removed:

# remove-root-ssh
calling /opt/oracle/bda/bin/dcli -c 192.168.42.37,192.168.42.38,192.168.42.39
--unkey
192.168.42.37: ssh key dropped

remove-root-ssh

remove-root-ssh succeeded

reset-boot-order
reset-boot-order
Resets the boot order of the server to the factory defaults, as specified in the BIOS. By
doing so, it clears any ILOM booting overrides.
Syntax
13
reset-boot-order
Example
13
The following example resets the boot order of the current server:
# reset-boot-order
Set Boot Device to none
Cleared ILOM boot override - Boot device: none
Found BDA v1 Hardware - setting boot order using biosconfig
Copyright (C) SUN Microsystems 2009.

BIOSconfig Utility Version 2.2.1
Build Date: Aug 24 2009
Build Time: 09:01:30
BIOSconfig Specification Version 2.4
Processing Input BIOS Data....
Success
Found USB device name : USB:02.82;01 Unigen PSA4000

.
.
.
BIOSconfig Specification Version 2.4
Processing Input BIOS Data....
Success
New BIOS boot order :
USB:02.82;01 Unigen PSA4000
RAID:Slot0.F0:(Bus 13 Dev 00)PCI RAID Adapter
PXE:IBA GE Slot 0100 v1331

setup-root-ssh
setup-root-ssh
Establishes passwordless SSH for the root user.
Syntax
13
setup-root-ssh [-C | -c | -g | -j] [-p]
setup-root-ssh -h
Parameters
13
-C
Targets all servers in the cluster, using the list of servers in
/opt/oracle/bda/cluster-hosts-infiniband.
-c host1, host2,...
Targets the servers specified as host1, host2, and so forth, on the command line.
-g groupfile
Targets a user-defined set of servers listed in groupfile. You can enter either server
names or IP addresses in the file, one per line.
-j "etho0_ips[range]"
Specifies the range of servers in a starter rack [1-6] or a starter rack and expansion kit
[1-12]. This parameter is required in the 2.2.x base image when the utility is used
before network configuration.
-h
Displays Help.
-p password
Specifies the root password on the command line.
Oracle recommends that you omit this parameter. You will be prompted to enter the
password, which the utility does not display on your screen.
Usage Notes
13
You must know the root password to use this command.

If you do not specify the target servers, then setup-root-ssh uses all servers in the
rack.
See Also 13
"remove-root-ssh" on page 13-39, "Setting Up Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1
Example 13
This example shows passwordless SSH being set up for root:

# setup-root-ssh
Enter root password: password
spawn /opt/oracle/bda/bin/dcli -c 192.168.42.37,192.168.42.38... -k
root@192.168.42.37's password:
root@192.168.42.38's password:

setup-root-ssh
.
.
.
192.168.42.37: ssh key added
192.168.42.38: ssh key added
.
.
.
setup-root-ssh succeeded

showusb
showusb
Shows the device location of an inserted USB drive as it is known to the operating
system, such as /dev/sdn.
Syntax
13
showusb

showvlan
showvlan
Lists the VLANs configured on the switch.
Syntax
13
showvlan
Usage Notes
13
Gateway switch.
Example 13
This example shows the default VLAN, which has an ID of 0, on switch bda1sw-ib3:
# showvlan
Connector/LAG VLN PKEY
------------- --- ----
0A-ETH-1 0 ffff
0A-ETH-2 0 ffff
0A-ETH-3 0 ffff
0A-ETH-4 0 ffff
1A-ETH-1 0 ffff
1A-ETH-3 0 ffff
1A-ETH-4 0 ffff

showvnics
showvnics
Lists the virtual network interface cards (VNICs) created for the switch.
Syntax
13
showvnics
Usage Notes
13
Gateway switch.
Example 13
This example shows the VNICs created in a round-robin process for switch
bda1sw-ib3:
# showvnics
ID STATE FLG IOA_GUID NODE IID MAC VLN PKEY GW
--- ----- --- ----------------- -------------------------------- ---- ----------------- --- ---- --------
561 UP N 0021280001CF4C23 bda1node13 BDA 192.168.41.31 0000 CE:4C:23:85:2B:0A NO ffff 0A-ETH-1
564 UP N 0021280001CF4C53 bda1node16 BDA 192.168.41.34 0000 CE:4C:53:85:2B:0D NO ffff 0A-ETH-1
567 UP N 0021280001CF4B58 bda1node01 BDA 192.168.41.19 0000 CE:4B:58:85:2A:FC NO ffff 0A-ETH-1
555 UP N 0021280001CF2A5C bda1node07 BDA 192.168.41.25 0000 CE:2A:5C:85:2B:04 NO ffff 0A-ETH-1
552 UP N 0021280001CF4C74 bda1node04 BDA 192.168.41.22 0000 CE:4C:74:85:2B:01 NO ffff 0A-ETH-1
558 UP N 0021280001CF179B bda1node10 BDA 192.168.41.28 0000 CE:17:9B:85:2B:07 NO ffff 0A-ETH-1
.
.
.

14
Executing Commands Across a Cluster Using
14
the dcli Utility
The dcli utility executes commands across a group of servers on Oracle Big Data
Appliance and returns the output. You use dcli in Chapter 7.
Overview of the dcli Utility
dcli Syntax
dcli Return Values
dcli Examples

The dcli utility executes commands on multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance servers
using the administrative (eth0) interface to make the connections. You can run the
utility from any server.
Setting Up Passwordless SSH

The dcli utility requires a passwordless Secure Shell (SSH) between the local server
and all target servers. You run the dcli utility on the local server, and the commands
specified in dcli execute on the target servers.
Two scripts facilitate the use of SSH on Oracle Big Data Appliance: setup-root-ssh
and remove-root-ssh. These scripts accept two options that are also used by dcli:
-C: Targets all the servers in a Hadoop cluster
-g: Targets a user-defined set of servers
See Table 141 for details about these options.
Note: The Mammoth and Mammoth Reconfiguration utilities require

remote root access. However, Oracle Big Data Appliance does not
require it for normal operation.
To set up passwordless SSH for root:

1. Connect to an Oracle Big Data Appliance server using PuTTY or a similar utility.
Select an SSH connection type.
2. Log in as root.
Executing Commands Across a Cluster Using the dcli Utility 14-1

3. Set up passwordless SSH for root across the rack:

setup-root-ssh
You see the message "ssh key added" from each server.
4. You can now run any ssh command on any server in the rack without entering a
password. In addition to dcli commands, you can use scp to copy files between
servers.
5. To remove passwordless SSH from root:
remove-root-ssh
See Also: Full parameter descriptions of setup-root-ssh on

page 13-42 and remove-root-ssh on page 13-39.
Basic Use of dcli

This topic identifies some basic options to the dcli command. For a complete list of
options, see Table 141.
Getting Help
To see the dcli help page, enter the dcli command with the -h or --help options. You
can see a description of the commands by entering the dcli command with no
options.
Identifying the Target Servers

You can identify the servers where you want the commands to run either in the
command line or in a file. For a list of default target servers, use the -t option. To
change the target servers for the current command, use the -c or -g options described
in Table 141.
You can manually create files with groups of servers to manage together. For example,
you might manage servers 5 to 18 together, because they have no special functions like
servers 1 to 4.
Specifying the Commands

You typically specify a command for execution on the target servers on the command
line. However, you can also create a command file for a series of commands that you
often use together or for commands with complex syntax. See the -x option in
Table 141.
You can also copy files to the target servers without executing them by using the -f
option.
Controlling the Output Levels

You can request more information with the -v option or less information with the -n
option. You can also limit the number of returned lines with the --maxlines option, or
replace matching strings with the -r option.
Following are examples of various output levels using a simple example: the Linux
date command.
Note: The output from only one server (node07) is shown. The
syntax in these examples executes the date command on all servers.

dcli Syntax
This is the default output, which lists the server followed by the date.
# dcli date
bda1node07-adm.example.com: Tue Feb 14 10:22:31 PST 2012
The minimal output returns OK for completed execution:

# dcli -n date
OK: ['bda1node07.example.com']
Verbose output provides extensive information about the settings under which the
command ran:
dcli -v date
options.nodes: None
options.destfile: None
options.file: None
options.group: dcservers
options.maxLines: 100000
options.listNegatives: False
options.pushKey: False
options.regexp: None
options.sshOptions: None
options.scpOptions: None
options.dropKey: False
options.serializeOps: False
options.userID: root
options.verbosity 1
options.vmstatOps None
options.execfile: None
argv: ['/opt/oracle/bda/bin/dcli', '-g', 'dcservers', '-v', 'date']
Success connecting to nodes: ['bda1node07.example.com']
...entering thread for bda1node07.example.com:
execute: /usr/bin/ssh -l root bda1node07.example.com ' date'
...exiting thread for bda1node07.example.com status: 0
bda1node07.example.com: Tue Feb 14 10:24:43 PST 2012]
dcli Syntax
dcli [option] [command]
Parameters
option
An option described in Table 141. You can omit all options to run a command on all
servers in the current rack.
command
Any command that runs from the operating system prompt. If the command contains
punctuation marks or special characters, then enclose the command in double
quotation marks.
The backslash (\) is the escape character. Precede the following special characters with
a backslash on the command line to prevent interpretation by the shell. The backslash
is not needed in a command file. See the -x option for information about command
files.
$ (dollar sign)
' (quotation mark)
< (less than)

dcli Syntax
> (greater than)

( ) (parentheses)
Table 141 dcli Options

Option Description
-c nodes Specifies a comma-separated list of Oracle Big Data Appliance
servers where the command is executed
-C Uses the list of servers in
/opt/oracle/bda/cluster-rack-infiniband as the target. See
"Identifying the Target Servers" on page 14-2.
-d destfile Specifies a target directory or file name for the -f option
-f file Specifies files to be copied to the user's home directory on the
target servers. The files are not executed. See the -l option.
-g groupfile Specifies a file containing a list of Oracle Big Data Appliance
servers where the command is executed. You can use either
server names or IP addresses in the file.
-h, --help Displays a description of the commands
-k Pushes the ssh key to each server's /root/.ssh/authorized_
keys file. See "Setting Up Passwordless SSH" on page 14-1 for an
easier alternative.
-l userid Identifies the user ID for logging in to another server. The
default ID is root.
--maxlines=maxlines Identifies the maximum lines of output displayed from a
command executed on multiple servers. The default is 10,000
lines.
-n Abbreviates the output for non-error messages. Only the server
name is displayed when a server returns normal output (return
code 0).
You cannot use the -n and -r options together.
-r regexp Replaces the output with the server name for lines that match
the specified regular expression
-s sshoptions Specifies a string of options that are passed to SSH
--scp=scpoptions Specifies a string of options that are passed to Secure Copy
(SCP), when these options are different from sshoptions
--serial Serializes execution over the servers. The default is parallel
execution.
-t Lists the target servers
--unkey Drops the keys from the authorized_key files of the target
servers
-v Displays the verbose version of all messages
--version Displays the dcli version number

dcli Examples
Table 141 (Cont.) dcli Options

Option Description
--vmstat=VMSTATOPS Displays the syntax of the Linux Virtual Memory Statistics
utility (vmstat). This command returns process, virtual memory,
disk, trap, and CPU activity information.
To enter a vmstat command, enclose its options in quotation
marks. For example:
--vmstat="-a 3 5"
See your Linux documentation for more information about

vmstat.
-x execfile Specifies a command file to be copied to the user's home
directory and executed on the target servers. See the -l option.
dcli Return Values

0: The command ran successfully on all servers.
1: One or more servers were inaccessible or remote execution returned a nonzero
value. A message lists the unresponsive servers. Execution continues on the other
servers.
2: A local error prevented the command from executing.
If you interrupt the local dcli process, then the remote commands may continue
without returning their output or status.
dcli Examples
Following are examples of the dcli utility.
This example returns the default list of target servers:
# dcli -t
Target nodes: ['bda1node01-adm.example.com', 'bda1node02-adm.example.com',
'bda1node03-adm.example.com', 'bda1node04-adm.example.com',
'bda1node09-adm.example.com']
The next example checks the temperature of all servers:

# dcli 'ipmitool sunoem cli "show /SYS/T_AMB" | grep value'

.
.
.

dcli Examples

15
Using Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager
51
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (Oracle ILOM) is a preinstalled component of

Oracle Big Data Appliance that you can use to monitor the servers and switches. You
use Oracle ILOM in Chapter 7.
Oracle ILOM Overview
Administrative Network Diagram
Oracle ILOM IP Addresses for Oracle Big Data Appliance Components
Connecting to Oracle ILOM Using the Network
Connecting to Oracle ILOM Using a Serial Connection
See Also:
For Sun Server X4-2L and Sun Server X3-2L servers, the Oracle
Integrated Lights Out Manager 3.1 documentation library at
For Sun Fire X4270 M2 servers, Oracle Integrated Lights Out
Manager 3.0 documentation library at
Oracle ILOM Overview

Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (Oracle ILOM) provides advanced service
processor (SP) hardware and software that you can use to manage and monitor the
servers and switches in an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack. Oracle ILOM dedicated
hardware and software is preinstalled on these components. It automatically initializes
as soon as power is applied.
Oracle ILOM enables you to actively manage and monitor servers in Oracle Big Data
Appliance regardless of the operating system state, providing you with a reliable
lights-out management (LOM) system.
With Oracle ILOM, you can proactively:
Learn about hardware errors and faults as they occur
Remotely control the power state of a server
View the graphical and nongraphical consoles
View the current status of sensors and indicators on the system
Using Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager 15-1

Determine the hardware configuration of your system

Receive generated alerts about system events in advance
The Oracle ILOM service processor runs its own embedded operating system and has
a dedicated Ethernet port, which together provide out-of-band management capability.
In addition, you can access Oracle ILOM from the server operating system (Oracle
Linux). Using Oracle ILOM, you can remotely manage Oracle Big Data Appliance as if
you were using a local KVM.
Oracle ILOM Interfaces

Oracle ILOM supports two interfaces for accessing its features and functions. You can
choose to use a browser-based web interface or a command-line interface.
Web Interface
The web interface enables you use a browser to log in to the SP, and then to perform
system management and monitoring.
Command-Line Interface
The command-line interface (CLI) enables you to operate Oracle ILOM using keyboard
commands. It adheres to industry-standard DMTF-style CLI and scripting protocols.
Oracle ILOM supports SSH v2.0 and v3.0 for secure access to the CLI. From the CLI,
you can reuse existing scripts and automate tasks using familiar interfaces.
Oracle ILOM Users

The Oracle Big Data Appliance servers are configured initially with only the root user.
The InfiniBand switches are configured with these additional users:
ilom-admin: Provides the write privileges needed to change the system
configuration, without the full power of root.
ilom-operator: Provides read-only privileges to monitor the system.
As root, you can create additional ILOM users if you want.

Figure 151 illustrates the administrative Oracle ILOM network. It shows two of the 18
servers and the two Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switches. The Cisco
Ethernet management switch is connected to the servers and the InfiniBand switches.

Figure 151 Administrative Network in Oracle Big Data Appliance
Ethernet
Switch
Oracle Big Data Oracle Big Data

Appliance Server Appliance Server
InfiniBand InfiniBand
Gateway Switch Gateway Switch
Oracle ILOM IP Addresses for Oracle Big Data Appliance Components

You require at least one static IP address for service processor (Oracle ILOM) access.
For the list of default Oracle ILOM IP addresses assigned to Oracle Big Data Appliance
components at the time of manufacturing, see "Factory Network Settings" on page 3-6.
After you reconfigure these IP addresses using Oracle Big Data Appliance
Configuration Generation Utility, you must use the reconfigured IP addresses to
access Oracle ILOM.

You can typically access Oracle ILOM using the network over an Ethernet connection.
You must know the Oracle ILOM Ethernet address. Before system configuration, the
address is the factory IP address setting. After system configuration, you can use either
the component name or the IP address listed in the Installation Template. You can use
either the CLI or the browser interface to access Oracle ILOM. Alternatively, you can
launch a remote KVM session.
Note: You can use this connection method when Oracle ILOM IP
addresses can be accessed over the network. Oracle recommends that
you use this connection method. See Chapter 7
This section discusses the following topics:

Connecting to the Command-Line Interface
Connecting to the Web GUI
Connecting to the Command-Line Interface

To connect to the Oracle ILOM command-line interface:
1. Open a secure shell (SSH) client, such as PuTTY.
2. In the Host Name (or IP address) field, enter the Oracle ILOM name or IP address
of the component to connect to. For example, before configuration, you might
enter the factory default IP address of 192.168.1.203 for a Sun Network QDR

InfiniBand Gateway switch. After configuration, you might enter the new IP
address or a name such as bda1sw-ib2.
3. Ensure that SSH is chosen as the Connection Type.
4. Type the user name and the password, when prompted. The default user name is
root, and the default password is welcome1.
The CLI command prompt (#) is displayed.
5. Enter help for a list of commands.
See Also: Oracle ILOM Daily Management -- CLI Procedures Guide at

Connecting to the Web GUI

To connect to the Oracle ILOM web interface:
1. Open a web browser and navigate to the Oracle ILOM name or the IP address of
an Oracle Big Data Appliance server or switch.
The login screen is displayed.
2. Enter your user name and password. See "Oracle ILOM Users" on page 15-2 for
the factory-configured user names. The initial password is welcome1.
Note: Use the passwd command to change the password.
3. Click Log In.
The web GUI is displayed, as shown in Figure 152.
Figure 152 Oracle ILOM 3.1 Web Interface

See Also:
Oracle ILOM 3.1 Quick Start at
Oracle ILOM 3.0 Daily Management Web Procedures Guide at

You servers: connecting to Oracle ILOM can connect to Oracle ILOM using a serial
connection if you are unable to access it using the network due to any of the following
problems:
Misconfiguration of the network
Misconfiguration of Oracle ILOM IP addresses
Misconfiguration of Cisco Ethernet switch ports
Sideband configuration issues
Connecting to the Oracle ILOM of a Server

To connect to Oracle ILOM of a server using a serial connection:
1. Attach a serial cable from a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software
to the SER MGT port of an Oracle Big Data Appliance server. The cable should be
15 feet or shorter.
2. Verify that your terminal or laptop is operational.
3. Configure the terminal device or the terminal emulation software to use the
following settings:
8N1: eight data bits, no parity, one stop bit
9600 baud (default, but can be set to any standard rate up to 115200)
Disable software flow control (XON/XOFF)
Disable hardware control
4. Verify that power is supplied to either PSU.
If power is supplied to either PSU, then Oracle ILOM is functional regardless of
the power state of the servers.
5. Press Enter on the terminal device. A connection between the terminal device and
Oracle ILOM is established.
The Oracle ILOM login prompt is displayed.
6. Log in to the CLI as root using the default password of welcome1.
The Oracle ILOM default command prompt is displayed.
Connecting to the Oracle ILOM of an InfiniBand Switch

To connect to Oracle ILOM of an InfiniBand switch using a serial connection:
1. Attach a USB-to-serial connector to the USB port of the switch.

2. Verify that your terminal or laptop is operational.

3. Configure the terminal device or the terminal emulation software to use the
following settings:
8N1: eight data bits, no parity, one stop bit
115200 baud
Disable software flow control (XON/XOFF)
Disable hardware control
4. Press the Return or Enter key on the serial device several times to synchronize the
connection.
You may see text similar to the following:
where nm2name is the host name of the management controller. The name
might be the word hostname.
Even if you do not see the text, go to Step 5.
5. Log in using the administrative user name and password (ilom-admin and
welcome1). The # prompt is displayed.
Note: If you do not see this output or prompt, there is a problem

with the serial configuration, the USB-to-serial connector, or the CLI.

Part V
Part V Appendixes
Part V provides reference information. It contains the following chapters:

Appendix A, "Error Messages for Oracle Big Data Appliance"
Appendix B, "Replacement Units"
Appendix C, "In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 and
X3-2"
Appendix D, "In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data Appliance"
Appendix E, "Multirack Cabling Tables"
A
Error Messages for Oracle Big Data Appliance
A
This appendix describes the hardware messages for Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Auto Service Request Alerts: DISKALRT-02001 to DISKALRT-02006

The following messages are Auto Service Request (ASR) alerts. ASR automatically
submits a service request to Oracle Support Services in response to these alerts.
Information is also written to the system logs.
DISKALRT-02001 System OS hard disk failure
Cause: A physical disk that is hosting the operating system failed or an operating
system RAID volume has lost redundancy. HDFS might also raise an alert.
Action: Replace the physical disk as soon as possible. Follow the instructions in
Chapter 12 for configuring an operating system disk.
DISKALRT-02002 System OS hard disk predictive failure

Cause: A physical disk that is hosting the operating system is in a state of
predictive failure.
Chapter 12 for configuring an operating system disk.
DISKALRT-02003 System OS hard disk poor performance

Cause: A physical disk that is hosting the operating system is performing poorly,
which indicates that it is failing.
Action: Plan to replace the disk. If multiple disk disks in a server are identified as
poor performers, then check for problems with the cable connections, the
controllers, and the disk backplane before replacing the disks. To replace a disk,
follow the instructions in Chapter 12 for configuring an operating system disk.
DISKALRT-02004 Data hard disk failure

Cause: A physical disk that is not hosting the operating system failed.
Chapter 12 for configuring a disk for either HDFS or Oracle NoSQL Database.
DISKALRT-02005 Data hard disk predictive failure

Cause: A physical disk that is not hosting the operating system is in a state of
predictive failure.
DISKALRT-02006 Data hard disk poor performance
Error Messages for Oracle Big Data Appliance A-1

Auto Service Request Alerts: DISKALRT-02001 to DISKALRT-02006
Cause: A physical disk that is not hosting the operating system is performing
poorly, which indicates that it is failing.
DISKALRT-02007 Solid-state drive disk failure

Cause: A solid-state drive failed.
Action: Replace the drive as soon as possible.
DISKALRT-02008 Solid-state disk predictive failure

Cause: A solid-state drive is in a state of predictive failure.
DISKALRT-02009 Solid-state disk poor performance

Cause: A solid-state drive is performing poorly, which indicates that it is failing.
A-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

B
BReplacement Units
This appendix lists the replacement units for the components in Oracle Big Data
Appliance racks. All replacement units are field replaceable units (FRUs), which are
installed by Oracle field engineers.
This appendix contains the following sections:
Understanding Repair Categories
Disk Controller Batteries
LED Status Descriptions
Parts for Oracle Big Data Appliance Servers
Parts for Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36
Parts for Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch
Parts for the Cisco Ethernet Switch
Parts for Power Distribution Units
Cables and Cable Accessories for an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack
See Also: "Spare Parts Kit Components" on page 1-3
Understanding Repair Categories

Repair categories describe the potential effects of a repair action. Table B1 describes
the categories and related actions.
Table B1 Oracle Big Data Appliance Repair Categories

Category Description Scenario Examples
Hot Swap (HS) The repair part is hot swappable and can Disks
be replaced without shutting down the
Fans
host system. Procedures may be needed
before and after replacement to protect the Power supplies
data.
Infrastructure Repair Repair of a connectivity component within External cables
(IR) an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack. No
InfiniBand switch
downtime of the rack is required; however,
individual components may require Ethernet switch
downtime.
Replacement Units B-1

Table B1 (Cont.) Oracle Big Data Appliance Repair Categories

Category Description Scenario Examples
BDA Server Offline Repair of the part requires shutting down System boards
(BDA-O) one Big Data Appliance server. No
PCIe cards
downtime of the rack is required; however,
individual servers may require downtime Memory
and temporary removal from the cluster.
Processors
Rebalancing the workload and data
duplication may temporarily affect
performance.
If the system is currently running, then
shut it down gracefully. See "Powering On
and Off Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
page 11-2 for additional information.
If you monitor the system using Oracle
Enterprise Manager Cloud Control, then
prevent unnecessary alerts by putting the
target in a blackout state. Refer to Oracle
Enterprise Manager Administration for
additional information.

The disk controllers in the servers have battery-backed write cache to accelerate write
performance. If the battery charge capacity degrades such that the battery cannot
protect the cached data for a power loss of 48 hours or more, then the write cache is
disabled and the disk controller switches to write through mode. This results in
reduced write performance but no data loss. The servers generate an alert when the
battery charge is insufficient, when the temperature is high, and when the battery
should be replaced.
Battery charge capacity degrades over time, and the life expectancy of a battery is
inversely proportional to the operating temperature. The worst-case life expectancy of
a battery in an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack is as follows:
Inlet Ambient Temperature Battery Lifetime

< 25 degrees Celsius (77 degrees Fahrenheit) 3 years
< 32 degrees Celsius (90 degrees Fahrenheit) 2 years
Oracle replaces failed batteries at no extra charge if the battery charge capacity in the
disk controllers falls below the minimum threshold. As part of Oracle Premier Support
for Systems, Oracle attempts to proactively replace the batteries in an Oracle Big Data
Appliance rack before the end of the estimated lifetime, on a best effort basis.

This section describes the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) in an Oracle Big Data
Appliance rack. It contains these topics:
Sun Server LEDs
Sun InfiniBand Switch LEDs
B-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

Sun Server LEDs

Table B2 identifies some LED status indicators on the Sun Server X4-2L and X3-2L
that can indicate a fault.
See Also: "About Server and Component Status Indicators" in the

Sun Server X4-2 Service Manual at
01/html/E38045/z4000be71405942.html#scrolltoc
Table B2 Sun Server LED Status Descriptions

Component LED Status
General Status The following LEDs are located on the front and back panels of each server:
Service Required (amber)
Off indicates normal operation.
Steady on indicates a fault in the server.
Power/OK (green)
Steady on indicates that the server is powered on.
A slow blink indicates that the server is starting up.
A steady blink indicates that standby power is on, but chassis power is
off.
Off indicates no AC power or an incomplete startup of Oracle ILOM.
Fans Each fan module has one bicolored LED, which you can see when the top
cover fan door is open.
Fan Status (amber/green)
Amber indicates that the fan module is faulty. The front and rear panel
Service Required LEDs are also lit when the system detects a fan
module fault.
Green indicates that the system is powered on, and the fan module is
functioning correctly.
Drives The following LEDs are located on the storage and boot drives:
Steady on indicates a fault in the drive.
OK/Activity (green)
Steady on indicates normal inactivity.
A steady blink indicates normal activity.
Off indicates that the power is off, or the system does not recognize the
drive.

Table B2 (Cont.) Sun Server LED Status Descriptions

Power supply The following LEDs are on each power supply. You can see them from the
back of the server.
Steady on indicates that the system has detected a problem in the
power supply regarding the voltage, current, temperature, or fans.
AC OK/DC OK (green)
Steady on indicates normal operation for both AC and DC power.
A slow blink indicates that input AC power is normal and output DC
power is disabled.
Off indicates no input AC power.
Sun InfiniBand Switch LEDs

Table B3 identifies some LED status indicators on Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch
36 and Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway switches that can indicate a fault.
See Also:
"Identifying LEDs" in the Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36
Service Manual at
01/html/E26434/z40000fe1394411.html
"Identifying LEDs" in the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway
Switch Service Manual at
01/html/E26706/z40000fe1394411.html
Table B3 Sun InfiniBand Switch LED Status Descriptions

Chassis The following LEDs are located on the left side of the rear panel.
Attention (amber)
Steady on indicates a fault.
Flashing indicates no function.
OK (green)
Steady on indicates normal operation.
Off indicates that the switch is off or initializing.
Link status The link status LEDs are located by the data cable connectors on the
rear panel.
Link (green)
Steady on indicates that a link is established.
Off indicates that the link is down.
Flashing indicates that there are symbol errors.

Table B3 (Cont.) Sun InfiniBand Switch LED Status Descriptions

Network The following LEDs are located on the network management connector
management ports on the rear panel.
Link Speed (amber/green):
Green steady on indicates a 1000BASE-T link.
Amber steady on indicates a 100BASE-T link.
Off indicates no link.
Activity (green):
Flashing indicates packet activity.
On indicates no function.
Off indicates no activity.
Power supply The following LEDs are located on the power supply at the front of the
chassis.
Attention (amber)
Steady on indicates a fault, and 12 VDC is shut down.
OK (green)
Steady on indicates 12 VDC.
Off indicates no DC voltage.
AC LED is green
Steady on indicates AC power is supplied.
Off indicates that AC power is not present.
Fan The following LED is located on the air inlet on the front of the chassis.
FT
On indicates a problem with the fan.
Off indicates normal operation

An Oracle Big Data Appliance rack contains Sun Server X4-2L, Sun Server X3-2L, or
Sun Fire X4270 M2 servers.
Note: Oracle Big Data Appliance ships with two spare drives. If a
drive is faulty, then the customer can replace the drive before an
Oracle service representative arrives if circumstances warrant
immediate action.
Table B5 lists the replaceable parts for the Sun Server X4-2L, which are covered under
the Oracle Premier Support for Systems warranty. Unless otherwise noted, the repair
procedures are in the Sun Server X4-2 Service Manual.

Table B4 Replacement Parts for a Sun Server X4-2L Server

Repair
Part Number Description Category Repair Procedure
150-3993 Battery, 3V, 390 MAH, LITH, BDA-O See "Servicing the Battery" at
COIN
01/html/E38145/z40000f91037456.html#scrol
ltoc
7090170 8 GB USB flash drive BDA-O See "Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives" at
01/html/E38145/ceiicfbd.html#scrolltoc
371-4985 6 Gigabit SAS RAID PCI battery BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See
module, RoHS:Y (LION), BBU-08 "Powering Off the Server for Orderly
Shutdown" at
01/html/E38145/z40002401396307.html#s
crolltoc
2. See Sun Storage 6 Gb SAS PCIe HBA,
Internal Installation Guide For HBA Models
SGX-SAS6-INT-Z and SG-SAS6-INT-Z
(internal only) at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19337-01/i
ndex.html
7047503 Niwot card BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See
"Powering Off the Server for Orderly
Shutdown" at
01/html/E38145/z40002401396307.html#s
crolltoc
2. See "Servicing PCIe Cards" at
01/html/E38145/z40000f91037409.html#s
crolltoc
7057184 Assembly Battery Carrier Remote HS Oracle internal service documentation
7082397 InfiniBand dual port, QDR CX3, BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See
HCA "Powering Off the Server for Orderly
Shutdown" at
01/html/E38145/z40002401396307.html#s
crolltoc
01/html/E38145/z40000f91037409.html#s
crolltoc

Table B4 (Cont.) Replacement Parts for a Sun Server X4-2L Server

Repair
375-3701 6 Gbps SAS RAID disk PCIe BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See
HBA, RoHS:Y "Powering Off the Server for Orderly
Shutdown" at
01/html/E38145/z40002401396307.html#s
crolltoc
01/html/E38145/z40000f91037409.html#s
crolltoc
Note: Do not run any controller commands
when replacing the disk.
7066826 Drive, 4TB, 3.5", SAS/7200 RPM, HS See "Servicing Storage Drives" at
CORAL
01/html/E38145/z40000091011460.html#scrol
ltoc
Do not run any controller commands when
replacing the disk.
7014391 SAS expander assembly BDA-O See "Servicing the SAS Expander Module" at
01/html/E38145/ceieidja.html#scrolltoc
7020486 DIMM, 8 GB, DDR3, 1600 MHz, BDA-O See "Servicing the DIMMs" at
1.3V
01/html/E38145/ceicjagi.html#scrolltoc
1.35V
7041013 DIMM, 32 GB, DDR3, BDA-O See "Servicing the DIMMs" at
RDIMM-1066, QUAD-RANK
7020774 Pregreased CPU heatsink BDA-O See "Servicing Processors" at
01/html/E38145/z40001d31037480.html#scrol
ltoc
7075289 CPU, Intel E5-2650 v2 8-core 2.6 BDA-O See "Servicing Processors" at
GHz
ltoc
7044130 Power supply, AC, A258, F, 12V, HS See "Servicing Power Supplies" at
1000W
ltoc
7045042 Dual counter rotating fan module, HS See "Servicing Fan Modules" at
80x80 mm
ltoc


Repair
7047257 12-slot backplane cable kit with BDA-O 1. Shut down the rack. See "Powering On and
the following: Off Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
page 11-2.
Disk drive flex cable
2. See "Servicing the Front and Rear Storage
Dual backplane power cable
Drive Backplanes" at
Single backplane power cable
Disk data cable, iPass+ HD to 01/html/E38145/z40007ac1419009.html#s
iPass+ HD, 600 mm crolltoc
7047768 12-slot 3.5" disk cage, including BDA-O 1. Shut down the rack. See "Powering On and
fan door, and left and right ear Off Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
assembly page 11-2.
01/html/E38145/z40007ac1419009.html#s
crolltoc
7049382 System board assembly, RoHS:Y BDA-O 1. Shut down the rack. See "Powering On and
Off Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
page 11-2.
2. "Servicing the Motherboard Assembly" at
01/html/E38145/z40001d31037512.html#s
crolltoc
Table B5 lists the replaceable parts for the Sun Server X3-2L, which are covered under
the Oracle Premier Support for Systems warranty. Unless otherwise noted, the repair
procedures are in the Sun Server X3-2L Service Manual.

Table B5 Replacement Parts for a Sun Server X3-2L Server

Repair
150-3993 Battery, 3V, 390 MAH, LITH, BDA-O See "Servicing the Battery" at
COIN
01/html/E27229/z40000f91037456.html#scrol
ltoc
Note: Rear storage drive 1 might be populated
with a remote battery module for the host bus
adapter (HBA) card. See "Remove a Rear
Storage Drive" at
01/html/E27229/bbggjgea.html#scrolltoc
7090170 8 GB USB flash drive BDA-O See "Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives" at
01/html/E27229/ceiicfbd.html#scrolltoc
371-4985 6 Gigabit SAS RAID PCI battery BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See
module, RoHS:Y (LION), BBU-08 "Powering Down the Server" at
01/html/E27229/z400061b1011735.html
(internal only) at
ndex.html
7047503 Niwot card BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See
"Powering Down the Server" at
01/html/E27229/z400061b1011735.html
01/html/E27229/z40000f91037409.html
7057184 Assembly Battery Carrier Remote HS See "Remove a Rear Storage Drive" at
375-3696 InfiniBand (CX2) dual port CX2 BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See
4x QDR PCI-e "Powering Down the Server" at
01/html/E27229/z400061b1011735.html
01/html/E27229/z40000f91037409.html


Repair
375-3701 6 Gbps SAS RAID disk PCIe BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See
HBA, RoHS:Y "Powering Down the Server" at
01/html/E27229/z400061b1011735.html
01/html/E27229/z40000f91037409.html
Note: Do not run any controller commands
when replacing the disk.
7010036 DR 3 TB, 3.5-inch, SAS/7200, HS See "Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives"
CORAL at
01/html/E27229/z40000091011460.html
Do not run any controller commands when
replacing the disk.
Note: Rear storage drive 1 might be populated
with a remote battery module for the host bus
adapter (HBA) card. See "Remove a Rear
Storage Drive" at
7014391 SAS expander assembly BDA-O See "Servicing the SAS Expander Module" at
01/html/E27229/ceieidja.html
1.3V
1.35V
7041013 DIMM, 32 GB, DDR3, BDA-O See "Servicing the DIMMs" at
RDIMM-1066, QUAD-RANK
7020774 Pregreased CPU heatsink BDA-O See "Servicing Processors" at
ltoc
7026881 CPU,Intel,E5-2660,2.2 GHz, 8-core BDA-O See "Servicing Processors" at
ltoc
7044130 Power supply, AC, A258, F, 12V, HS See "Servicing Power Supplies" at
1000W
01/html/E27229/z40000091014153.html
7045042 Dual counter rotating fan module, HS See "Servicing Fan Modules" at
80x80 mm
01/html/E27229/z40000091014194.html


Repair
7047257 12-slot backplane cable kit with BDA-O 1. Shut down the rack. See "Powering On and
the following: Off Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
page 11-2.
Disk drive flex cable
Dual backplane power cable
Single backplane power cable
Disk data cable, iPass+ HD to 01/html/E27229/z40007ac1419009.html
iPass+ HD, 600 mm
7047768 12-slot 3.5" disk cage, including BDA-O 1. Shut down the rack. See "Powering On and
fan door, and left and right ear Off Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
assembly page 11-2.
01/html/E27229/z40007ac1419009.html
7049382 System board assembly, RoHS:Y BDA-O 1. Shut down the rack. See "Powering On and
Off Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
page 11-2.
2. "Servicing the Motherboard Assembly" at
01/html/E27229/z40001d31037512.html
Table B6 lists the replaceable parts for the Sun Fire X4270 M2, which are covered
under the Oracle Premier Support for Systems warranty. Unless otherwise noted, the
repair procedures are in the Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service Manual.
Table B6 Replacement Parts for Sun Fire X4270 M2 Servers

Repair
150-3993 Battery, 3V, 390 MAH, LITH, BDA-O See Section 4.6, "Servicing the Server Battery" in
COIN Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19245-01/821-0
488-12/motherboard.html#50438179_71528
300-2235 Power supply, A249, 1200W, 12V, HS See Section 3.4, "Servicing Power Supplies" in
2U, RoHS:Y Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
488-12/hotswap.html#50438178_11706
350-1502 Universal rack mount kit BDA-O 1. If the system is currently running, then
page 11-2.
2. See Chapter 2, "Installing the Server Into a
Rack With Slide-Rails" in Sun Fire X4170
M2 and X4270 M2 Servers Installation Guide
at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19245-01/E
27205/z4000c671007752.html
7090170 8 GB USB flash drive BDA-O Not applicable

Table B6 (Cont.) Replacement Parts for Sun Fire X4270 M2 Servers

Repair
371-4966 LV DIMM, 8 GB, DDR3, 1RX4, BDA-O See Section 4.2, "Servicing Memory Modules
1333 MHz (DIMMs)" in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service
Manual at
371-4982 6 Gigabit SAS RAID PCI battery BDA-O 1. If the system is currently running, then
module, RoHS:Y (LION), BBU-08 shut it down gracefully. See "Powering On
page 11-2.
(internal only) at
ndex.html
375-3696 InfiniBand (CX2) dual port CX2 BDA-O 1. If the system is currently running, then
4x QDR PCI-e shut it down gracefully. See "Powering On
page 11-2.
2. See Section 4.5, "Servicing PCIe Cards" in
Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19245-01/8
21-0488-12/motherboard.html#50438179_
86021
375-3701 6 Gbps SAS RAID disk PCIe BDA-O 1. If the system is currently running, then
HBA, RoHS:Y shut it down gracefully. See "Powering On
page 11-2.
2. See Section 4.5, "Servicing PCIe Cards" in
86021
Note: Do not run any controller commands in
the service manual when replacing the disk.
530-3927 Cable, PDB, MB, 1U+2U, ribbon BDA-O See Section 5.10, "Servicing Cables " in Sun Fire
X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
488-12/infrastructure_x4270_
M2.html#50438167_58217
530-4228 Cable, mini-SAS, 36 POS LONG, BDA-O See Section 5.10, "Servicing Cables" in Sun Fire
LY, RoHS:Y X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
M2.html#50438167_78806
541-2075 Bus_bar, power, 1U+2U, RoHS:Y BDA-O See Section 5.6, "Servicing the Power
Distribution Board" in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server
Service Manual at
M2.html#50438167_85936


Repair
541-2884 Assembly, riser, X8, X8, 2U, PCI-E, BDA-O See Section 4.4, "Servicing PCIe Risers" in Sun
RoHS:Y Fire X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
541-3310 Xeon Heatsink with grease, BDA-O See Section 4.7, "Servicing CPUs" in Sun Fire
RoHS:Y, 2U X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
541-3356 x8/x8 switched PCIe riser BDA-O 1. If the system is currently running, then
assembly, RoHS:Y with the shut it down gracefully. See "Powering On
following: and Off Oracle Big Data Appliance" on
page 11-2.
x8/x8 switch PCIe riser
2. See Section 4.4, "Servicing PCIe Risers" in
bracket
53252
541-4081 System board assembly, RoHS:Y BDA-O 1. If the system is currently running, then
page 11-2.
2. See Section 4.8, "Servicing the
Motherboard" in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server
Service Manual at
98526
541-4124 Fan deck, Hyde, RoHS:Y BDA-O See Section 5.3, "Servicing the Fan Board" in
M2.html#50438167_71556
541-4222 Assembly, fan, CR, 2U, RoHS:Y HS See Section 3.3, "Servicing Fan Modules" in Sun
Fire X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
488-12/hotswap.html#50438178_28930
541-4223 Power distribution board, 2U, BDA-O See Section 5.6, "Servicing the Power
RoHS:Y Distribution Board" in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server
Service Manual at
M2.html#50438167_71558
541-4304 Indicator, right, Hyde 12/24, BDA-O See Section 5.5, "Servicing the Front Panel LED
RoHS:Y Modules" in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service
Manual at
M2.html#50438167_71563


Repair
541-4305 Assembly, disk, SAS2, XP_DC, BDA-O See Section 5.2, "Servicing the SAS Expander
Hyde, RoHS:Y Board" in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service
Manual at
M2.html#50438167_28246
541-4306 Assembly, connector board BDA-O See Section 5.7, "Servicing the Connector Board"
bracket, Hyde in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
M2.html#50438167_pgfId-1296581
541-4363 12-slot disk backplane, RoHS:Y BDA-O See Section 5.4, "Servicing the Disk Backplane"
in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at
M2.html#50438167_71557
541-4371 Indicator, left, Hyde 12/24, BDA-O See Section 5.5, "Servicing the Front Panel LED
RoHS:Y Modules" in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service
Manual at
M2.html#50438167_71563
560-2952 Cable kit, Hyde, RoHS:Y with the BDA-O Refer to the entries for the individual items in
following: the kit.
Disk backplane power cable
24-slot DBP power cable
12/24 slot disk backplane
signal cable
Fan signal cable
Fan power cable
7010036 FRU DR 3 TB 3.5-inch SAS/7200, -- See Section 3.2, "Servicing Storage Drives and
CORAL Boot Drives" in Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Service
Manual at
488-12/hotswap.html#50438178_61628
Note: Do not run any controller commands in
the service manual when replacing the disk.
7012433 3.06 GHz processor BDA-O See Section 4.7, "Servicing CPUs" in Sun Fire
X4270 M2 Server Service Manual at

Table B7 lists the replaceable parts for the Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36,
which are covered under the Oracle Premier Support for Systems warranty. Unless
otherwise noted, the repair procedures reference the Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch
36 Service Manual at

See "Cables and Cable Accessories for an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack" on
page B-17 for information about InfiniBand cables.
Table B7 Replacement Parts for the Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36

Repair
7081595 A247A, 12V, 760-watt HS See "Servicing Power Supplies" at
power supply, RoHS:Y
01/html/E26434/z40001f49112.html
350-1312 Fan module for Sun HS See "Servicing Fans" at
Datacenter InfiniBand
Switch 36, RoHS:Y
01/html/E26434/z40001f59112.html
371-2210 CR2032 3V battery, IR See "Servicing the Battery" at
RoHS:Y
01/html/E26434/z40001f79112.html
541-3495 Sun Datacenter InfiniBand IR 1. See "Replacing a Failed InfiniBand Switch" on
Switch 36, RoHS:YL page 11-8.
2. See "Installing the Switch" in the Sun Datacenter
InfiniBand Switch 36 Installation Guide at
01/html/E26434/cggfbhhf.html
594-6603 10 Gbps QSFP short IR See "Servicing Data Cables" at
wavelength transceiver
01/html/E26434/z40001f69112.html

Table B8 lists the replaceable parts for the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway
switch, which are covered under the Oracle Premier Support for Systems warranty.
Unless otherwise noted, the repair procedures refer to the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand
Gateway Switch Service Manual at
See "Cables and Cable Accessories for an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack" on
page B-17 for information about InfiniBand cables.
Table B8 Replacement Parts for the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch
Repair
7081595 A247A, 12V, 760-watt HS See "Servicing Power Supplies" at
power supply, RoHS:Y
01/html/E26706/z40001f49112.html
350-1312 Fan module, RoHS:Y HS See "Servicing Fans" at
01/html/E26706/z40001f59112.html

Table B8 (Cont.) Replacement Parts for the Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch
Repair
371-2210 CR2032 3V battery, IR See "Servicing the Battery" at
RoHS:Y
01/html/E26706/z40001f79112.html
594-6603 10 Gbps QSFP short IR See "Servicing Data Cables" at
wavelength transceiver
01/html/E26706/z40001f69112.html
7014378 Assembly, system, IR 1. See "Replacing a Failed InfiniBand Switch" on
NM2-Gateway page 11-8.
2. See "Installing the Gateway" in the Sun Network
QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch Installation Guide at
01/html/E26706/cggfbhhf.html

Table B9 lists replaceable parts for the Cisco Ethernet switch, which are covered
under the Oracle Premier Support for Systems warranty.
See Also: Cisco Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Switch Installation
Guide at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst4900/49
48E/installation/guide/4948E_ins.html
Table B9 Replacement Parts for Cisco Catalyst Ethernet

Repair
Part Number Description Category Repair
7055121 Cooling fan tray HS See Chapter 4 of the Cisco Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst
4948E-F Switch Installation Guide.
7055122 Power supply, redundant HS See Chapter 4 of the Cisco Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst
7055123 SNET, WS-C4948E-F IR See Chapter 3 of the Cisco Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst
Parts for Power Distribution Units

Table B10 lists the replacement parts for the power distribution units (PDUs), which
are covered under the Oracle Premier Support for Systems warranty. The repair
procedures references the Sun Rack II Power Distribution Units User's Guide at
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19844-01/E23956/index.html
Because of the number of cables and connections, Oracle recommends shutting down
the Oracle Big Data Appliance rack during the replacement of power distribution unit
parts.

Table B10 Replacement Parts for Power Distribution Units

Repair
Part Number Description Category Repair Procedures
180-2379 13A/250V 90 degree IEC 320 Sheet E to IEC HS Not applicable
320 C13 cord, 1 meter, RoHS:Y
180-2380 13A/250V 90 degree IEC 320 Sheet E to IEC HS Not applicable
320 C13 cord, 2 meter, RoHS:Y
371-3995 Three-phase PDU: 15 kVA, IEC309 60A, 4-pin, IR See "Removing and Replacing
250 VAC, three-phase IP67, North America, PDUs" at
RoHS:Y
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E1984
4-01/E23956/z40000121011643.htm
l#scrolltoc
371-4976 Three-phase PDU: 15 kVA, 5-pin, IEC309 32A, IR See "Removing and Replacing
5-pin 230/400V, three-phase IP44, PDUs" at
international, RoHS:Y
4-01/E23956/z40000121011643.htm
l#scrolltoc
371-4199 Single-phase PDU: 15 kVA, with three IR See "Removing and Replacing
30A/250V 2-pole/3-wire NEMA L6-30P PDUs" at
plugs, North America, RoHS:Y
4-01/E23956/z40000121011643.htm
l#scrolltoc
371-5040 Single-phase PDU: 22 kVA, with three blue IR See "Removing and Replacing
32A/240V splash-proof 2-pole/3-wire IEC PDUs" at
60309 plugs, international, RoHS:Y
4-01/E23956/z40000121011643.htm
l#scrolltoc
Table B11 lists the replacement cables and cable accessories for an Oracle Big Data
Appliance rack, which are covered under the Oracle Premier Support for Systems
warranty.
See Also:
Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch Service Manual at
Sun Datacenter InfiniBand Switch 36 Service Manual at
See Cisco Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Switch Installation
Guide at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/switches/lan/catalyst4900
/4948E/installation/guide/4948E_ins.html

Table B11 Replacement Cables for an Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack
Repair
Part Number Description Category Repair
350-1287 Slim rail, CMA, 1U-2U for BDA-O 1. Power down the server gracefully. See "Powering
Sun servers Down the Server" at
01/html/E27229/z400061b1011735.html
2. See "Install Cable Management Arm" in the Sun
Server X3-2L Installation Guide at
01/html/E27229/z40000401014951.html
350-1519 Serial cable kit, RoHS:Y HS See "Understanding Cabling" in the Sun Datacenter
with the following: InfiniBand Switch 36 Installation Guide at
USB to DB 9-pin M http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E26698_
serial cable 01/html/E26434/cggfhjcc.html
DB 9-pin F to DB
9-pin F null modem
cable
530-4567 4x QSFP copper QDR HS 1. See "Maintaining the InfiniBand Network" on
InfiniBand cable, 2 m, page 11-6.
RoHS:Y
2. See "Understanding Cabling" in the Sun Datacenter
01/html/E26434/cggfhjcc.html
Note: Redundancy is lost during cable replacement.
RoHS:Y
RoHS:Y
530-4432 Ethernet cable, Cat 5/5E, HS See Cisco Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Switch
RJ45 to RJ45, 7 foot, blue, Installation Guide.
RoHS:Y
RJ45 to RJ45, 10 foot, red, Installation Guide.
RoHS:Y
RJ45 to RJ45, 7 foot, red, Installation Guide.
RoHS:Y
RJ45 to RJ45, 10 foot, Installation Guide.
black, RoHS:Y
RJ45 to RJ45, 7 foot, black, Installation Guide.
RoHS:Y

C
In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data
C
Appliance X4-2 and X3-2
The tables in this appendix show the in-rack cable connections for Oracle Big Data
Appliance X4-2 and Oracle Big Data Appliance X3-2 racks. This appendix contains the
following sections:
Cable Color Coding
Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Layout
Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cable Connections
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager Cable Connections
Single-Phase Power Distribution Unit Cable Connections
Three-Phase Power Distribution Unit Cable Connections
In-Rack InfiniBand Switch-to-Switch Cable Connections
In-Rack InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cable Connections
Cable Color Coding

The cables used in Oracle Big Data Appliance are color-coded as follows:
Black: InfiniBand cables or AC power jumper cables
Red: Integrated Lights Out Management (Oracle ILOM) Ethernet management
cables
Blue: Gigabit Ethernet management (eth0) cables

The following figures show the front and rear layouts for three configurations of
Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 and X3-2: full rack, starter rack, and starter rack with
one in-rack expansion kit.
Figure C1 shows the layout of a full rack for Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 or
Oracle Big Data Appliance X3-2.
In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 and X3-2 C-1
Figure C1 Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 Full Rack Layout
Rear View Front View

U# PDU Big Data Appliance PDU U# U# PDU Big Data Appliance PDU U#
A B B A
42 1U Solid Filler 42 42 1U Solid Filler 42
40 BDA Server 18 40 40 BDA Server 18 40
39 39 39 39
38 38 38 38
BDA Server 17 BDA Server 17
37 37 37 37
INP0
36 36 36 36
INP2
INP2
INP0
35 35 35 35
33 33 33 33
32 32 32 32
31 31 31 31
29 29 29 29
28 28 28 28
27 27 27 27
25 25 25 25
23 23 23 23
22 Sun Network QDR Infiniband GW Switch 22 22 1U Vented Filler 22
INP1
INP1
INP1
INP1
21 Cisco Ethernet Admin Switch 21 21 1U Vented Filler 21

18 18 18 18
16 16 16 16
15 15 15 15
14 14 14 14
12 12 12 12
10 10 10 10
8 8 8 8
INP0
INP0
INP2
INP2

6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
1 Sun Datacenter QDR Infiniband Switch 1 1 1U Vented Filler 1
Power Distribution Unit-A Power Distribution Unit-A
Power Distribution Unit-B Power Distribution Unit-B
Figure C2 shows the layout of a starter rack for Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 or
Oracle Big Data Appliance X3-2.
C-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

Figure C2 Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 Starter Rack Layout

A B B A
INP0
INP2
INP2
INP0
INP1
INP1
INP1
INP1
12 12 12 12
10 10 10 10
8 8 8 8
INP0
INP0
INP2
INP2

6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
Figure C3 shows the layout of an Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 or Oracle Big Data
Appliance X3-2 starter rack with one in-rack expansion kit.
Figure C3 Oracle Big Data Appliance X4-2 Starter Rack With In-Rack Expansion

A B B A
INP0
INP2
INP2
INP0
28 28 28 28
27 27 27 27
25 25 25 25
23 23 23 23
INP1
INP1
INP1
INP1

18 18 18 18
16 16 16 16
15 15 15 15
14 14 14 14
12 12 12 12
10 10 10 10
8 8 8 8
INP0
INP0
INP2
INP2

6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2

Table C1 shows the cable connections for the administrative Gigabit Ethernet network
(Net 0). The Ethernet switch is located in rack unit 21. The cables are 10 feet long and
black.
Table C1 Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cabling

From Rack Unit1 Component To Ethernet Port
U39 Server 18 1
U37 Server 17 3

Table C1 (Cont.) Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cabling

From Rack Unit1 Component To Ethernet Port
U35 Server 16 5
U33 Server 15 7
U31 Server 14 9
U29 Server 13 11
U27 Server 12 13
U25 Server 11 17
U23 Server 10 21
U22 NM2-IB Switch 45
U18 Server 9 25
U16 Server 8 29
U14 Server 7 31
U12 Server 6 33
U10 Server 5 35
U8 Server 4 37
U6 Server 3 39
U4 Server 2 41
U2 Server 1 43
U1 NM2-IB Switch 47
1
Un is the unit location in the rack, where n is the number.

Table C2 shows the cable connections from the servers to the Oracle ILOM switch.
The Oracle ILOM ports on the servers are labeled Net Mgt and connect to the Cisco
Ethernet switch located in rack unit 21.
Table C2 Oracle ILOM Cabling

From Rack Unit1 Component Ethernet Port Cable Length Cable Color
U39 Server 18 2 10 feet Red
Table C2 (Cont.) Oracle ILOM Cabling

PDU-A PDU-A 15 1 meter White
PDU-B PDU-B 20 1 meter White
Not applicable Service 48 10 feet Blue
1

Table C3 shows the connections for single-phase cabling from each power
distribution unit (PDU) to the power supplies in the rack. The cables terminate at
PDU-A on the left and are routed to the right to enter the cable management arm
(CMA). The cables are bundled in groups of four.
Table C3 Single-Phase PDU Cabling

1
Rack Unit PDU-A/PS-00 PDU-B/PS-01 Cable Length
U39 G5-6 G0-0 2 meters
U23 Not applicable G3-0 included
U22 G2-5 G3-1 1 meter

Table C3 (Cont.) Single-Phase PDU Cabling

Rack Unit1 PDU-A/PS-00 PDU-B/PS-01 Cable Length
1

Table C4 describes three-phase cabling from each power distribution unit (PDU) to
the power supplies in the rack. The cables are terminated to PDU-A on the left, are
routed to the right to enter the cable management arm (CMA), and are bundled in
groups of four.
Table C4 Three-Phase PDU Cabling

1
U23 Not applicable G5-0 Included
U22 G2-5 G5-1 1 meter
Table C4 (Cont.) Three-Phase PDU Cabling

Rack Unit1 PDU-A/PS-00 PDU-B/PS-01 Cable Length
1

Table C5 lists the location, ports, and cables for the InfiniBand connections from
switch to switch.
Table C5 InfiniBand Switch-to-Switch Cabling

From InfiniBand To InfiniBand
Switch Rack Switch Rack
Unit1 Port Unit1 Port Cable Length Description
U20 9B U22 9A 2 meters Leaf to leaf
U20 8A U22 8A 2 meters Leaf to leaf
U20 9A U22 9B 2 meters Leaf to leaf
U1 0B U20 8B 3 meters Spine to leaf
1
Figure C4 identifies the locations of the ports on a Sun Network QDR InfiniBand
Gateway switch. Ports 5A, 5B, 6A, 6B, and 7A are available to connect to another
device, such as Oracle Exalytics In-Memory Machine. Oracle recommends that you
start with port 5A. Port 7B is reserved for future use by Oracle Big Data Appliance.

Figure C4 Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Ports
Ethernet 9 connections Available for Leaf to leaf 10G Ethernet

Management to InfiniBand ports use connections Ports
Port in servers in top
half of rack
OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
Connection
to spine USB
switch Port
Reserved
9 connections
to InfiniBand ports
in servers in
bottom half
of rack

Table C6 lists the location, ports, and cables for the InfiniBand connections from the
leaf switches to the servers.
Table C6 InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cabling

From InfiniBand
Switch Rack Unit1 Port To Rack Unit1 Port2 Cable Length
U22 0A U39 PCIe 3 P1 3 meters
U22 0B U37 PCIe 3 P1 3 meters
Table C6 (Cont.) InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cabling

From InfiniBand
1
2
Pn is the InfiniBand port, where n is the port number.

D
In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data
D
Appliance
The tables in this appendix show the in-rack cable connections for Sun Fire X4270
M2-based Oracle Big Data Appliance racks. This appendix contains the following
sections:
Cable Color Coding
KVM Network Cable Connections
Cable Color Coding

The cables used in Oracle Big Data Appliance are color-coded as follows:
Black: InfiniBand cables or AC power jumper cables
Red: Integrated Lights Out Management (Oracle ILOM) Ethernet management
cables
Blue: Gigabit Ethernet management (eth0) cables
Orange: KVM switch to dongle cables

Figure D1 shows the front and rear layout of an Oracle Big Data Appliance rack.
In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data Appliance D-1

Figure D1 Rack Layout of Oracle Big Data Appliance

A B B A
42 42 42 42
41 41 41 41
40 40 40 40
39 39 39 39
38 38 38 38
37 37 37 37
INP0
36 36 36 36
INP2
INP2
INP0
35 35 35 35
34 34 34 34
33 33 33 33
32 32 32 32
31 31 31 31
29 29 29 29
27 27 27 27
25 25 25 25
23 KVM LCD 23 23 KVM LCD 23
22 KVM Switch 22 22 1U Vented Filler 22
INP1
INP1
INP1
INP1

18 18 18 18
16 16 16 16
15 15 15 15
14 14 14 14
12 12 12 12
10 10 10 10
8 8 8 8
INP0
INP0
INP2
INP2

6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2

A KVM switch is provided only in Sun Fire X4270 M2-based rack.
Table D1 shows the keyboard, video, and mouse (KVM) network cabling to the
servers. The cables are orange.
Table D1 KVM Cabling

From Rack Unit Component To KVM Port
U41 Server 18 1
D-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

Table D1 (Cont.) KVM Cabling

From Rack Unit Component To KVM Port
U39 Server 17 2
U37 Server 16 3
U35 Server 15 4
U33 Server 14 5
U31 Server 13 6
U29 Server 12 7
U28 Server 11 8
U27 Server 10 9
U26 NM2-IB leaf switch 10
U25 KVM switch 11
U19 KVM tray 12
U18 Cisco switch 13
U17 NM2-IB leaf switch 14
U16 Server 9 15
U14 Server 8 16
U12 Server 7 17
U10 Server 6 18
U8 Server 5 19
U6 Server 4 20
U4 Server 3 21
U2 Server 2 22

Table D2 shows the cable connections for the administrative Gigabit Ethernet
network (Net 0). The Ethernet switch is located in rack unit 21. The cables are 10 feet
long and black.
Table D2 Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cabling

To Ethernet
From Rack Unit1 Component Port
U41 Server 18 1
U39 Server 17 3
U37 Server 16 5
U35 Server 15 7
U33 Server 14 9
U31 Server 13 11
U29 Server 12 13
U27 Server 11 17
U25 Server 11 21

Table D2 (Cont.) Administrative Gigabit Ethernet Cabling

To Ethernet
From Rack Unit1 Component Port
U18 Server 10 25
U16 Server 9 29
U14 Server8 31
U12 Server 7 33
U10 Server 6 35
U8 Server 5 37
U6 Server 4 39
U4 Server 3 41
U2 NM2-IB Switch 43
U1 Server 2 47
1

Table D3 shows the cable connections from the servers to the Oracle ILOM switch.
The Oracle ILOM ports on the servers are labeled Net Mgt and connect to the Cisco
Ethernet switch located in rack unit 21.
Table D3 Oracle ILOM Cabling


Table D3 (Cont.) Oracle ILOM Cabling

PDU-A PDU-A 15 1 meter White
PDU-B PDU-B 20 1 meter White
Not applicable Service 48 10 feet Blue
1

Table D4 shows the connections for single-phase cabling from each power
distribution unit (PDU) to the power supplies in the rack. The cables terminate at
PDU-A on the left and are routed to the right to enter the cable management arm
(CMA). The cables are bundled in groups of four.
Table D4 Single-Phase PDU Cabling

1
U23 Not Applicable G3-0 included
U22 G2-5 G3-1 1 meter
1


Table D5 describes three-phase cabling from each power distribution unit (PDU) to
the power supplies in the rack. The cables are terminated to PDU-A on the left, are
routed to the right to enter the cable management arm (CMA), and are bundled in
groups of four.
Table D5 Three-Phase PDU Cabling

1
U23 Not Applicable G5-0 Included
U22 G2-5 G5-1 1 meter
1

Table D6 lists the location, ports, and cables for the InfiniBand connections from
switch to switch. Figure D2 identifies the locations of the ports on a Sun Network
QDR InfiniBand Gateway switch.

Table D6 InfiniBand Switch-to-Switch Cabling

From InfiniBand To InfiniBand
Switch Rack Switch Rack
Unit1 Port Unit1 Port Cable Length Description
U20 8A U24 8A 2 meters Leaf to leaf
1
Figure D2 identifies the locations of the ports on a Sun Network QDR InfiniBand
Gateway switch. Ports 5A, 5B, 6A, 6B, and 7A are available to connect to another
device, such as Oracle Exalytics In-Memory Machine. Oracle recommends that you
start with port 5A. Port 7B is reserved for future use by Oracle Big Data Appliance.
Figure D2 Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch Ports
Ethernet 9 connections Available for Leaf to leaf 10G Ethernet

Management to InfiniBand ports use connections Ports
Port in servers in top
half of rack
OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
Connection
to spine USB
switch Port
Reserved
9 connections
to InfiniBand ports
in servers in
bottom half
of rack

Table D7 lists the location, ports, and cables for the InfiniBand connections from the
leaf switches to the servers.
Table D7 InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cabling

From InfiniBand

Table D7 (Cont.) InfiniBand Switch-to-Server Cabling

From InfiniBand
1
2
Pn is the InfiniBand port, where n is the port number.

E
EMultirack Cabling Tables
This appendix describes the hardware connections and contains the tables for
multirack cabling. It contains the following sections:
Understanding Multirack Cabling
Key to Cabling Table Abbreviations
Two-Rack Cabling
Three-Rack Cabling
Four-Rack Cabling
Five-Rack Cabling
Six-Rack Cabling
Seven-Rack Cabling
Eight-Rack Cabling
See Also: Chapter 9, "Connecting Multiple Oracle Big Data

Appliance Racks"

You can connect multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance racks, or a combination of Oracle
Big Data Appliance racks and Oracle Exadata Database Machine racks.
The Oracle Big Data Appliance rack has a Sun Datacenter QDR InfiniBand Switch for
the spine switch at rack unit 1 (U1). The rack also has two Sun Network QDR
InfiniBand Gateway switches for the leaf switches at rack units 20 and 24 (U20 and
U24). See Figure D1.
These switches attach to standard quad small form-factor pluggable (QSFP) connectors
at the end of the InfiniBand cables. You can cable together up to 18 racks without
external InfiniBand switches. Larger nonblocking configurations are supported with
additional external InfiniBand switches; larger blocking configurations do not require
the additional switches.
The cable lengths in this appendix are for adjacent racks with the cables running
underneath the racks. In this scenario, the cables are generally 3 feet long to connect
within the rack, 5 feet long to connect up to two racks away, and 10 feet long to
connect three or more racks away. If the racks are apart or the cables run above the
racks, then longer cables may be required. The cable lengths listed here are provided
only as a guideline. You should always verify the actual cable lengths required.
Multirack Cabling Tables E-1

Cabling Together Oracle Exadata Database Machine and Oracle Big Data Appliance
Oracle Exadata Database Machine full racks and half racks must have a spine switch.
If the rack does not have a spine switch, then be sure to order an Exadata Expansion
Switch Kit for the installation.
An Oracle Exadata Database Machine eighth or quarter rack does not require a spine
switch to connect to a Oracle Big Data Appliance, whether it is a starter rack, a starter
rack with expansion kit, or a full rack. However, if multiple Exadata eighth or quarter
racks or multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance racks are cabled together, then the
Exadata rack must have a spine switch.
See Also: Oracle Exadata Database Machine Extending and Multi-Rack

Cabling Guide
Cabling the Switches in One Rack

In a single rack, the two leaf switches are connected by seven cables. Each leaf switch
has one cable to the spine switch. Nine servers connect to one leaf switch, and the
other nine servers connect to the other leaf switch, as shown in Figure E1.
Figure E1 Connections Between Spine Switch and Leaf Switches
Leaf Switch 1 Leaf Switch 2

OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
7 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
9 9
1 1
Oracle OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A
Big Data Appliance 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
IB Ports
Spine Switch
The servers connect to the leaf switches as shown in Figure E2.
E-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

Figure E2 Connections Between the Servers and the Leaf Switches
Port 2 Port 2
Servers 10-18 Servers 10-18
9 9
Leaf Switch 1 Leaf Switch 2

0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
9 9
Port 1 Port 1
Servers 1-9 Servers 1-9
Cabling the Switches in Two Racks

When you connect multiple racks, remove the seven interswitch connections between
leaf switches and the two connections between the leaf switches and the spine switch.
From each leaf switch, distribute eight connections over the spine switches in all racks.
In multirack environments, the leaf switches inside a rack are not directly
interconnected, as shown in Figure E3.
Figure E3 shows that each leaf switch in rack 1 connects to the following switches:
Four connections to its internal spine switch
Four connections to the spine switch in rack 2
The spine switch in rack 1 connects to the following switches:
Eight connections to the internal leaf switches (four to each rack 1 switch)
Eight connections to the leaf switches in rack 2 (four to each rack 2 switch)
Figure E3 Connecting Switches Across Two Racks
Rack 1 Rack 2
Leaf Switch 1 Leaf Switch 2 Leaf Switch 1 Leaf Switch 2
OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
Spine Switch

Cabling the Switches in Up to Eight Racks

As the number of racks increases from two to eight, the pattern continues as shown in
Figure E4. Because not all of the racks are shown, not all of the cables are shown
either.
Each leaf switch has eight interswitch connections distributed over all spine switches.
Each spine switch has 16 interswitch connections distributed over all leaf switches.
The leaf switches are not directly interconnected with other leaf switches, and the
spine switches are not directly interconnected with the other spine switches.
Figure E4 Connecting Switches Across Multiple Racks
Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 8

OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
...
OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A OA 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A OA 1A
0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B
Spine Switch Spine Switch Spine Switch

The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation Description
Rn Rack n, where n is the number of the rack, such as R1.
IBn Unit location in rack, where n is the number, such as IB3.
Pn InfiniBand port n, where n is port number, such as P8A.
Two-Rack Cabling
Table E1 shows the cable connections for the first spine switch (R1-U1) when two
racks are cabled together.
Note:
The spine switch is in U1 (IB1) for all racks.
The leaf switches are in U20 (IB2) and U24 (IB3).
In this section, the leaf switches are called IB2 and IB3.

Two-Rack Cabling
Table E1 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Two-Rack System
Leaf Switch Connection Cable Length
R1 IB3 within Rack 1 R1-IB3-P8A to R1-U1-P3A 3 meters
R1-IB3-P8B to R1-U1-P4A
R1-IB3-P9A to R1-U1-P5A
R1 IB3 to Rack 2 R1-IB3-P10A to R2-U1-P7A 5 meters
R1 IB2 within Rack 1 R1-IB2-P8A to R1-U1-P3B 3 meters
R1-IB2-P8B to R1-U1-P4B
R1-IB2-P9A to R1-U1-P5B
R1 IB2 to Rack 2 R1-IB2-P10A to R2-U1-P7B 5 meters
Table E2 shows the cable connections for the second spine switch (R2-U1) when two
Table E2 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Two-Rack System

Three-Rack Cabling
Three-Rack Cabling
Table E3 shows the cable connections for the first spine switch (R1-U1) when three
Note:
Table E3 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Three-Rack System
R1 IB3 to Rack 2 R1-IB3-P9B to R2-U1-P6A 5 meters
R1 U24 to Rack 3 R1-IB3-P11A to R3-U1-P9A 5 meters
R1 IB2 to Rack 2 R1-IB2-P9B to R2-U1-P6B 5 meters
Table E4 shows the cable connections for the second spine switch (R2-U1) when three
Table E4 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Three-Rack System

Four-Rack Cabling
Table E4 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Three-Rack System
Table E5 shows the cable connections for the third spine switch (R3-U1) when three
Table E5 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Three-Rack System
Four-Rack Cabling
Table E6 shows the cable connections for the first spine switch (R1-U1) when four
Note:

Four-Rack Cabling
Table E6 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Four-Rack System
Table E7 shows the cable connections for the second spine switch (R2-U1) when four
Table E7 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Four-Rack System
Table E8 shows the cable connections for the third spine switch (R3-U1) when four

Four-Rack Cabling
Table E8 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Four-Rack System
Table E9 shows the cable connections for the fourth spine switch (R4-U1) when four
racks. are cabled together
Table E9 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Four-Rack System

Five-Rack Cabling
Five-Rack Cabling
Table E10 shows the cable connections for the first spine switch (R1-U1) when five
Note:
Table E10 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Five-Rack System
Table E11 shows the cable connections for the second spine switch (R2-U1) when five
Table E11 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Five-Rack System

Five-Rack Cabling
Table E11 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Five-Rack System
Table E12 shows the cable connections for the third spine switch (R3-U1) when five
Table E12 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Five-Rack System
Table E13 shows the cable connections for the fourth spine switch (R4-U1) when five
Table E13 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Five-Rack System

Six-Rack Cabling
Table E13 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Five-Rack System
Table E14 shows the cable connections for the fifth spine switch (R5-U1) when five
Table E14 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in a Five-Rack System
Six-Rack Cabling
Table E15 shows the cable connections for the first spine switch (R1-U1) when cabling
six racks.

Six-Rack Cabling
Note:
Table E15 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Six-Rack System
Table E16 shows the cable connections for the second spine switch (R2-U1) when six
Table E16 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Six-Rack System
R2 IB3 to Rack 6 R2-IB3-P11Ato R6-U1-P9A 10 meters

Six-Rack Cabling
Table E16 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Six-Rack System
R2 IB2 to Rack 6 R2-IB2-P11Ato R6-U1-P9B 10 meters
Table E17 shows the cable connections for the third spine switch (R3-U1) when six
Table E17 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Six-Rack System
Table E18 shows the cable connections for the fourth spine switch (R4-U1) when six
Table E18 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Six-Rack System

Six-Rack Cabling
Table E18 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Six-Rack System
Table E19 shows the cable connections for the fifth spine switch (R5-U1) when six
Table E19 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in a Six-Rack System
Table E20 shows the cable connections for the sixth spine switch (R6-U1) when six
Table E20 Leaf Switch Connections for the Sixth Rack in a Six-Rack System

Seven-Rack Cabling
Table E20 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Sixth Rack in a Six-Rack System
Seven-Rack Cabling
Table E21 shows the cable connections for the first spine switch (R1-U1) when seven
Note:
Table E21 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Seven-Rack System

Seven-Rack Cabling
Table E21 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in a Seven-Rack System
Table E22 shows the cable connections for the second spine switch (R2-U1) when
cabling seven racks.
Table E22 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in a Seven-Rack System
R2 IB2 to Rack 6 R2-IB2-P10Bto R6-U1-P8B 10 meters
Table E23 shows the cable connections for the third spine switch (R3-U1) when seven
Table E23 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Seven-Rack System

Seven-Rack Cabling
Table E23 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in a Seven-Rack System
Table E24 shows the cable connections for the fourth spine switch (R4-U1) when
seven racks are cabled together.
Table E24 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in a Seven-Rack System
Table E25 shows the cable connections for the fifth spine switch (R5-U1) when seven
Table E25 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in a Seven-Rack System

Seven-Rack Cabling
Table E25 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in a Seven-Rack System
Table E26 shows the cable connections for the sixth spine switch (R6-U1) when seven
Table E26 Leaf Switch Connections for the Sixth Rack in a Seven-Rack System
Table E27 shows the cable connections for the seventh spine switch (R7-U1) when
seven racks are cabled together.

Eight-Rack Cabling
Table E27 Leaf Switch Connections for the Seventh Rack in a Seven-Rack System
Eight-Rack Cabling
Table E28 shows the cable connections for the first spine switch (R1-U1) when cabling
eight racks.
Note:
Table E28 Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in an Eight-Rack System

Eight-Rack Cabling
Table E28 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the First Rack in an Eight-Rack System
Table E29 shows the cable connections for the second spine switch (R2-U1) when
eight racks are cabled together.
Table E29 Leaf Switch Connections for the Second Rack in an Eight-Rack System
Table E30 shows the cable connections for the third spine switch (R3-U1) when eight
Table E30 Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in an Eight-Rack System

Eight-Rack Cabling
Table E30 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Third Rack in an Eight-Rack System
Table E31 shows the cable connections for the fourth spine switch (R4-U1) when eight
Table E31 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fourth Rack in an Eight-Rack System
Table E32 shows the cable connections for the fifth spine switch (R5-U1) when eight

Eight-Rack Cabling
Table E32 Leaf Switch Connections for the Fifth Rack in an Eight-Rack System
Table E33 shows the cable connections for the sixth spine switch (R6-U1) when eight
Table E33 Leaf Switch Connections for the Sixth Rack in an Eight-Rack System

Eight-Rack Cabling
Table E34 shows the cable connections for the seventh spine switch (R7-U1) when
eight racks are cabled together.
Table E34 Leaf Switch Connections for the Seventh Rack in an Eight-Rack System
Table E35 shows the cable connections for the eighth spine switch (R8-U1) when eight
Table E35 Leaf Switch Connections for the Eighth Rack in an Eight-Rack System

Eight-Rack Cabling
Table E35 (Cont.) Leaf Switch Connections for the Eighth Rack in an Eight-Rack

Eight-Rack Cabling

Index
A ASR trap destinations, 5-4

asrexacheck script, 10-7
AC breaker panels, 2-9 asset verification (ASR), 5-4
AC power, location, 2-9 Audit Vault
access route requirements, 2-4 installation prerequisites, 10-2
accessing servers from KVM, 7-4 plug-in configuration, 4-16
accessory kits, 1-3 Auto Service Request
acoustic levels, 2-1, 2-2 alerts, A-1
add subcommand (Mammoth Reconfiguration configuration, 4-16
Utility), 10-29 installing, 10-28
adding racks, 10-7 port assignments, 3-7
adding services, 13-11 See also ASR
adding to an existing cluster configuration
options, 4-12
administration software overview, 1-4 B
administrative network, 3-2 base image files, 10-4
cabling requirements, 2-12 base image reinstallation, 10-18
connections, 2-12 base image utilities, 10-30
ports, 3-1 batteries
administrative network diagram, 15-2 life expectancy, B-2
Administrative Network page (configuration), 4-9 replacement policy, B-2
administrative utilities, 1-4 BDA server offline repair category, B-2
African PDU specifications, 2-8 BDA_REBOOT files, 6-14, 13-25
air conditioning, 2-10, 2-14, 6-2 bda_reboot_status file, 13-25
airflow, 2-2, 2-3, 2-9 bdacheckcluster utility, 13-3
airflow requirements, 2-10 bdacheckhw utility, 7-21, 11-10, 13-5
alert notifications, 4-18 bdacheckib utility, 13-6
alerts, 15-2, A-1 bda-checkip.out file, 3-10
Allen wrench keys, 6-8 bdachecknet utility, 8-6, 13-8
altitude requirements, 2-9 bdachecksw utility, 7-22, 11-11, 13-9
ambient relative humidity range, 2-10 bdacli utility, 13-11
ambient temperature range, 2-10, 11-1 bdaclustersynctime utility, 13-10
American PDU specifications, 2-5, 2-6 BdaDeploy.json configuration file, 10-20
Asia Pacific PDU specifications, 2-8 BdaDeploy.json file, 4-4, 7-23
ASR bdadiag utility, 13-19
about, 5-1 BdaExpansion.json file, 4-4, 8-5
activating assets, 5-4 bdagetclientconfig utility, 13-23
adding support, 10-13, 10-29 bdaid utility, 13-24
configuration, 5-2 bdaimagevalidate utility, 13-25
installation prerequisites, 10-2 bda-install-review.html file, 4-4
troubleshooting, 5-6 BDAMammoth directory, 10-24, 10-28
validation, 5-5, 10-6 BDA-O repair category, B-2
ASR Manager, 4-16 bda-preinstall-checkip.sh file, 4-4
installation, 5-3 bdaredoclientnet utility, 13-27
port number, 4-17 bdaserials utility, 13-29
ASR network connections, 5-3 bdaswapoff utility, 13-30
Index-1
bdaswapon utility, 13-31 checking the server software, 13-9
bdaupdatefw utility, 13-32 circuit breakers, 2-9, 6-13
bda.zip configuration archive, 4-4 Cisco switch
Big Data Appliance replacement parts, B-16
See Oracle Big Data Appliance See Ethernet switch
Big Data Connectors CleanupInstall step, 10-28
See Oracle Big Data Connectors CleanupSSHroot step, 10-28
Big Data SQL CLI utility, 13-11
starting, stopping, restarting, 13-12 CLI, Oracle ILOM, 15-2
black cables, 1-4, C-1, D-1 client access network
blue cables, 1-4, C-1, D-1 cabling requirements, 2-12
bolts, 6-7 description, 3-2
bondeth0 interface requirements, 2-12
network connections, 3-1 client configuration distribution, 13-23
bondib0 interface Client Ethernet Network page (configuration), 4-8
description, 3-3 client network
maintenance, 11-6 bandwidth, 3-5
bondib0 network cabling, 3-4
verifying operations, 11-9 configuration, 4-7
boot order, resetting, 13-41 traffic routing through switches, 3-5
breaker panels, 2-9 client network connections, 3-6
clock configuration
Ethernet switch, 7-9
C InfiniBand switches, 7-14
cable tie, Cloud Control, 1-4
removing, 6-11 See Also Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control
cable-routing floor cutout, 6-8 See also Oracle Enterprise Manager
cables, 1-3 Clouderas Distribution including Apache Hadoop
color coding, C-1, D-1 See CDH
spare parts, 1-4 cluster expansion, 10-7
spares, 1-3 cluster name configuration, 4-12
splitter, 3-5 cluster naming conventions, 4-6
cabling Cluster page (configuration), 4-12
client network, 3-4 cluster reimaging, 10-31
eight racks, E-20 cluster_name-config.json, 4-4
existing network requirements, 2-12 cmf.keytab file, 10-2
five racks, E-10 collecting diagnostics, 13-19
four racks, E-7 color coding, cables, C-1, D-1
multirack, 9-2, E-1 command files, executing across servers, 14-5
seven racks, E-16 command-line interface, 13-11
six racks, E-12 commands, remote execution across servers, 1-4,
spare parts, B-17 14-1
three racks, E-6 Complete page, 4-18
two racks, E-4 component configuration, full or starter rack, 7-1
cabling tables component failure, environmental causes, 2-9
with KVM (Sun Fire servers), D-1 component names, 4-6
without KVM (X4-2L and X3-2L servers), C-1 components
cage nuts, 6-3 location in the rack, C-2, D-2
casters, 6-5 server, 1-2
cautions, 11-3 spare parts kit, 1-3
CDH configuration
health checks, 13-3 disk controller, 11-5
CDH cluster configuration, 4-13, 10-8 editing in the Configuration Generation
CDH cluster logs, 13-19 utility, 4-3
CDH installation, 10-27 full or starter rack components, 7-1
CDH ports, 3-7 in-rack expansion kit, 8-1
CDH services, starting, 10-27 physical drives, 11-6
ceiling height requirements, 2-3 querying, 13-11
checking firmware, 7-22 virtual drive, 11-5
checking network configuration, 13-8 configuration files, 4-3
Index-2
copying to new servers, 8-4 documentation, third-party hardware, 1-3
generating, 4-3, 4-18 domain name system configuration, 4-10
ntp.conf file, 11-13 door dimensions, 2-4
Configuration Generation Utility downgrading the factory image, 10-8
input file, 4-4 drive configuration, physical, 11-6
installing, 4-3
overview, 4-1
E
configuration worksheets
See Configuration Generation Utility earth ground cable, 6-9
configure terminal command, 7-5 electric receptacles, 2-5
configuring a new disk, 12-6 electrical access, 2-4
configuring ASR, 5-2 electrical requirements, 2-5, 6-2, 6-13
configuring Ethernet switch, 7-4, 7-6 electrical storms, 2-5
configuring KVM, 7-1, 7-3 electronic noise, 6-2
configuring servers, 7-19 electrostatic discharge, 2-10
connecting KVM to the network, 7-2 elevator requirements, 2-4
connectors email accounts
See Oracle Big Data Connectors alerts (Cloudera Manager), 4-18
cooling requirements, 2-2 email accounts, My Oracle Support (ASR), 5-1
copper cables, 1-4 email alerts configuration, 4-18
copying files, 14-2 emergency shutdown, 11-3
CopyLicenseFiles step, 10-26 enablesm command, 7-17, 9-2, 9-4
CopySoftwareSource step, 10-26 encryption, 10-15
corrosion problems, 2-10 adding support, 10-29
CreateLogicalVolumes step, 10-26 engineered systems, connecting to Oracle Big Data
CreateUsers step, 10-26 Appliance, C-8, D-7
Customer Details Page (configuration), 4-5 Enterprise Management Cloud Control
configuration, 4-17
Enterprise Manager
D See Also Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control
data center switch configuration, 2-13 env_test command, 7-16
dba group, 4-14, 10-26 environmental requirements
dcli utility full rack, 2-1
description, 1-4 starter rack and expansion kit, 2-2
examples, 14-5 environmental specifications, 2-1, 2-2
option descriptions, 14-4 error messages, A-1
return values, 14-5 eth0 interface, 3-2
syntax, 14-3 Ethernet bridge ports, 13-37
target servers, 14-2 Ethernet cabling, 2-12, 3-4
using, 14-1 Ethernet interface, 3-2
Define Clusters page (configuration), 4-12 Ethernet over InfiniBand protocol., 3-5
diagnostics collection, 13-19 Ethernet ports, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1
dimensions Ethernet switch
rack, 2-3 configuration, 7-4
shipping, 2-3 configuring host name, 7-6
DIMM slots, adding memory, 11-4 IP routing, 7-6
directories, copying files across servers, 14-4 port speed, 7-5
disablesm command, 7-17, 9-2, 9-4, 11-9 replacement parts, B-16
disk controllers, 11-5 replacement switch, 1-4
disk drives setting remote password, 7-8
physical slots, 12-2 spare parts, 1-3
server status indicators, B-3 time settings, 7-9
spares, 1-3, B-5 validating and saving configuration, 7-11
symbolic links, 12-2 European PDU specifications, 2-8
disks expansion kit
configuring, 12-6 See in-rack expansion kit
repairing, 11-5 ext4 file system, 12-14
replacing, 12-1 external filer configuration, 10-27
DNS network registration, 2-13
DNS server requirement, 3-2, 4-11
Index-3
F Hadoop services, starting, 10-27
hardware configuration, 4-7
Fabric Management, 7-15 querying, 13-11
factory image reinstallation, 10-18 hardware diagnostics, 15-1
factory patches, 10-26 hardware failures, automatic reporting, 5-1
failover connections, 3-1, 3-2, 3-4 hardware profiles, acquiring from servers, 7-21
fan modules Hardware Selection page (configuration), 4-7
server status indicators, B-3 hardware status indicators, B-2
switch status indicators, B-5 hardware validation, 13-3, 13-5, 13-25
Fibre Channel over Ethernet, 1-6 HDFS diagnostics, 13-19
files, copying to multiple servers, 14-4 HDFS disk formatting, 12-17
filler panels, 2-11 HDFS partitions, 12-3
firewall configuration, 2-13 hdfs user, 10-26
Firmware State status, 12-7 health checks on InfiniBand switches, 7-15
firmware updates, 13-32 high-voltage PDUs, 2-8, 11-14
firmware upgrades host factory IP addresses, 3-6
KVM switch, 7-3 hot swap repair category, B-1
restrictions, 1-5 HS repair category, B-1
first server location, 7-23 humidity range, 2-9, 2-10
floor cut dimensions, 6-7
floor load, 2-4
floor tiles, 2-11 I
flooring ibdiagnet utility, 11-9
raised, 2-4 iblinkinfo utility, 13-34
raised pattern, 2-4 ibqueryerrors utility, 11-10
Foreign State status, 12-7 ibstatus utility, 7-21
forklift, 2-4 ILOM
FRUs, B-1 See Oracle ILOM
full rack component configuration, 7-1 ilom-admin default password, 7-13
ilom-admin user, 15-2
G ilom-operator user, 15-2
image validation, 13-25
gateway configuration image version
Ethernet switch, 7-5 downgrading, 10-8
gateway switch factory IP addresses, 3-6 upgrading, 10-8
gateway switch ports, D-7 imagehistory utility, 13-35
gateway switches imageinfo utility, 10-8, 13-36
assigning to VNICs, 3-5 incline, maximum, 2-4
cabling, 3-4 InfiniBand configuration, 7-12
configuring, 7-12 InfiniBand Gateway switch ports, D-7
connecting to Oracle ILOM, 15-5 InfiniBand network
guidelines for connecting, 3-6 cabling checks, 13-6
replacing, 11-8 factory IP addresses, 3-6
using splitter cables, 3-5 InfiniBand network interface card, 3-1
See also InfiniBand switches InfiniBand Network page (configuration), 4-10
General Network Properties page InfiniBand network verification, 11-9
(configuration), 4-10 InfiniBand ports, connecting to other devices, C-8,
getmaster command, 9-2, 9-3, 9-4 D-7
getting help, 13-24 InfiniBand private network, 3-3
ground cable, 6-9 InfiniBand Subnet Manager, 11-11
grounding resistance, 6-1 InfiniBand switches
grounding to earth, 2-9 checking status, 7-21
groups, hadoop, 10-26 configuring, 7-12
GRUB master boot records, 12-16 health checks, 7-15
priority settings, 7-16
H replacing, 11-8
setting time zone, 7-14
Hadoop cluster configuration, 4-13, 10-8
spare parts, B-14, B-15
hadoop group, 10-26
infrastructure repair category, B-1
Hadoop installation, 10-27
in-rack expansion kit
Hadoop ports, 3-7
Index-4
cables, 8-2 leveling feet, 6-5, 6-6
components, 8-1 license location, 10-26
configuration, 8-1 licensing restrictions, 1-4
configuring servers, 8-3 lift gate, 2-4
installing servers, 8-2 lightning arresters, 2-5
network configuration, 8-5 lights-out management, 15-1
PDU firmware requirement, 8-2 listlinkup command, 13-37
installation of in-rack expansion kit, 8-2 loading dock, 2-4
installation policy for third-party software, 1-5 locating first server, 7-23
installation prerequisites, 10-2 locks, panel, 6-3
InstallBDASoftware step, 10-27 low-voltage PDUs, 2-5, 2-6, 11-13, 11-14
InstallHadoop step, 10-27
installing base image, 10-18
M
installing patches, 10-26
installing the software MAC address of KVM switch, 7-3
See also Mammoth Utility MAC addresses, 13-29
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), 2-9 maintenance access requirements, 2-4
IP address requirements, 2-2, 2-3 makebdaimage utility, 10-30
IP addresses Mammoth download, 10-3
administrative network configuration, 4-9 Mammoth installation files, 10-4
client network configuration, 4-8 Mammoth options, 10-24
editing individual, 4-11 Mammoth Reconfiguration Utility, 10-28
factory settings, 3-6 Mammoth Utility
InfiniBand network configuration, 4-10 description, 10-5
IP routing, 7-6 execution steps, 10-25
ipmitool command, 7-21 location, 10-24
IR repair category, B-1 reasons for failure, 10-8
running, 10-6
synchronizing clocks, 7-15
J syntax, 10-24
Japanese PDU specifications, 2-5, 2-6 mammoth-rack_name.params file, 4-4
jumper brackets, 6-3 management network
cabling requirements, 2-12
connecting the KVM, 7-2
K connections, 2-12
Kerberos authentication factory IP addresses, 3-6
adding support, 10-17, 10-29 ports, 3-1
configuration, 4-15 management utilities, 1-4, 15-2
installation prerequisites (remote KDC mapred user, 10-26
only), 10-2 master.xml configuration file, 4-4
Kerberos configuration, 10-27 MegaCli64 command, 7-22, 11-5
kernel device names (disk drives), 12-2 memory, adding to servers, 11-4
key distribution center, 4-15, 10-2 Middle Eastern PDU specifications, 2-8
KVM switch minimum ceiling height, 2-3
accessing servers, 7-3 monitoring PDUs, 11-13
cabling, D-2 mount points, 12-3
configuration procedures, 7-1 mount_hadoop_dirs utility, 13-38
connecting to the network, 7-2 mounting a device, 7-24
firmware upgrades, 7-3 mounting brackets, 6-4, 6-6, 6-7
MAC address, 7-3 mounting tool, 6-3
naming, 7-3 multirack cabling
starting, 7-2 procedures, 9-1
three to eight, 9-3
L two racks, 9-2
multirack clusters, 3-6
leaf switches multirack software configuration, 10-7
configuring, 7-12 My Oracle Support email account, 5-1
See also InfiniBand switches MySQL Database installation, 10-27
LED color codes, B-3, B-4
LED status indicators, B-2
leveling bolts, 6-4
Index-5
N installation, 10-8, 10-27
installing server components, 4-15
naming conventions, 4-6 software installation, 10-8
NET0, 3-2 Oracle Data Integrator, 4-15
network Oracle Enterprise Manager
connecting the KVM, 7-2 adding support, 10-29
factory IP addresses, 3-6 troubleshooting, 10-2
network configuration, 4-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager agent installation, 10-28
network configuration file, 4-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control, 1-4, 4-17
network connections, 2-12, 7-26 adding support on Oracle Big Data
ASR, 5-3 Appliance, 10-14
reconfiguring 10GbE, 13-27 rediscovery, 10-8
network diagrams, 3-3, 15-2 See also Oracle Enterprise Manager
network errors, checking for, 3-9 Oracle Enterprise Manager plug-in installation
network interfaces, InfiniBand card, 3-1 prerequisites, 10-2
network operations, verifying InfiniBand, 11-9 Oracle Exadata Database Machine, 4-14
network registration, 2-13 Oracle ILOM, 15-1
network requirements, 2-2, 2-3 backing up configuration, 11-7
network settings connecting to CLI, 15-3
preinstall validation, 4-5 connecting to web interface, 15-4
network suffix configuration, 4-5 description, 15-1
network time protocol, 4-10, 11-13 Ethernet connections, 15-3
network topology, 11-11 factory IP addresses, 3-6
network validation, 13-3, 13-8 opening serial connections, 15-5
Networking page (configuration), 4-8 restoring configuration, 11-8
networks user interfaces, 15-2
administrative, 3-2 Oracle ILOM port, 3-1
client access, 2-12, 3-2 Oracle Inventory Group, 4-14
descriptions, 3-2 Oracle Linux, 1-1
InfiniBand, 3-3 Oracle NoSQL Database
networksetup scripts, 7-24, 7-27 configuration, 4-13
networksetup-one script, 8-5 creating logical volumes, 10-26
networksetup-two script, 8-6 disk formatting, 12-17
noise, electronic, 6-2 installation, 10-27
North American PDU specifications, 2-5, 2-6 Oracle Support, 13-24
NTP server requirement, 3-2, 4-11 oracle user name, 4-14
NTP servers, 11-13 orange cables, 1-4, C-1, D-1
configuring, 7-10 OS watcher logs, 13-19
setting on InfiniBand switches, 7-15
ntp.conf file, 11-13
nuts, 6-3 P
pallet jack, 2-4
O panel locks, 6-3
parallel execution of commands, 14-1
ODI partitions
See Oracle Data Integrator creating on a new disk, 12-10, 12-11
oinstall group, 4-14, 10-26 dismounting, 12-3
on-disk encryption, 10-15 parts kit, 1-3
operating cautions and warnings, 11-3 passwordless SSH, 13-39, 13-42, 14-1
operating system disks, 12-9, 12-10 passwords (default)
operating system history, 13-35 Ethernet switch, 7-5
operating system image, 13-36 ilom-admin, 7-13
Oracle Audit Vault and Database Firewall PDU metering unit, 7-19
plug-in configuration, 4-16 servers, 7-20
See also Audit Vault patch installation, 10-26
Oracle Big Data Appliance PatchFactoryImage step, 10-26
general description, 1-1 path to data center, 2-4
rack components, 1-1 PDAs, location in the rack, C-2, D-2
server components, 1-2 PDU configuration, 7-18
Oracle Big Data Connectors PDU metering unit password, 7-19
configuration, 4-14
Index-6
PDU requirements, 2-5 rack configuration file, 10-8
PDU specifications Rack Details page (configuration), 4-7
for America, Japan, Taiwan, 2-5 rack dimensions, 2-3
for Americas, Japan, Taiwan, 2-6 rack layout illustration, C-2, D-2
for Europe, Middle East, Africa, Asia Pacific, 2-8 rack layouts
PDU thresholds, 11-13 with KVM (Sun Fire servers), D-1
PDUs without KVM, C-1
circuit breakers, 6-13 rack reimaging, 10-19
network connections, 7-18 rack weight, 2-1, 2-2
powering on, 6-13 racks
replacement parts, B-16 adding another, 9-1
single-phase, 6-2, 6-13 connecting power cords, 6-10
perforated tiles, 2-11 inspecting, 6-10
photocopiers, 6-2 installing Oracle Big Data Appliance
physical drive configuration, 11-6 software, 10-5
port assignments, 3-7 moving instructions, 6-5
port speed of Ethernet switch, 7-5 reimaging, 10-31
ports reinstalling base image, 10-18
ASR Manager, 4-17 RAID arrays, repairing logical, 12-13
connecting to 40 GbE, 3-6 RAID configuration, 7-22
ports, open gateway, C-8, D-7 RAID logical drives, 12-2
power connectors, 2-5 red cables, 1-4, C-1, D-1
power cord length requirements, 2-9 reimagecluster utility, 10-30, 10-31
power cords, 2-9 reimagerack utility, 10-30, 10-31
connecting to rack, 6-10 reimaging a rack, 10-19
removing cable ties, 6-11 reimaging the servers, 10-18
routing, 6-11 reinstalling the software, 10-6
power LED locations, 6-13 relative humidity, 2-10, 2-11
power off switch, 11-3 remove-root-ssh script, 13-39, 14-2
power outlet grounding, 2-9 removing services, 13-11
power receptacle location, 2-9 repair categories, B-1
power requirements, 2-1, 2-2, 2-5 replacement parts, B-1
power supplies replacing spine switch, 11-9
server status indicators, B-4 reset-boot-order utility, 13-41
switch status indicators, B-5 resolv.conf configuration file, 8-6
uninterruptable, 2-9 restart validation, 6-14
powering off restarting Big Data SQL, 13-12
emergency, 11-3 restrictions on use, 1-4
sequence, 11-2 Review and Edit Details page (configuration), 4-11
powering on, 6-13, 11-2 root user, passwordless SSH, 14-1
preinstallation tasks, 2-12 route requirements, 2-4
preinstall-checkip script running-config output, 7-11
running, 3-10
preinstall-checkip.sh file, 4-4, 4-5
S
prerequisites to software installation, 10-2
private network safety guidelines, 6-1
verifying operations, 11-9 scp file copy utility, 14-2
problem reporting, 5-1 screwdrivers, 6-4
Puppet utility, 10-26 screws, 6-3
search domain configuration, 4-10
sensor monitoring, 15-2
Q serial numbers, 13-29
QSFP cables, 1-4 server boot order, resetting, 13-41
QSFP ports, splitting, 3-5 server components, 1-2
querying configuration, 13-11 server configuration, 7-19
in-rack expansion kit, 8-3
server diagnostics, 13-19
R server disks
rack base name configuration, 4-5 configuring, 12-6
rack components, 1-1 replacing, 12-1
Index-7
server factory IP addresses, 3-6 cabling, E-3
server LEDs, B-2 configuring, 7-12
server locations in the rack, C-2, D-2 replacing, 11-8, 11-9
server software validation, 13-9 splitter cables, 3-5
servers spring nuts, 6-3
adding memory, 11-4 SSH
adding to a cluster, 10-7 removing passwordless, 13-39
allocating into clusters, 4-12 setting up passwordless, 13-42
connecting to Oracle ILOM, 15-5 SSH keys, checking rack distribution, 7-20
default passwords, 7-20 stabilizing feet, 6-5
LED color codes, B-3, B-4 stabilizing the rack, 6-6
location in the rack, C-2, D-2 starter rack
monitoring, 15-1 component configuration, 7-1
spare parts, B-5, B-8 expanding, 8-1
upgrading base image, 10-18 physical layout, C-1
service locations, restrictions on moving, 1-6 StartHadoopServices step, 10-27
services, starting, 10-27 starting KVM, 7-2
setsmpriority command, 7-16, 9-2, 9-4 starting or stopping Big Data SQL, 13-12
SetupASR step, 10-28 startup order, resetting, 13-41
SetupEMAgent step, 10-28 state file, 10-8
SetupInstall step, 10-25 static discharges, 2-10
SetupKerberos step, 10-27 static electricity, 6-2
SetupMountPoints step, 10-27 status indicators, B-2
SetupMySQL step, 10-27 Subnet Manager, 9-2, 9-3, 11-11
SetupPuppet step, 10-26 Subnet Manager Master, 9-5
setup-root-ssh script, 11-12, 13-42, 14-2 Subnet Managers, 11-11
shipping dimensions, 2-3, 6-2 subnet mask factory settings, 3-6
shipping kit, 6-3 Sun Network 10 GbE Switch 72p, 1-5, 3-6
shipping weight, 2-3 Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway
show command, 7-11 Switch, 11-12, 13-27, 13-37
showunhealthy command, 7-16 Sun Server components, 1-2
showusb utility, 7-24, 13-44 support accounts, 5-2
showvlan utility, 13-45 support services, 13-24
showvnics utility, 13-46 swap partition, restoring, 12-15
shutdown command, 11-2 swapping, 12-3, 12-4, 13-30, 13-31
single-phase PDUs, 2-5, 6-2, 6-13, 11-13, 11-14 switch LEDs, InfiniBand switch LEDs, B-2
site readiness tasks, 2-12 switch ports, D-7
slot numbers (disk drives), 12-3 switches
slots, disk drives, 12-2 location in the rack, C-2, D-2
SMTP alerts, 5-1 monitoring, 15-1
SNMP alerts, 5-1 naming conventions, 4-5
software configuration replacement parts, B-16
querying, 13-11 replacing, 11-8
software image setting host names, 7-14
downgrading, 10-8 spare parts, B-14, B-15
upgrading, 10-8 third-party, 1-6
software installation symbolic link names (disk drives), 12-2
multiple racks, 10-7 synchronizing servers, 13-10
upgrading, 10-9
using Mammoth, 10-5
T
software installation policy, 1-5
software options, adding after installation, 10-29 Taiwanese PDU specifications, 2-5, 2-6
software port assignments, 3-7 tee utility, 8-6
software profiles, acquiring from servers, 7-22 telnet access, configuring Ethernet switch, 7-8
software source code, third party, 10-26 temperature
software validation, 13-3, 13-25 acceptable range, 2-10
sound levels, 2-1, 2-2 operating range, 2-9
South American PDU specifications, 2-5, 2-6 test events (ASR), 5-5
spares kit, 1-3, 6-4 testrule setting (ASR), 5-5
spine switches third-party license location, 10-26
Index-8
third-party software, 1-5
third-party software source code, 10-26
third-party switches, restrictions on use, 1-6
three-phase PDUs, 2-6, 2-8, 11-14
thresholds for PDUs, 11-13
time synchronization, 13-10
time zone
configuration setting, 4-5
configuring Ethernet switch, 7-9
configuring InfiniBand switches, 7-14
setting summer time, 7-10
top clearance (rack), 2-3
trap destinations (ASR), 5-4
U
unpacking instructions, 6-4
upgrade history, 13-35
upgrading base image, 10-18
upgrading the factory image, 10-8
upgrading the software, 10-9
UPS, 2-9
USB devices, restrictions on use, 1-6
USB flash drive, 7-23, 13-44
users, hdfs and mapred, 10-26
V
validating a cluster, 13-3
validating hardware and software, 13-25
validating network configuration, 13-8
validating the server software, 13-9
validation checks after reboot, 6-14
ventilation requirements, 2-10
verifying
database server configuration, 11-5
version command, 7-15
virtual drive configuration, 11-5
VLANs
configuration, 13-45
configuration example, 7-5
default configuration, 3-1
VNICs
assigning to gateway switches, 3-5
configuration, 13-46
default configuration, 3-1
re-creating, 13-27
W
warnings, 11-3
warranty restrictions, 1-4
washers, 6-7
watcher logs (OS), 13-19
weight
rack, 2-1, 2-2
shipping, 2-3
wrenches, 6-3, 6-8
wrist strap, 6-4
Index-9
Index-10

E55796 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E55796 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E55796 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oracle

[1] Big Data Appliance

Preface .............................................................................................................................................................. xvii

1 Introduction to Oracle Big Data Appliance

2 Site Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance

3 Understanding the Network Requirements

4 Using Oracle Big Data Appliance Configuration Generation Utility

5 Setting Up Auto Service Request

Part II Hardware Installation and Configuration

6 Installing Oracle Big Data Appliance at the Site

7 Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance Full Rack or Starter Rack

8 Configuring an Oracle Big Data Appliance In-Rack Expansion Kit

9 Connecting Multiple Oracle Big Data Appliance Racks

Part III Software Installation and Configuration

10 Installing the Oracle Big Data Appliance Software

11 Maintaining Oracle Big Data Appliance

12 Replacing a Server Disk

13 Oracle Big Data Appliance Utilities

14 Executing Commands Across a Cluster Using the dcli Utility

15 Using Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager

A Error Messages for Oracle Big Data Appliance

D In-Rack Cabling Tables for Oracle Big Data Appliance

E Multirack Cabling Tables

Access to Oracle Support

Backus-Naur Form Syntax

Symbol or Convention Description

Changes in Oracle Big Data Appliance Release 4 (4.0)

About Oracle Big Data Appliance

See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Software User's Guide

Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components

Table 11 Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components

Introduction to Oracle Big Data Appliance 1-1

Table 11 (Cont.) Oracle Big Data Appliance Rack Components

Table 12 Sun Server X4-2L Server Components

Table 13 lists the components of a Sun Server X3-2L.

Table 13 Sun Server X3-2L Server Components

1-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

Table 13 (Cont.) Sun Server X3-2L Server Components

Table 14 lists the components of a Sun Fire X4270 M2.

Table 14 Sun Fire X4270 M2 Server Components

Spare Parts Kit Components

Table 15 Bundled Components and Accessories

Table 16 Bundled Cables

Introduction to Oracle Big Data Appliance 1-3

Table 17 In-Rack Spare Cables

Oracle Big Data Appliance Management Software

Note: See Chapter 13 except where directed otherwise.

Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (Oracle ILOM) consists of preinstalled,

Oracle Big Data Appliance Restrictions on Use

1-4 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

Introduction to Oracle Big Data Appliance 1-5

The software must be related to the use of Cloudera's Distribution including

1-6 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

See Also: Oracle Big Data Appliance Site Checklists

General Environmental Requirements

Site Requirements for Oracle Big Data Appliance 2-1

2-2 Oracle Big Data Appliance Owner's Guide

Receiving and Unpacking Requirements

Table 23 Shipping Measurements